Manual Safe

Diseño de Concreto Postensado
SAFE®
DESIGN OF SLABS, BEAMS AND FOUNDATIONIS
REINFORCED AND POST-TENSIONED CONCRETE
Post-Tensioned Concrete
Design Manual
Ing Jorge Cabanillas , MSc
Barcelona Noviembre 2014

Copyright
Copyright  Computers & Structures, Inc., 1978-2014

All rights reserved.
The CSI Logo® and SAFE® are registered trademarks of Computers & Structures, Inc.
Watch & LearnTM is a trademark of Computers & Structures, Inc. Adobe and Acrobat are
registered trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorported. AutoCAD is a registered trademark
of Autodesk, Inc.
The computer program SAFE® and all associated documentation are proprietary and
copyrighted products. Worldwide rights of ownership rest with Computers & Structures,
Inc. Unlicensed use of this program or reproduction of documentation in any form,
without prior written authorization from Computers & Structures, Inc., is explicitly
prohibited.
No part of this publication may be reproduced or distributed in any form or by any

means, or stored in a database or retrieval system, without the prior explicit written
permission of the publisher.
Further information and copies of this documentation may be obtained from:
Computers & Structures, Inc.

www.csiamerica.com
[email protected] (for general information)

[email protected] (for technical support)
DISCLAIMER
CONSIDERABLE TIME, EFFORT AND EXPENSE HAVE GONE INTO THE

DEVELOPMENT AND TESTING OF THIS SOFTWARE. HOWEVER, THE USER
ACCEPTS AND UNDERSTANDS THAT NO WARRANTY IS EXPRESSED OR
IMPLIED BY THE DEVELOPERS OR THE DISTRIBUTORS ON THE ACCURACY
OR THE RELIABILITY OF THIS PRODUCT.
THIS PRODUCT IS A PRACTICAL AND POWERFUL TOOL FOR STRUCTURAL
DESIGN. HOWEVER, THE USER MUST EXPLICITLY UNDERSTAND THE BASIC
ASSUMPTIONS OF THE SOFTWARE MODELING, ANALYSIS, AND DESIGN
ALGORITHMS AND COMPENSATE FOR THE ASPECTS THAT ARE NOT
ADDRESSED.
THE INFORMATION PRODUCED BY THE SOFTWARE MUST BE CHECKED BY
A QUALIFIED AND EXPERIENCED ENGINEER. THE ENGINEER MUST
INDEPENDENTLY VERIFY THE RESULTS AND TAKE PROFESSIONAL
RESPONSIBILITY FOR THE INFORMATION THAT IS USED.
Contents
Part I Post-Tensioning Concrete Design Theory and

Methodology
Chapter 1 Introduction
1.1 Overview 1-1
1.2 Post Tensioning System in SAFE 1-1
1.3 Definition of Terms 1-2
1.4 Analysis and Design Procedure 1-3
Chapter 2 The Tendon Object in SAFE

2.1 Overview 2-1
2.2 Tendon Geometry 2-1
2.3 Tendon Discretization 2-2
2.4 Tendon Material Property 2-3
2.5 Tendon Property 2-3

2.6 Tendon Loads 2-4
i
Post-Tensioned Concrete Design
Chapter 3 Computing Prestress Losses

3.1 Overview 3-1
3.2 Computation of Short-Term Losses 3-3
3.2.1 Stress Loss Due to Friction (Curvature
and Wobble) 3-3
3.2.2 Anchorage Set Slip Losses 3-4
3.2.3 Elastic Shortening of Concrete 3-6
3.3 Computation of Long-Term Losses 3-6
Chapter 4 Loads Due to Post-Tensioning

4.1 Overview 4-1
4.2 Dead Load-Balancing 4-2
4.3 Primary Moments 4-3
4.4 Secondary (Hyperstatic) Moments 4-4
Chapter 5 Automated Tendon Layout

5.1 Overview 5-1
5.2 Adding Tendons to a SAFE Model 5-2
5.3 Procedures Used in Automated Tendon Layout 5-4
Part II Post-Tensioning Concrete Design Codes
Chapter 6 Design for ACI 318-08

6.1 Notations 6-1
6.2 Design Load Combinations 6-5

6.2.1 Initial Service Load Combination 6-5
6.2.2 Service Load Combination 6-5
6.2.3 Long-Term Service Load Combination 6-6
6.2.4 Strength Design Load Combination 6-6
6.3 Limits on Material Strength 6-7
6.4 Strength Reduction Factors 6-7
ii
Contents
6.5 Design Assumptions for Prestressed Concrete 6-8
6.6 Serviceability Requirements of Flexural

Members 6-10
6.6.1 Serviceability Check at Initial Service
Load 6-10
6.6.2 Serviceability Checks at Service Load 6-10
6.6.3 Serviceability Checks at Long-Term
Service Load 6-11
6.6.4 Serviceability Checks of Prestressing
Steel 6-11
6.7 Beam Design 6-12

6.7.1 Design Flexural Reinforcement 6-12
6.7.2 Design Beam Shear Reinforcement 6-23
6.7.3 Design Beam Torsion Reinforcement 6-26
6.8 Slab Design 6-31

6.8.1 Design for Flexure 6-31
6.8.2 Check for Punching Shear 6-33
6.8.3 Design Punching Shear Reinforcement 6-37
Chapter 7 Design for AS 3600-01

7.1 Notations 7-1

7.2.3 Ultimate Limit State Load Combination 7-5

7.5 Design Assumptions for Prestressed
Concrete Structures 7-7

Members 7-8
Load 7-8
7.6.2 Serviceability Check at Service Load 7-9
iii


Chapter 8 Design for BS 8110-97

8.1 Notations 8-1

8.4 Partial Safety Factors 8-6


Members 8-9
Load 8-9


iv
Contents
Chapter 9 Design for CSA A23.3-04

9.1 Notations 9-1
9.2.2 Service Load Combinations 9-5

9.5 Design Assumptions for Prestressed Concrete 9-8

Members 9-9
Load 9-9
9.6.3 Serviceability Check at Long-Term
Service Load 9-10

Chapter 10 Design for Eurocode 2-2004

10.1 Notations 10-2

v
10.5 Design Assumptions for Prestressed Concrete

Structures 10-11

Members 10-12
Load 10-12


10.8.3 Design Punching Shear
Reinforcement 10-37
10.9 Nationally Determined Parameters (NDPs) 10-40
Chapter 11 Design for Hong Kong CP-04

11.1 Notations 11-1



Members 11-8
Load 11-8
vi
Contents


Chapter 12 Design for IS 1343-1980

12.1 Notations 12-1

12.5 Design Requirements of Prestressed Concrete

Structures 12-7
12.5.1 Limit State of Collapse 12-7
12.5.2 Limit State of Serviceability 12-8
12.6 Maximum Compression Check 12-9

12.6.1 Maximum Compressive Stress at
Transfer 12-9
12.6.2 Maximum Compressive Stress Under
Service Conditions 12-9

12.7.2 Design Beam Shear Reinforcement
(Torsion Excluded) 12-20
(Torsion Included) 12-23

vii

Chapter 13 Design for NZ 3101:06

13.1 Notations 13-1

13.4 Strength Reductions Factors 13-7


Members 13-9
Load 13-9
Service Load 13-11
Steel 13-11


Chapter 14 Design for Singapore CP 65:99

14.1 Notations 14-1
viii
Contents

14.3 Limit on Material Strength 14-6

Members 14-8
Load 14-8


Chapter 15 Design for AS 3600-09

15.1 Notations 15-1


ix

Members 15-8
Load 15-8

Chapter 16 Design for ACI 318-11

16.1 Notations 16-1


Concrete 16-8

Members 16-10
Load 16-10
16.6.2 Serviceability Checks at Service Load 16-10
Service Load 16-11
Steel 16-11
x
Contents


Chapter 17 Design for TS 3233-1979

17.1 Notations 17-1


Concrete 17-7

Members 17-8
Load 17-8


xi
Chapter 18 Design for Italian NTC 2008

18.1 Notations 18-1


Members 18-10
Load 18-10


Chapter 19 Design for Hong Kong CP 2013

19.1 Notations 19-1

xii
Contents


Members 19-8
Load 19-8

References
xiii
CAPITULO 1
Introducción
1.1 Caracteristicas
Parte I de este manual se describen los algoritmos de la metodología y diseño realizado
por SAFE para el análisis y diseño de losas y vigas estructurales postesadas. Presenta
los métodos utilizados por SAFE para modelar objetos del tendón, pérdidas de
pretensado, cargas de postensado, y la automatización de los diseños de los tendones.
Hay dos maneras posibles de aplicar tension al hormigón, se sabe que son
postensado y pretensado. SAFE considera sólo el postensado de losas y vigas.
Los tendones de postensado pueden ser adheridos y no adheridos.
1.2 Sistema de Postensado en SAFE

En SAFE, elementos tipo tendón se utilizan para proporcionar el postensado.
Los tendones se pueden colocar en cualquier lugar y en cualquier dirección del
plano (véase el capítulo 5). Cada tendón consiste en un número determinado de
cables o torones. La Figura 1-1 proporciona un esquema de los aspectos que
intervienen en la inclusión de post-tensado, desde la definición del material
hasta la salida detallada de respuestas.
Overview 1-1
Tendon
Materials
Tendon
Properties
Tendon Load Calculo Perdidas

(Fuerza en gato) Parametros
Dibujo Tendons
Tendon Editar Tendons
Objects Disposicion Automatica
de Tendons
Fuerzas debido
Tendones
Otras cargas
Analysis
y parametros
Fuerza y Capacidad
Diseño
Diseño en Servicio
Output
Fuerza de Diseño
Output
Detalle Output
Figure 1-1 Esquema del sistema y proceso de postensado.
Los procedimientos de análisis y diseño específicos utilizados en SAFE están

destinados a cumplir con los códigos de diseño pertinentes , tal como se
presenta en la Parte II de este manual .
1.3 Definicion de Terminos

Los términos utilizados en este manual , en el contexto de hormigón
pretensado , son los siguientes
1-2 Definition of Terms

Chapter 1 - Introduction
Prestressed Concrete - Este término se refiere al concreto que ha sido pre -

comprimido , a menudo antes de la aplicación de otras cargas , y en este
manual se refiere a sólo postensado .
Post-Tensioning - Es un procedimiento en el que los tendones de acero se

tensan después de que el concreto haya sido lanzado .
Tendon Object - Consta de una serie de alambres de acero de alta resistencia o

hebras envueltas por un conducto , colocada en cualquier lugar de la losa o viga.
Post-Tensioning Loads - Es las fuerzas que el tendón ejerce sobre la estructura .

Esto incluye tanto las cargas verticales debidas al perfil tendón y las finales debido
a las fuerzas de anclaje del tendón. La fuerza debida a la pérdida por fricción se
distribuye uniformemente a lo largo de la longitud del tendón.
Self Weight - Es el peso de la estructura debido a la gravedad , se calcula

automáticamente en SAFE de las dimensiones de los elmentos y la densidad de
los materiales especificados que la componen.
1.4 Procedimiento para Analisis y Diseño

Después que un modelo se ha completado en SAFE y todas las definiciones
de propiedad de material y sección de elementos se han especificado como
geometría del modelo ( incluyendo diseños de tendón , perfiles y asignacion de
fuerza en el gato), las asignaciones de miembros y los criterios de carga , el
análisis está listo para llevar a cabo
Durante la fase de análisis , SAFE calculará reacciones , desplazamientos en
miembros, las fuerzas de vigas , losas , las fuerzas y tensiones en losa para todos
los patrones y combinaciones de carga especificados . SAFE luego realiza un
diseño de acuerdo con el código de diseño especificada y calcula la cantidad
requerida de refuerzo de acero pasivo y lleva a cabo los controles de punzonado
adecuados .
SAFE automatiza el diseño de losas y plateas, especificamente se integra
momentos de diseño a través de la losa usando franjas de diseño (Strip) y diseña el
refuerzo requerido; comprueba punzonamiento en la losa alrededor de los soportes
de columna y de cargas concentradas; y diseña las vigas por flexión, por corte y
torsión colocando el refuerzos requerido. Los procedimientos de diseño se
describen en el capítulo titulado "SAFE Características de diseño" en las
características y terminología manual. Los algoritmos de diseño reales varían
basado en el código de diseño específico elegido por el usuario. Parte II de este
manual se describen los algoritmos utilizados por los distintos códigos.
Analysis and Design Procedure 1- 3

Cabe señalar que el diseño de losas postensadas y reforzada de concreto es un

tema complejo y los códigos de diseño cubre muchos aspectos de este proceso.
SAFE es una herramienta para ayudar al usuario en este proceso. Sólo los
aspectos de diseño documentados en este manual están automatizadas por las
capacidades de diseño seguro. El usuario debe comprobar los resultados
producidos y abordar otros aspectos no cubiertos por la SAFE.
1-4 Analysis and Design Procedure

Capitulo 2
El Objeto Tendón en SAFE
2.1 Caracteristica
Los tendones son un tipo especial de objeto que puede ser embebido en elementos
de concreto para representar el efecto de post-tensado. Estos objetos de los
tendones pasan a través de los objetos de la losa y de la viga, se adhieren a ellos, e
imponen cargas sobre ellos. Los tendones son modelados como elementos
independientes.
Cualquier número de tendones puede ser definida. Cada tendón se dibuja o se
define como un tipo de objeto de línea entre dos nudos, i y j. Las dos nudos no
deben compartir el mismo lugar en el espacio. Los dos extremos del tendón se
denotan extremo I y extremo J, respectivamente. El tendón puede tener una forma
curvada o segmentado arbitraria en tres dimensiones entre esos puntos.
2.2 Geometria del Tendon

El perfil vertical de un tendón se puede definir o modificar mediante la forma
que se muestra en la Figura 2-1.
Overview 2-1
Figure 2-1 Tendon Vertical Profile form, use to define or modify the tendon profile
Si no se especifica un perfil vertical, SAFE proporcionará un perfil predeterminado

usando las cortinas máximos permitidos por las condiciones de liquidación
especificadas para la losa superior e inferior. Las capacidades de diseño del tendón
automatizados también automatizan el perfil del tendón, tal como se describe en el
Capítulo 5.
2.3 Discretizacion del Tendon

Un tendón puede ser un objeto largo con geometría complicada, pero internamente, se
discretiza automáticamente en segmentos más cortos para los fines de análisis. La
longitud máxima de estos segmentos se especifica como el tamaño máximo de malla
utilizando el menú Run menu > Mesh Options de malla. Estas longitudes pueden
afectar a cómo los tendones carga la estructura y la exactitud de los resultados del
análisis. Se recomienda que las longitudes más cortas pueden ser usadas para tendones
con geometría altamente curvada o de tendones que pasan a través de partes de la
estructura con geometría complicada o cambios en las propiedades. Si no está seguro
qué valor debe utilizar, probar varias longitudes diferentes para evaluar el efecto sobre
los resultados.
2-2 Tendon Discretization

Chapter 2 - The Tendon Object in SAFE
2.4 Propiedades del Material

Las propiedades de los materiales para los tendones se definen en términos
de la densidad de peso, módulo de elasticidad (E), límite fluencia mínimo
(fy), y el minimo esfuerzo en tension (fu). Usa el comendo Define menu >
Materials, y presionar el boton Add New Material, y se mostrara el recuadro de
la Figure 2-2 para especificar las propiedades del material del tendón. Propiedades
pueden especificar múltiples si es necesario.
Figure 2-2 Material Property Data form
2.5 Propiedades del Tendon

La propiedad de tendón contiene el area del toron o area del cable que forma el
tendon asi como del material de tendón. Ya que los tendones pueden ser
representados por un solo cable o multiples torones, el área de un cable solo
debería ser especificado en la forma de Datos de Tendon Property Data form,
shown in Figure 2-3, que se accede usando el comando Define menu >
Tendon Properties y presionanado el boton de Add Property. El número de
cables es especificado asignando propiedades de tendón o editing un tendón
(refer to the respective Assign or Edit menu command).
Tendon Material Property 2 - 3

Figure 2-3 Tendon Property Data form
2.6 Cargas
Después de que los tendones se han añadido al modelo SAFE, las cargas de los
tendones se pueden especificar. Las cargas se pueden asignar a un único
tendón o tendones múltiples por primera selección de los tendones para ser
cargados, seleccionando el menú Assign menu > Load Data >Tendon Loads,
y luego modificar los datos en la forma que se muestra en la Figura 2-4.
Figure 2-4 Tendon Load form
2-4 Tendon Loads

Chapter 2 - The Tendon Object in SAFE
Los nombres de los patrones de carga, ubicacion de gatos y el la tension en el

jack del tendón son definidos de esta forma. La carga de tendón (jacking la
tensión) es la carga total aplicada al incio, al final o ambos extremos. La fuerza
de tendón real variará a lo largo del tendón , gobernado por la friccion y otros
parámetros de pérdida.
Las pérdidas de tendón pueden ser asignadas a un simple tendon o multiples tendones
con solo seleccionar el primer tendon, usando el comendo Assign menu > Load
Data > Tendon Losses y modificar los datos como se muestra en la Figure 2-5.
Figure 2-5 Tendon Losses form
Tendon Loads 2 - 5
Capitulo 3
Cálculo de Pérdidas de Postensionado
3.1 Caracteristicas
La carga de tendón para un caso de carga dado se refiere a la fuerza en el jacking que
definio el Usuario. La carga real que es aplicada a losas y vigas será menos que la
fuerza de jacking debido a pérdidas de pretensión. Las pérdidas de pretensión son
clasificadas en SAFE como pérdidas a corto plazo y pérdidas a largo plazo, así:
Short-term or Stressing losses - Estos son las pérdidas que ocurren durante e
inmediatamente después de las operaciones de post-tensionado y son causadas por la
fricción entre los tendones y el ducto, el acortamiento elastico, y en los asientos de
anclajes.
Long-term losses - Estos tipos de pérdidas suceden en el tiempo y también pueden

ser referidos como las pérdidas dependientes del tiempo e incluyen la fluencia, la
contracción y la relajación de acero. (creep, shrinkage and steel relaxation)
Using the Assign menu > Load Data > Tendon Losses el comando muestra
la forma de entrada de datos; (Figura 3-1) y permite que las pérdidas de
pretensado que se especifiquen mediante uno de tres métodos.
Overview 3-1
Figure 3-1 Tendon Load form
Los dos primeros métodos de cálculo de las Pérdidas se puede especificar como un
porcentaje de la fuerza de postensado o como un valor fijo para perdidas a corto o
largo plazo. La tercera opción permite un cálculo más detallado de las pérdidas de
pretensado sobre la base de una serie de valores de entrada para pérdidas tanto a corto
plazo y largo plazo. A corto plazo: Pérdidas por fricción se calculan internamente y
de forma explícita por SAFE basada en el coeficiente de curvatura y wobble (Pérdidas
producidas por el rozamiento de las armaduras activas postesas en sus cambios de
trayectoria dentro de los conductos); en el Anchorage Set Slip que es la Pérdidas de
fuerza por deslizamiento de las armaduras activas en sus anclajes debido a penetración
de cuñas y en el acortamiento elastico. A largo plazo: fluencia, la contracción y la
relajación de acero. (creep, shrinkage and steel relaxation).
Otros factores, como los cambios en la temperatura y la flexión de la estructura bajo

carga, no reducen significativamente el nivel de tensión previa y no se consideran
explícitamente.
Entender la distribución de tensiones a lo largo de la longitud de un miembro con

respecto a los efectos a corto plazo o de largo plazo es importante para analizar
correctamente y la interpretación de los resultados. Las pérdidas de pretensado son
evidentes en términos de la distribución de tensiones a lo largo de la longitud como
3-2 Overview
Chapter 3 - Computing Prestress Losses
se muestra en la Figure 3-2. La variación en la tensión real varía exponen-

cialmente de acuerdo con la Ecuación 3.1 en la siguiente sección.
TENDO N
P P
cgc line
Figure 3-2 Prestress load variation along tendon length
La tension en el gato se especifica comunmente como 0.80fpu, donde fpu is la

resistencia ultima especificada en el cable que integra un tendon. La Figure 3-2
muestra una representación de la variación de la fuerza del tendón desde el gato
(jack) hasta el anclaje (anchorage) extremo izquierdo. Si el tendón tiene el gato en
el extremo derecho, la Figura 3-2 se invertiría. Si el tendón tiene ambos extremos
el gato, la fuerza de pretensado inicial máxima (fuerza en el gato) existiría en cada
extremo y podría variar a un valor mínimo (valor medio del anterior) a lo largo de
la longitud del tendón. Las fuerzas de pretensado iniciales se reducen a las fuerzas
finales pre-tensión de acuerdo con las pérdidas a largo plazo especificados y se
muestran esquemáticamente como el pretensado final en la Figura 3-2.
3.2 Cálculo de Perdidas a Corto Tiempo
3.2.1 Pérdida debido a la fricción (Curvatura y Wobble)

Cuando usamos "Based on Detailed Calculations" como método de cálculo
para contabilizar las Pérdida, entonces las pérdidas por fricción se calcularan
utilizando los coeficientes de la curvatura y de las oscilaciones (wobble)
especificados por el usuario. La pérdida por fricción debido a la curvatura se
calcula en SAFE como:
Computation of Short-Term Losses 3 - 3
P( X ) = P0 e − ( µα + Kx ) , donde (Ecuacion 3.1)
µ = coeficinete de friccion por curvature
α = suma de la variación angular del tendón desde el extremo de elevación tendón

a distancia x
K = coeficiente de fricción de oscilación (wobble) (rad/unit length2 )
P(X) = Post-tensioning force at a distance x
P0 = Post-tensioning force at stressing

Las pérdidas post-tensado debido a la fricción resultado en una distribución de la fuerza a lo
largo de la longitud del tendón es exponencialmente decreciente desde el punto de ajuste .
En el coeficiente empírico, K es el efecto acumulativo de la rigidez de la

envoltura, el diámetro de la envoltura, el espaciado de los soportes de la vaina
(Figura 3-3), el tipo de tendón, y el tipo de funda, incluyendo la forma de
construcción .
Perfil real debido
al wobble
perfil previsto
el apoyo del ducto
a = cambio de ángulo deseado
Figure 3-3 Pérdida por fricción por Wobble
3.2.2 Perdida por corrimiento en el Anclaje

En la última etapa de la operación de tesado (aplicacion fuerza), los tendones
generalmente están anclados con cuñas de dos piezas cónicas. Estas operaciones en el
anclaje normalmente resultan con una pérdida de pretensado adicional debido al
corrimiento de los asientos en las cuñas, teniendo en cuenta que el cable o toron que
forma el tendon se retrae cuando se libera y saca las cuñas en el dispositivo de anclaje.
3-4 Computation of Short-Term Losses

El cálculo de las pérdidas en el postensado se realiza típicamente de
manera iterativa. Como se muestra en la Figura 3-4, la distancia "c" se
refiere a la longitud de influencia del sistema de anclaje. El procedimiento
es: escoger el sistema de anclaje (por lo general aproximadamente 0,25 a
0,375 pulg o de 6 a 8 mm), entonces la distancia "c" es conocida, y,
finalmente, la tensión correspondiente se calcula, con la suposición de que
las tensiones varían linealmente desde la aplicacion de la fuerza en el gato.
Jacking Force, P j
Lock off Force
c
Force
dx Tendon
Force
Pj Px
Pa
x
a
c
Anchor Set of Influence
Figure 3-4 diagrama de la longitud de influencia del anclaje
La pérdida debido al corrimiento del anclaje se calcula utilizando la siguiente ecuación :
SL ≈ a =
∫
(σ j − σ x )dx
(Ecuacion 3.2)
Es
Computation of Short-Term Losses 3 - 5

El proceso de iteración se detiene cuando la pérdida en el anclaje calculado es

casi igual a la del conjunto de anclaje "a" ; la tensión máxima , sera:
σ max = σ j − (σ j − σ x ) (Ecua. 3.3)
Además , el alargamiento se calculará de la siguiente manera:
∆a =
∫ (Px − Pa )dx
(Ecua. 3.4)
AE s
donde Δa es la elongación asociada con el conjunto de anclaje asumido

distancia "a" ; Px es la fuerza del tendón a una distancia x desde el punto
de anclaje (gato); Pa es la fuerza en el tendon despues de las perdidas en el
gato asumiendo un corrimiento de “a”; dx s la longitud de los elementos a lo
largo del tendón; A es el area de la seccion del tendon y Es es el Modulo de
Elasticidad del material que conforma el tendon.
3.2.3 El acortamiento elástico del Concreto

Acortamiento elástico se refiere al acortamiento del concreto cuando se aplica
la fuerza de post-tensado. Como el concreto se acorta , la longitud del
tendón también acorta, lo que resulta en una pérdida de pretensado. Si se
usan los pasos secuenciales de ajuste en el gato , el primer tendón se ajustara y
anclara la cual sufrirá la cantidad máxima de pérdida de acortamiento elástico. Por
el contrario, no habrá pérdida a causa de acortamiento elástico para el último
tendón en esta secuencia o en un solo tendón porque el acortamiento elástico se
llevará a cabo antes de que el tendón se acuñe en el dispositivo de anclaje. La
cantidad especificada por el usuario de la pérdida de pretensado debido al
acortamiento elástico se aplica uniformemente en toda la longitud del tendón.
3.3 Cálculo de pérdidas a largo plazo

Las pérdidas de pretensado a largo plazo de un elemento incluyen la
fluencia , la contracción , y los efectos de relajación de acero .
Varios métodos pueden ser utilizados para determinar las pérdidas a largo
tiempo; Sin embargo , SAFE se basa en los valores de entrada definido por el
usuario en el formulario de Pérdidas tendón que se muestra en la Figura 3-1 .
La suma global en SAFE debe reflejar las condiciones apropiadas que existen
para la estructura que se está modelando. Creep, shrinkage, y
3-6 Computation of Long-Term Losses

efectos de steel relaxation, que se rigen por las propiedades del material y ,
en algunos casos , otras condiciones ambientales que deben tenerse en cuenta
para la hora de especificar los valores de pérdida a largo plazo . Cada pérdida
de esfuerzo se trata por separado y, a continuación resume , como sigue:
TL = CR + SH + RE (Ecua. 3.7)
donde TL es la pérdida total de la tensión ; CR es la pérdida de tensión debido

a la fluencia del concreto ; SH es la pérdida de tensión debido a la contracción
del concreto; y RE es la pérdida de tensión debido a la relajación en el acero
del tendón . La suma de estas pérdidas se aplica a la ( gato ) carga inicial del
tendón , tal como se representa en la Figura 3-2 . Todas las pérdidas a largo
plazo se aplican de manera uniforme en toda la longitud del tendón .
Computation of Long-Term Losses 3 - 7

Capitulo 4
Cargas Debido al Postensado
4.1 Caracteristicas
SAFE no se basa en un método aproximado "de carga equivalente" para el
cálculo de las respuestas de elementos sometidos a cargas de postensado
SAFE utiliza el método de elementos finitos, que incluye los efectos de los
tendones como una carga. Cuando se especifica el tipo de geometria
parabólica para el tendón , SAFE realiza una integración numérica a través
del elemento finito utilizando la función de esa forma parabólica real que
define la geometría del tendón. Este enfoque es más precisa, especialmente
cuando los elementos tienen mucha profundad, (espesor).
Una de las consecuencias de la aplicación de una carga de post- tensado a un

elemento es la introducción de fuerzas secundarias ( hiperestáticas ). Estos
efectos y casos de carga se discuten en este capítulo .
SAFE utiliza el método de balanceo de carga muerta como procedimiento

principal para la determinación de los perfiles de los tendones cuando se
solicitan estos de manera automatica ( véase el capítulo 5 ). Este capítulo
también proporciona información sobre el método utilizado para llevar a
cabo un diseño balanceado de carga.
Overview 4-1
4.2 Carga Muerta - Balanceada

El método de equilibrio de carga muerta se utiliza en SAFE para
determinar un diseño incial del tendón ( incluyendo el perfil ̀ el nmero ̀ de
hebras - cables o torones ̀ y la fuerza en el gato) solo aplica cuando se
utiliza la característica de diseño automatizado. El concepto básico de
equilibrio de carga muerta es que la tensión previa esfuerzos de flexión ̀
f ̀ Pe / S, son igual pero opuesta a la carga muerta sobre esfuerzos de fleión ̀
f ̀ Mc / I. Cuando existe un set de carga.
El atio ̀ Equilibrio y el ivel ̀ de precompresión en forma rápida usando
en comando ̀ Quick endon ̀ Layout, se muestra en la Figura 4-1, en
SAFE se debe especificar la posición del tendón ̀ necesario para encontrar
la excentricidad, "e", que equilibra las tensiones de carga muerta.
Figure 4-1 Quick Tendon Layout form

Los diagramas de esfuerzo; Figura 4-2 ilustran el concepto de equilibrio de
carga muerta. (a) La tensión límite de precompresión especificado se aplica en
primer lugar . (b) A continuación, las tensiones de carga muertas son
calculadas, (c) seguido por iteración la ubicación del tendón para equilibrar las
tensiones de carga muerta, (d) que finalmente resulta en el estado de
precompresión.
La distribución final de esfuerzos es el resultado de esta tensión de
precompresión combinado con las tensiones resultantes de la aplicación de
todas las cargas restantes y combinaciones de diseño. Si la distribución
final de esfuerzo contiene tensiones de tracción que excedan el límite
permisible de diseño , SAFE calcula la cantidad necesaria de acero de
refuerzo.
4-2 Dead Load-Balancing

Chapter 4 - Loads Due to Post-Tensioning
Capítulo 5 detalla los pasos utilizados por SAFE en la automatización de la

distribución del tendón ..
Figure 4-2 Precompresión y balanceo de esfuerzo por carga muerta
4.3 Momentos Primarios

Si una sección de corte sobre una viga cargada uniformemente, las acciones en
las secciones de corte incluirán la fuerza Px concéntrica, un momento primario
Mp , y una fuerza de corte Vx . El momento principal en esta sección necesario
para mantener el equilibrio de la carga, se puede expresar como :
M p = ∫ ( wdx ) x + PL a (Ecua 4.1)
donde , w, es la intensidad de la carga a una distancia " x ", PL es la componente

vertical de la fuerza del tendón en el anclaje a la izquierda, y "a" es la distancia
a la sección de corte medido desde el anclaje izquierdo.
Del mismo modo, un diagrama de cuerpo libre del tendón mostraría la

fuerza Px concéntrica y un cortante Vx en una seccion de corte , junto con la
carga "w". De la misma manera , la fuerza Px tomando momentos alrededor
Primary Moments 4 - 3
de la línea CGC de una excentricidad "e' " o la distancia desde el centroide del
tendón al eje neutro de los elementos en fluencia:
Px e' = ∫ ( wdx) x + PL a (Ecua. 4.2)
Los lados derechos de las ecuaciones 4.1 y 4.2 son idénticas, por lo tanto, el
momento primaria se puede definir como :
M p = Px e' (Ecua. 4.3)
4.4 Momentos Secundarios (Hiperestaticos)

Las reacciones causadas por las fuerzas de postensado en losas o vigas
continuas se denominan reacciones secundarias y son reacciones
hiperestáticas. The two-span beam se muestra en la Figura 4-3 ilustra las
reacciones y momentos debido a las fuerzas de postesado excéntricas.
Si el soporte central se elimina para una viga de dos vanos como se muestra en
la Figura 4-3 , la aplicación de la post-tensado se traduciría en una viga con
desplazamiento hacia arriba ∆. (b) La aplicación de la fuerza necesaria para
desplazar la viga una la cantidad, −∆, puede ser representada como, Ri. De la
Figura 4-3 ( d ) y ( e) , las reacciones hiperestáticas en la cantidad Ri/2 se
producen en cada extremo de la viga y el momento hiperestática M se produce
sobre el apoyo central. En cualquier sección a lo largo de la viga, las
reacciones hiperestáticas inducen un momento hiperestática Mhyp y un corte
hiperestatico Vhyp.
Los resultados del análisis hiperestáticas pueden ser revisados m

ediante la
definición de un caso de carga hiperestática mediante Define menu > Load
Cases para agregar un nuevo caso de carga del Tipo Hiperestática, como se
muestra en la Figura 4-4 .
4-4 Secondary (Hyperstatic) Moments

Chapter 4 - Loads Due to Post-Tensioning
TENDON
P P
cgc line
(a) Viga postensada de dos tramos
Px Px
∆
(b) Fuerza en el tendon al quitar el apoyo intermedio Px
con una deflexion positiva Δ
Px Px
Ri
Ri/2 Ri/2
(c) Reacciones hiperestáticas adicionales se desarrollan en los extremos debido a la
aplicación de la fuerza , Ri, que es necesaria para evitar que la viga no se levante.
Ri
Ri/2 Ri/2
(d) Aparece reacciones secundarias (hyperstatic) Ri en la
viga, asumiendo un comportamiento simple apoyada.
(e) Diagrama de Momento Secundario (hyperstatic) debido a la carga Ri
Figure 4-3 Acciones Secundarias (hyperstatic) debidas al post-tensioning
Secondary (Hyperstatic) Moments 4 - 5

Figure 4-4 Datos de ingreso a casos Hyperstatic Load Case
En el proceso de diseño , se supone que el momento secundario sera resistido a

través de un bloque de compresión y una fuerza de tracción; de forma que:
C =T (Ecua. 4.4)
M sec = Tz = Cz (Ecua. 4.7)
Donde C es la Fuerza Total de compresion, T es la combinacion de fuerza de

tension debido a la aplicacion del postensado en los tendones y del refuerzo,
Z es la distancia a entre estas dos resultantes (C y T)
Concrete Compression
PL C
Px Z
T
Tendon Force
R
Ri
Figure 4-5 acciones debido a la post-tensado y la

distribución interna de las fuerzas hiperestáticas
Así, la combinación para las fuerzas estipulado en la mayoría de los códigos de

diseño para condiciones de gravedad simplemente se considera la adición del
efecto hiperestático a las combinaciones utilizadas para los casos de concreto
no postensados.
4-6 Secondary (Hyperstatic) Moments

Capitulo 5
Tendon Automatico
5.1 Caracteristicas
En el pasado, el análisis y el diseño de las losas post-tensados ha sido difícil
debido al alto grado de indeterminación de la estructura, al gran número de
requisitos de diseño, y la necesidad de proporcionar un diseño económico.
Algunos programas de análisis se basan en aproximaciones simplificadas en el
análisis y el diseño. SAFE elimina la necesidad al ingeniero para simplificar
un modelo de análisis y proporciona las herramientas para automatizar el
trazado del tendón, el perfil, y jacking (fuerzas en los gatos).
En este capítulo se describen los distintos métodos para agregar los tendones a
un modelo SAFE y la metodología utilizada para automatizar la entrada de
datos del tendón . No todos los métodos utilizados para añadir tendones a un
modelo SAFE son adecuados para la automatización como se explica en este
documento .
La automatización de tendón, perfiles, y las fuerzas de apoyo para el gato sirve

como punto de partida en el proceso de análisis y diseño. Si es necesario
realizar ajustes adicionales a las fuerzas de diseño del tendón, perfiles, o apoyo
para el gato, se deben hacer manualmente. SAFE no realiza ninguna revisión
de la forma automatica inicial del tendón . Los parámetros relacionados con los
tendones pueden ser fácilmente modificados, luego se vuelve a analizar y
rediseñar la estructura según sea necesario.
5-1
5.2 Adición de tendones a un modelo en SAFE

Cuatro métodos están disponibles para agregar tendones a un modelo en SAFE
1.-Template modeling – Si un modelo SAFE se inicializa utilizando el

comando File menu > New Model y en el modelo inicial se selecciona la
opción agregar P/T, y los datos de postensado se pueden definir en esta
ventana, post-tensioning data can be defined. Quick Tendon Layout, la forma
rápida de Tendon mostrados en la Figura 5-1 permite especificar la distribución
del tendón por capa A y B, así como los niveles de precompresión y relaciones
de equilibrio de auto-carga. Los tendones con los parámetros de diseño
definidos son incluidos luego en el modelo de plantilla. Esto puede ser un
método rápido y fácil de colocar un gran número de tendones en un modelo en
SAFE. Los perfiles de los tendones satisfacen las holguras especificadas.

Figura 5-2 muestra dos de varias opciones de diseño tendón utilizando tipos de
disposición tendón en bandas y uniformes distribuidas.
5-2 Adding Tendons to a SAFE Model

Chapter 5 - Automated Tendon Layout
Figure 5-2 Template models with tendon layout options
2.-Tendon Draw commands – Usando el comando Draw menu > Draw

Tendons, cualquier número de puntos puede ser el inicio para colocar tendones
en un modelo en SAFE. Se proporciona por defecto los datos del perfil del
tendón; sin embargo, se espera que el usuario edite esto para proporcionar el
perfil del tendón adecuado y otros datos de tendón según se requiera para
satisfacer los requisitos de diseño. Múltiples tendones con el mismo diseño se
pueden generar fácilmente utilizando el comando Edit menu > Replicate .
Cuando se utiliza esta opción, SAFE replica el perfil tendón del tendón de
origen.
Nota: No se realiza automatización en la distribución del tendón, el perfil, el

número de hebras-cables o torones, o fuerza en el jacking si en SAFE se usa el
comando Draw menu > Draw Tendons para colocar tendones a un modelo.
3.-Add Tendons in Strips – usando el comando Edit menu > Add/Edit

Tendons > Add Ten-dons in Strips se puede añadir tendones a un modelo
SAFE existente. Los diseños de los tendones, perfiles, número de hebras-
cables, y las fuerzas en los gatos, están automatizados cuando se añaden los
tendones de esta manera, basándose en la entrada desde Quick Tendon Layout
esquemas mostrados en la Figura 5-3. El modelo SAFE se puede modificar
mediante la adición de los tendones adicionales como sea necesario.
4.-Add Tendons in Beams – usando el comando Edit menu > Add/Edit

Tendons > Add Ten-dons in Beams se puede agregar un tendón a una viga,
con un perfil predeterminado. El perfil del tendón, el número de hebras, y las
fuerzas de apoyo para el gato deben luego ser editados como sea necesario.
Adding Tendons to a SAFE Model 5 - 3

5.3 Procedimientos Utilizados para Tendón Automatico

Los diseños de los tendones automatizados (incluyendo perfiles, número de
hebras, y las fuerzas de apoyo para el gato) se generan en base a las
definiciones de la franja de diseño. Diseños automatizados tendón se
desarrollan sólo en los tendones que se han añadido para ser diseñados por
franjas. Cada franja se modela como una viga continua equivalente con la
sección transversal derivado de los objetos que se encuentran dentro de la losa
en un ancho de franja definida. Las cargas de peso propio se calculan para
obtener la carga y ser usado en el cálculo de equilibrio de carga. Sólo las cargas
que se aplican dentro de la zona de frontera de una franja concreta se incluyen
en la determinación del trazado del tendón automatico. Ejemplo, si una franja
tipo columna se define como 60 pulgadas de ancho, sólo en este ancho de 60
pulgadas se utiliza para determinar la carga y ser usado en el equilibrio auto
cálculo para determinar la disposición tendón.
Un tendón representativo se coloca en la viga equivalente, centrada en la franja
de diseño. Los soportes de franja se derivan de la intersección con las franjas
de diseño perpendiculares y por cualquier columna dentro del ancho de la
franja.
Nota: SAFE no considera automáticamente las intersecciones de las franjas y
vigas como puntos de apoyo de las franjas. Si se desea considerar una viga
particular como punto de apoyo para una franja, entonces una franja debe ser
definida en la ubicación de la viga.
5-4 Procedures Used in Automated Tendon Layout
Chapter 5 - Automated Tendon Layout
Las ubicaciones de apoyo se utilizan para determinar los tramos. Para cada
tramo, el perfil de tendón está automatizado basado en el tipo de perfil
especificado para el tendón (parábola o parábola inversa). Es un procedimiento
iterativo y utiliza entonces para determinar la fuerza en el gato efectiva
necesaria para satisfacer el intervalo de carga muerta a ser equilibrada y la
tensión media de precompresión necesaria. La fuerza en el gato se calcula
inicialmente para satisfacer el mínimo del ratio requerido de carga automatica a
equilibrar y el nivel de compresión previa mínima para el tramo más largo de la
franja. Los perfiles de los tendones en otros tramos se ajustaron de manera que
no exceda los ratios máximos de balanceo de carga muerta.
Un valor de 60 a 80 por ciento se utiliza generalmente como las relaciones de
equilibrio de carga automatica. Normalmente los niveles precompresión
oscilan entre 0.125 to 0.275 ksi.
Nota: Es importante señalar que es posible que un diseño automatizado tendón
no puede satisfacer las relaciones de equilibrio de carga muerta especificados y
los niveles de precompresión. En tales casos, SAFE genera una advertencia
para que los ajustes manuales necesarios en el diseño del tendón y el perfil se
pueden hacer, u otras modificaciones en el modelo SAFE puede aplicar cuando
sea necesario.
Nota: Si la adición de tendones parciales está activo, SAFE puede agregar

tendones adicionales en tramos largos o en tramos exteriores para satisfacer el
equilibrio y precompresión limitaciones de carga automatica.
Después de que la fuerza total en el gato y el perfil se han determinado para el

tendón equivalente, el número real y el espaciamiento de los tendones se
determina con base en los siguientes criterios:
Para un diseño de tendón en bandas, el número de tendones se determina
inicialmente con base en el tendón de la propiedad especificada (propiedad del
material y el área del cable o toron), Nivel de Precompresión, y Dead Ratios de
equilibrio de carga. Las pérdidas de pretensado se estiman utilizando los valores de
tensión fijos de las asignaciones de carga del tendón. Si el número de tendones es
demasiado grande para caber dentro del ancho de banda con una separación
mínima de 12" (300 mm), un tamaño más grande de tendón se selecciona
automáticamente por el aumento del número de hebras-cables. Del mismo modo, si
el espaciamiento de los tendones es demasiado grande (mayor que 60" o 1,5 m) o
16 veces el espesor de la losa, se selecciona un tendón más pequeña, con menos
hebras o cables.
Para una distribución uniforme del tendón, se utiliza un procedimiento similar
al descrito anteriormente para el diseño de bandas tendón
Procedures Used in Automated Tendon Layout 5 - 5

Capitulo 6
Diseño ACI 318-08
En este capítulo se describe en detalle los diversos aspectos del procedimiento de

diseño de hormigón post-tensado que es utilizado por SAFE cuando el usuario
selecciona el código americano ACI 318-08 [ACI 2008]. Varias anotaciones
utilizadas en este capítulo se enumeran en la Tabla 6-1. Para hacer referencia a las
secciones pertinentes del Código ACI en este capítulo, se utiliza un prefijo "ACI",
seguida del número de la sección.
El diseño se basa en combinaciones de carga especificados por el usuario. El

programa ofrece un conjunto de combinaciones de carga por defecto que deben
satisfacer los requisitos para el diseño de la mayoría de estructuras de tipo edificio.
Inglés, así como SI y MKS unidades métricas se pueden utilizar para la entrada. El
código se basa en unidades pulgada-libra-segundo. Para simplificar, todas las
ecuaciones y descripciones que se presentan en este capítulo corresponden a
pulgada-libra-segundo unidades a menos que se indique lo contrario. diseño se
basa en combinaciones de carga especificados por el usuario. El programa ofrece
un conjunto de combinaciones de carga por defecto que deben satisfacer los
requisitos para el diseño de la mayoría de estructuras de tipo edificio.
6.1 Anotaciones
La siguiente tabla identifica las diversas notaciones utilizadas en este capítulo.
6-1
Table 6-1 List of Symbols Used in the ACI 318-08 Code

Acp Area delimitada por el perímetro exterior de la sección, in2
Ag Área bruta del concreto, in2
Al El área total de refuerzo longitudinal para resistir la torsión, in2
Ao Área encerrada por el flujo de corte, sq-in
Aoh Area delimitada por el centerline y el refuerzo extremo
transversal a torsion, sq-in
Aps Area de acero pretensado en zona de tensión a la flexión, in2
As Area de refuerzo a tension, in2
A's Area refuerzo a compresion, in2
As(required) Area de acero a tension requerido como refuerzo, in2
At /s Area de refuerzo a corte por unidad de longitud del elemento
por torsion, sq-in/in
Av Area del refuerzo por corte, in2
Av /s Area de refuerzo por corte por unidad de longitud, in2/in
a Profundidad del bloque a compresion, in
ab Profundidad del bloque a compresion en condiciones balanceadas, in
amax Profundidad maxima permitida para el bloque de compression, in
b Ancho del elemento, in

bf Ancho efectivo del ala (seccion viga-T), in
bw Alcho del alma (seccion viga-T), in
b0 Perímetro de la sección crítica por punzonado, in
b1 Ancho de la seccion critica por punzonado en direccion de la flexion, in
b2 Ancho de la seccion critica por punzonado perpendicular en la direccion

de flexion, in
c Profundidad del eje neutro, in
cb Profundidad del eje neutro en condiciones balanceadas, in
6-2 Notations
Chapter 6 - Design for ACI 318-08

d Distancia desde la cara a compresion hasta el refuerzo por traccion, in
d' Recubrimiento del concreto al centro del refuerzo, in
de Profundidad efectiva de la cara a compresion al centriode
del refuerzo a traccion, in
ds Espesor de losa (seccion viga-T), in
dp Distancia desde la fibra extrema a compresion hasta el
centroide del acero de pre-stressing, in
Ec Modulo de Elasticidad del concreto, psi
Es Modulo de Elasticidad del acero, asumido como:
29,000,000 psi (ACI 8.5.2)
f'c Resistencia del concreto a compresion, psi
f'ci Resistencia del concreto al inicio del preesfuerzo, psi
fpe Esfuerzo de compresion del concrete devido a la fuerza de

preesfuerzo (after allowance of all prestress losses), psi
fps Esfuerzo en el acero de preesforzado nominal a tension, psi
fpu Esfuerzo ultimo del acero de preesfuerzo, psi
fpy Fluencia del acero de pre esfuerzo, psi
ft Fibra extrema en tension en la zona de tracción precomprimido
utilizando las propiedades brutas sección, psi
fy Specified yield strength of flexural reinforcement, psi
fys Specified yield strength of shear reinforcement, psi
h Profundidad total de la seccion, in
hf Altura de ala, in
φMn0 Momento de Diseño (reducido) de una seccion con tendones
solamente, N-mm
Notations 6 - 3

φMnbal 'LVHxR0RPHQWRGHXQDVHFFLyQFRQWHQGRQHV\HOUHIXHU]R
OHYHQHFHVDULRSDUDDOFDQ]DUHOHVWDGRGHHTXLOLEULR, N-mm
Mu 0RPHQWR)DFWRUDGRHQODVHFFLRn, lb-in
Nc )XHU]DGHWHQVLRQHQHOFRQFUHWRGHELGRDODVFDUJDV
PXHUWDVPDVFDUJDYLYDVLQIDFWRUDU, lb
Pu )XH]DD[LDOIDFWRUDGD, lb
s Sepacion del refuerzo a corte a lo largo de la viga, in
Tu Momento torsional factorado de la seccion, lb-in

Vc Esfuerzo cortante resistido por el concreto, lb
Vmax Maxima fuerza de corte factorada permitida en la seccion, lb
Vu Fuerza de corte factorada en la seccion, lb
Vs Esfuerzo de corte que resiste el acero, lb
β1 Factor para obtener la profundidad del bloque a compresion en el concreto
βc Relación de distancias entre el máximo y mínimo de la sección crítica de
punzonado
εc Deformacion unitaria en el concreto
εc, max Máxima deformación por compresión utilizable permitido en
el concreto en la fibras extrema (0.003 in/in)
εps Deformacion en el acero de preesforzado
εs Deformacion en el acero de refuerzo
εs,min La tensión mínima a la tracción permitida en el refuerzo de acero en resistencia
nominal de un comportamiento controlado de tensión (0.005 in / in)
ϕ Factor de reducción de la fuerza
γf Fracción de momento desequilibrado transferido por flexión
γv Fracción de momento desequilibrado transferido por la
excentricidad del corte
6-4 Notations

λ Factor de reducción de resistencia al corte para concretos ligero
θ Angulo de compresion diagonal en grados
6.2 Design Load Combinations

Las combinaciones de carga de diseño son las diferentes combinaciones de los
casos de carga para la cual la estructura debe ser diseñada. Para ACI 318-08, si
la estructura esta sujeto a carga muerta (D), live (L), patron live (PL), snow
(S), wind (W), y earthquake (E) loads, y teniendo en cuenta que el viento y la
fuerzas sísmicas son reversibles, pueden necesitar ser examinado las
combinaciones de carga en las siguientes secciones (ACI 9.2.1).
Para el diseño de concreto postensado, el usuario puede especificar la carga de

pretensado (PT), proporcionando el perfil tendón o mediante el uso de las
opciones de equilibrio de carga en el programa. Las combinaciones de carga
por defecto para postensado se definen en los apartados siguientes.
6.2.1 Initial Service Load Combination

La siguiente combinación de carga se utiliza para comprobar los requisitos en
la transferencia de las fuerzas de pretensado, de conformidad con ACI 318-08
cláusula 18.4.1. Las fuerzas de pretensado se consideran sin ningún largo plazo
pierde para la comprobación inicial combinación de carga de servicio.
1.0D + 1.0PT (ACI 18.4.1)
6.2.2 Service Load Combination

Las siguientes combinaciones de carga se utilizan para el control de los
requisitos de pretensado para facilidad de servicio de acuerdo con ACI 318-08
Cláusulas 18.3.3, 18.4.2 (b), y 18.9.3.2. Se supone que todas las pérdidas a
largo plazo ya se han producido en la etapa de servicio.
1.0D + 1.0PT
(ACI 18.4.2(b))
1.0D + 1.0L + 1.0PT
Design Load Combinations 6 - 5

6.2.3 Long-Term Service Load Combination

Las siguientes combinaciones de carga se utilizan para el control de los
requisitos de pretensado de acuerdo con ACI 318-08 cláusula 18.4.2 (a). La
carga permanente para esta combinación de carga se toma como 50 por ciento
de la carga viva. Se supone que todas las pérdidas a largo plazo ya se han
producido en la etapa de servicio.
1.0D + 1.0PT (ACI 18.4.2(b))
1.0D + 0.5L + 1.0PT
6.2.4 Strength Design Load Combination

Las siguientes combinaciones de carga se utilizan para el control de los requisitos
de pretensado por resistencia de conformidad con ACI 318-08, los capítulos 9 y 18.
Las combinaciones de diseño por resistencia requeridos para el diseño por corte de
vigas y punzonamiento en losas requieren las fuerzas completas del PT (primaria y
secundaria). El Diseño a flexión requiere sólo las fuerzas hiperestáticas (secundarios).
Las fuerzas hiperestáticas (secundarios) son determinados automáticamente por SAFE
restando los momentos principales del PT cuando el diseño a flexión se realiza.
1.4D + 1.0PT* (ACI 9.2.1)

1.2D + 1.6L + 1.0PT* (ACI 9.2.1)
1.2D + 1.6(0.75 PL) + 1.0PT* (ACI 9.2.1, 13.7.6.3)
0.9D ± 1.6W +1.0PT* (ACI 9.2.1)
1.2D + 1.0L ± 1.6W + 1.0PT*
0.9D ± 1.0E + 1.0PT* (ACI 9.2.1)
1.2D + 1.0L ± 1.0E + 1.0PT*
1.2D + 1.6L + 0.5S + 1.0PT* (ACI 9.2.1)
1.2D + 1.0L + 1.6S + 1.0PT*
1.2D + 1.6S ± 0.8W + 1.0PT* (ACI 9.2.1)
1.2D + 1.0L + 0.5S ± 1.6W + 1.0PT*
1.2D + 1.0L + 0.2S ± 1.0E + 1.0PT* (ACI 9.2.1)
*
— Reemplaza PT por H para el diseño a flexion unicamente
6-6 Design Load Combinations

Las combinaciones de carga básicas IBC 2006 (Sección 01.02.1605) son los
mismos. Estas son también las combinaciones de carga de diseño por defecto
en SAFE cuando se usa el código ACI 318- 08. El usuario debe utilizar otras
combinaciones de carga apropiadas si roof live carga viva se trata por separado,
o si otros tipos de cargas están presentes.
6.3 Limits on Material Strength

La resistencia a la compresión de hormigón, f'c, no debe ser inferior a 2500 psi
(ACI 5.1.1). El límite superior de la resistencia a la fluencia de refuerzo, fy, se
toma como 80 ksi (ACI 9,4) y el límite superior de la resistencia al corte de
refuerzo, fyt, se toma como 60 ksi (ACI 11.5.2).
SAFE hace cumplir los límites de resistencia del material superior para la
flexión y cortante de cálculo de vigas y losas o para el diseño de torsión de
vigas. Las resistencias de los materiales de entrada se toman como los límites
superiores si se definen en las propiedades del material como siendo superior a
los límites. El usuario es responsable de asegurar que la fuerza-min imo es
satisfecho.
6.4 Strength Reduction Factors

Los factores de reducción de resistencia, φ , se aplican sobre la resistencia
especificada para obtener la resistencia de diseño proporcionada por un
miembro. Los factores φ para flexión, corte, y la torsión son los siguientes:
φt = 0.90 for flexure (tension controlled) (ACI 9.3.2.1)
φc = 0.65 for flexure (compression controlled) (ACI 9.3.2.2(b))
φ = 0.75 for shear and torsion. (ACI 9.3.2.3)
El valor de φ varía de compresión controlada para controlar de tensión basada

en la tensión máxima de tracción en el refuerzo en el borde extremo, ε t(ACI
9.3.2.2).
Secciones se consideran compresión controlada cuando la deformación por

tracción en el refuerzo tensión extrema es igual o menor que el límite de
deformación por compresión controlada en el momento del hormigón en
compresión alcanza su límite de deformación supuesta de εc.max, que es 0.003.
La fuerza de compresión controlada
Limits on Material Strength 6 - 7

límite es la deformación por tracción en el refuerzo en la condición equilibrada,

que se toma como el esfuerzo de la fluencia de la armadura, (fy/E) (ACI 10.3.3).
Sections are tension-controlled when the tensile strain in the extreme tension
reinforcement is equal to or greater than 0.005, just as the concrete in compres-
sion reaches its assumed strain limit of 0.003 (ACI 10.3.4).
Sections with εt between the two limits are considered to be in a transition re-
gion between compression-controlled and tension-controlled sections (ACI
10.3.4).
When the section is tension-controlled, φt is used. When the section is com-

pression-controlled, φc is used. When the section is in the transition region, φ is
linearly interpolated between the two values (ACI 9.3.2).
The user is allowed to overwrite these values. However, caution is advised.

Strength design of prestressed members for flexure and axial loads shall be
based on assumptions given in ACI 10.2.
 The strain in the reinforcement and concrete shall be assumed directly pro-
portional to the distance from the neutral axis (ACI 10.2.2).
 The maximum usable strain at the extreme concrete compression fiber shall
be assumed equal to 0.003 (ACI 10.2.3).
 The tensile strength of the concrete shall be neglected in axial and flexural
calculations (ACI 10.2.5).
 The relationship between the concrete compressive stress distribution and the
concrete strain shall be assumed to be rectangular by an equivalent rectangu-
lar concrete stress distribution (ACI 10.2.7).
 The concrete stress of 0.85f'c shall be assumed uniformly distributed over an

equivalent-compression zone bounded by edges of the cross-section and a
straight line located parallel to the neutral axis at a distance a = β1c from the
fiber of maximum compressive strain (ACI 10.2.7.1).
6-8 Design Assumptions for Prestressed Concrete

 The distance from the fiber of maximum strain to the neutral axis, c shall be
measured in a direction perpendicular to the neutral axis (ACI 10.2.7.2).
Elastic theory shall be used with the following two assumptions:
 The strains shall vary linearly with depth through the entire load range (ACI
18.3.2.1).
 At cracked sections, the concrete resists no tension (ACI 18.3.2.1).
Prestressed concrete members are investigated at the following three stages

(ACI 18.3.2):
 At transfer of prestress force
 At service loading
 At nominal strength
The prestressed flexural members are classified as Class U (uncracked), Class

T (transition), and Class C (cracked) based on ft, the computed extreme fiber
stress in tension in the precompressed tensile zone at service loads (ACI
18.3.3).
The precompressed tensile zone is that portion of a prestressed member where

flexural tension, calculated using gross section properties, would occur under
unfactored dead and live loads if the prestress force was not present. Pre-
stressed concrete is usually designed so that the prestress force introduces
compression into this zone, thus effectively reducing the magnitude of the ten-
sile stress.
For Class U and Class T flexural members, stresses at service load are deter-
mined using uncracked section properties, while for Class C flexural members,
stresses at service load are calculated based on the cracked section (ACI
18.3.4).
A prestressed two-way slab system is designed as Class U only with

f t ≤ 6 f 'c (ACI R18.3.3); otherwise, an over-stressed (O/S) condition is re-
ported.
Design Assumptions for Prestressed Concrete 6 - 9

The following table provides a summary of the conditions considered for the
various section classes.
Prestressed
Class U Class T Class C Nonprestressed
Transition between
Assumed behavior Uncracked Cracked Cracked
uncracked and cracked
Section properties for stress Gross section Gross section Cracked section
No requirement
calculation at service loads 18.3.4 18.3.4 18.3.4
Allowable stress at transfer 18.4.1 18.4.1 18.4.1 No requirement
Allowable compressive stress based

18.4.2 18.4.2 No requirement No requirement
on uncracked section properties
Tensile stress at service loads 7.5 f c′ < ft ≤ 12 f c′

≤ 7.5 f c′ No requirement No requirement
18.3.3
6.6 Serviceability Requirements of Flexural Members
6.6.1 Serviceability Check at Initial Service Load

The stresses in the concrete immediately after prestress force transfer (before
time dependent prestress losses) are checked against the following limits:
 Extreme fiber stress in compression: 0.60 f ci' (ACI 18.4.1(a))
 Extreme fiber stress in tension: 3 f ci' (ACI 18.4.1(b))
 Extreme fiber stress in tension at ends of

simply supported members: 6 f ci' (ACI 18.4.1(c))
The extreme fiber stress in tension at the ends of simply supported members is
currently NOT checked by SAFE.
6.6.2 Serviceability Checks at Service Load

The stresses in the concrete for Class U and Class T prestressed flexural mem-
bers at service loads, and after all prestress losses occur, are checked against
the following limits:
6 - 10 Serviceability Requirements of Flexural Members

 Extreme fiber stress in compression due

to prestress plus total load: 0.60 f c' (ACI 18.4.2(b))
 Extreme fiber stress in tension in the precompressed tensile zone at service

loads:
– Class U beams and one-way slabs: f t ≤ 7.5 f 'c (ACI 18.3.3)
– Class U two-way slabs: f t ≤ 6 f 'c (ACI 18.3.3)
– Class T beams: 7.5 f 'c < f t ≤ 12 f 'c (ACI 18.3.3)
– Class C beams: f t ≥ 12 f 'c (ACI 18.3.3)
For Class C prestressed flexural members, checks at service loads are not re-
quired by the code. However, for Class C prestressed flexural members not
subject to fatigue or to aggressive exposure, the spacing of bonded reinforce-
ment nearest the extreme tension face shall not exceed that given by ACI
10.6.4 (ACI 18.4.4). It is assumed that the user has checked the requirements of
ACI 10.6.4 and ACI 18.4.4.1 to 18.4.4 independently, as these sections are not
checked by the program.
6.6.3 Serviceability Checks at Long-Term Service Load

bers at long-term service loads, and after all prestress losses occur, are checked
against the same limits as for the normal service load, except for the following:
 Extreme fiber stress in compression due to prestress plus total load:
0.45 f c' (ACI 18.4.2(a))
6.6.4 Serviceability Checks of Prestressing Steel

The program also performs checks on the tensile stresses in the prestressing
steel (ACI 18.5.1). The permissible tensile stress checks, in all types of pre-
Serviceability Requirements of Flexural Members 6 - 11

stressing steel, in terms of the specified minimum tensile stress fpu, and the min-
imum yield stress, fy, are summarized as follows:
 Due to tendon jacking force: min(0.94fpy, 0.80fpu) (ACI 18.5.1(a))
 Immediately after force transfer: min(0.82fpy, 0.74fpu) (ACI 18.5.1(b))
 At anchors and couplers after force

transfer: 0.70fpu (ACI 18.5.1(c))
6.7 Beam Design

In the design of prestressed concrete beams, SAFE calculates and reports the
required areas of reinforcement for flexure, shear, and torsion based on the
beam moments, shear forces, torsion, load combination factors, and other crite-
ria described in the subsections that follow. The reinforcement requirements
are calculated at each station along the length of the beam.
Beams are designed for major direction flexure, shear, and torsion only. Effects
resulting from any axial forces and minor direction bending that may exist in
the beams must be investigated independently by the user.
The beam design procedure involves the following steps:
 Design flexural reinforcement
 Design shear reinforcement
 Design torsion reinforcement
6.7.1 Design Flexural Reinforcement

The beam top and bottom flexural reinforcement is designed at each station
along the beam. In designing the flexural reinforcement for the major moment
of a particular beam for a particular station, the following steps are involved:
 Determine factored moments
 Determine required flexural reinforcement
6 - 12 Beam Design
6.7.1.1 Determine Factored Moments

In the design of flexural reinforcement of prestressed concrete beams, the fac-
tored moments for each load combination at a particular beam station are ob-
tained by factoring the corresponding moments for different load cases, with
the corresponding load factors.
The beam is then designed for the maximum positive and maximum negative
factored moments obtained from all of the load combinations. Positive beam
moments can be used to calculate bottom reinforcement. In such cases the
beam may be designed as a rectangular or a flanged beam. Negative beam
moments can be used to calculate top reinforcement. In such cases the beam
may be designed as a rectangular or inverted flanged beam.
6.7.1.2 Determine Required Flexural Reinforcement

In the flexural reinforcement design process, the program calculates both the
tension and compression reinforcement. Compression reinforcement is added
when the applied design moment exceeds the maximum moment capacity of a
singly reinforced section. The user has the option of avoiding the compression
reinforcement by increasing the effective depth, the width, or the strength of
the concrete.
The design procedure is based on the simplified rectangular stress block, as

shown in Figure 6-1 (ACI 10.2). Furthermore, it is assumed that the net tensile
strain in the reinforcement shall not be less than 0.005 (tension controlled)
(ACI 10.3.4). When the applied moment exceeds the moment capacity at this
design condition, the area of compression reinforcement is calculated on the
assumption that the additional moment will be carried by compression rein-
forcement and additional tension reinforcement.
The design procedure used by SAFE, for both rectangular and flanged sections
(L- and T-beams), is summarized in the subsections that follow. It is assumed
that the design ultimate axial force does not exceed φ (0.1f'cAg) (ACI 10.3.5);
hence all beams are designed for major direction flexure, shear, and torsion on-
ly.
Beam Design 6 - 13
6.7.1.2.1 Design of Rectangular Beams

SAFE first determines if the moment capacity provided by the post-tensioning
tendons alone is enough. In calculating the capacity, it is assumed that As = 0.
In that case, the moment capacity φ M n0 is determined as follows:
ε =0.003 0.85 f ′c
b
A′s Cs
d′ c a = β1c
dp
ds
Aps
ε ps
Tcps
Ts Tcs
εs
As
BEAM STRAIN STRESS

SECTION DIAGRAM DIAGRAM
Figure 6-1 Rectangular Beam Design
The maximum depth of the compression zone, cmax, is calculated based on the
limitation that the tension reinforcement strain shall not be less than εsmin,
which is equal to 0.005 for tension-controlled behavior (ACI 10.3.4):
 ε c max 
cmax =  d (ACI 10.2.2)
 ε c max + ε s min 
where,
εcmax = 0.003 (ACI 10.2.3)
εsmin = 0.005 (ACI 10.3.4)
Therefore, the limit c ≤ cmax is set for tension-controlled sections.
6 - 14 Beam Design
The maximum allowable depth of the rectangular compression block, amax, is

given by:
amax = β1cmax (ACI 10.2.7.1)
where β1 is calculated as:
 f ' − 4000 
β1 = 0.85 − 0.05  c  , 0.65 ≤ β1 ≤ 0.85 (ACI 10.2.7.3)
 1000 
SAFE determines the depth of the neutral axis, c, by imposing force equilibri-
um, i.e., C = T. After the depth of the neutral axis has been determined, the
stress in the post-tensioning steel, fps, is computed based on strain compatibility
for bonded tendons. For unbonded tendons, the code equations are used to
compute the stress, fps in the post-tensioning steel.
Based on the calculated fps, the depth of the neutral axis is recalculated, and fps
is further updated. After this iteration process has converged, the depth of the
rectangular compression block is determined as follows:
a = β1c
 If c ≤ cmax (ACI 10.3.4), the moment capacity of the section, provided by

post-tensioning steel only, is computed as:
 a
=φ M n0 φ Aps f ps  d p − 
 2
 If c > cmax (ACI 10.3.4), a failure condition is declared.
If M u > φ M n0 , SAFE calculates the moment capacity and the As required at

the balanced condition. The balanced condition is taken as the marginal tension
controlled case. In that case, it is assumed that the depth of the neutral axis, c is
equal to cmax. The stress in the post-tensioning steel, fps is then calculated and
the area of required tension reinforcement, As, is determined by imposing force
equilibrium, i.e., C = T.
C = 0.85 f c' amax b
Beam Design 6 - 15
=T Aps f psbal + Asbal f sbal
bal
0.85 f c′amax b − Aps f psbal
A s =
f sbal
After the area of tension reinforcement has been determined, the capacity of the
section with post-tensioning steel and tension reinforcement is computed as:
 amax  bal bal  amax 

φ=
M nbal φ Aps f psbal  d p −  + φ As f s  d s − 2 
 2   
In that case, it is assumed that the bonded tension reinforcement will yield,
which is true for most cases. In the case that it does not yield, the stress in the
reinforcement, fs, is determined from the elastic-perfectly plastic stress-strain
relationship. The fy value of the reinforcement is then replaced with fs in the
preceding four equations. This case does not involve any iteration in determin-
ing the depth of the neutral axis, c.
6.7.1.2.1.1 Case 1: Post-tensioning steel is adequate

When M u < φ M n0 , the amount of post-tensioning steel is adequate to resist the
design moment Mu. Minimum reinforcement is provided to satisfy ductility re-
quirements (ACI 18.9.3.2 and 18.9.3.3), i.e., M u < φ M n0 .
6.7.1.2.1.2 Case 2: Post-tensioning steel plus tension reinforcement

In this case, the amount of post-tensioning steel, Aps, alone is not sufficient to
resist Mu, and therefore the required area of tension reinforcement is computed
to supplement the post-tensioning steel. The combination of post-tensioning
steel and tension reinforcement should result in a < amax.
When φ M n0 < M u < φ M nbal , SAFE determines the required area of tension re-
inforcement, As, iteratively to satisfy the design moment Mu and reports this re-
quired area of tension reinforcement. Since Mu is bounded by φ M n0 at the low-
er end and φ M nbal at the upper end, and φ M n0 is associated with As = 0 and
φ M nbal is associated with As = Asbal , the required area will fall within the range
of 0 to Asbal.
6 - 16 Beam Design
The tension reinforcement is to be placed at the bottom if Mu is positive, or at

the top if Mu is negative.
6.7.1.2.1.3 Case 3: Post-tensioning steel and tension reinforcement are not ad-
equate
When M u > φ M nbal , compression reinforcement is required (ACI 10.3.5). In
this case SAFE assumes that the depth of the neutral axis, c, is equal to cmax.
The values of fps and fs reach their respective balanced condition values, f psbal
and f sbal . The area of compression reinforcement, As' , is then determined as
follows:
The moment required to be resisted by compression reinforcement and tension

reinforcement is:
M=
us M u − φ M nbal
The required compression reinforcement is given by:
M us
A' s = , where
( f 's − 0.85 f 'c )(d e − d ')φ
c − d '
f ' s = Es ε c max  max  ≤ fy (ACI 10.2.2, 10.2.3, 10.2.4)
 cmax 
The tension reinforcement for balancing the compression reinforcement is giv-

en by:
M us
Ascom =
f y ( d s − d ') φ
Therefore, the total tension reinforcement, As = Asbal + Ascom , and the total
compression reinforcement is A's. As is to be placed at the bottom and A's is to
be placed at the top if Mu is positive, and vice versa if Mu is negative.
Beam Design 6 - 17
6.7.1.2.2 Design of Flanged Beams
6.7.1.2.2.1 Flanged Beam Under Negative Moment

In designing for a factored negative moment, Mu (i.e., designing top reinforce-
ment), the calculation of the reinforcement area is exactly the same as above,
i.e., no flanged beam data is used.
6.7.1.2.2.2 Flanged Beam Under Positive Moment

 ε c max 
cmax =  d (ACI 10.2.2)
where,
εcmax = 0.003 (ACI 10.2.3)
εsmin = 0.005 (ACI 10.3.4)
Therefore, the limit c ≤ cmax is set for tension-controlled section:

given by:
amax =β1cmax (ACI 10.2.7.1)
 f 'c − 4000 
β1 =0.85 − 0.05  , 0.65 ≤ β1 ≤ 0.85 (ACI 10.2.7.3)
 1000 
6 - 18 Beam Design
hf ε =0.003 0.85 f ′c 0.85 f ′c

bf
d′ f ′s Cs Cf
A′s
c
dp ds
Cw
Aps
ε ps
Tw Tf
As εs Ts
bw
BEAM STRAIN STRESS
Figure 6-2 T-Beam Design
stress in the post-tensioning steel, fps is computed based on strain compatibility
compute the stress, fps in the post-tensioning steel. Based on the calculated fps,
the depth of the neutral axis is recalculated, and fps is further updated. After this
iteration process has converged, the depth of the rectangular compression block
is determined as follows:
a = β1c

 a
 2

the balanced condition. The balanced condition is taken as the marginal ten-
sion-controlled case. In that case, it is assumed that the depth of the neutral ax-
Beam Design 6 - 19
is c is equal to cmax. The stress in the post-tensioning steel, fps, is then calculated
and the area of required tension reinforcement, As, is determined by imposing
force equilibrium, i.e., C = T.
 If a ≤ hf, the subsequent calculations for As are exactly the same as previously
defined for the rectangular beam design. However, in that case the width of
the beam is taken as bf. Compression reinforcement is required if a > amax.
 If a > hf, the calculation for As is given by:
C = 0.85 f 'c Accomp
where Accom is the area of concrete in compression, i.e.,
b f h f + bw ( amax − h f
Accom = )
bal
0.85 f 'c Accom − Aps f psbal
A s =
f sbal
Case 1: Post-tensioning steel is adequate

When M u < φ M n0 the amount of post-tensioning steel is adequate to resist the
Case 2: Post-tensioning steel plus tension reinforcement

6 - 20 Beam Design

er end and φ M nbal at the upper end, and φ M n0 is associated with As = 0
and φ M nbal is associated with As = Asbal , the required area will fall within the
range of 0 to As.

Case 3: Post-tensioning steel and tension reinforcement are not adequate

that case, SAFE assumes that the depth of the neutral axis, c, is equal to cmax.
The value of fps and fs reach their respective balanced condition values, f psbal
follows:

reinforcement is:
M=
M us
A 's = , where
( f 's − 0.85 f 'c )( d s − d ') φ
c − d '
f ' s = Es ε c max  max  ≤ fy (ACI 10.2.2, 10.2.3, and 10.2.4)
c
 max 

en by:
Beam Design 6 - 21
M us
Ascom =
f y ( d s − d ') φ
6.7.1.2.3 Ductility Requirements

SAFE also checks the following condition by considering the post-tensioning
steel and tension reinforcement to avoid abrupt failure.
φ M n ≥ 1.2M cr (ACI 18.8.2)
The preceding condition is permitted to be waived for the following:
(a) Two-way, unbonded post-tensioned slabs
(b) Flexural members with shear and flexural strength at least twice that re-
quired by ACI 9.2.
These exceptions currently are NOT handled by SAFE.
6.7.1.2.4 Minimum and Maximum Reinforcement

The minimum flexural tension reinforcement required in a beam section is giv-
en by the following limit:
As ≥ 0.004 Act (ACI 18.9.2)
where, Act is the area of the cross-section between the flexural tension face and
the center of gravity of the gross section.
An upper limit of 0.04 times the gross web area on both the tension reinforce-
ment and the compression reinforcement is imposed upon request as follows:
6 - 22 Beam Design
0.4bd Rectangular beam

As ≤ 
0.4bw d Flanged beam
A′s ≤ 

The shear reinforcement is designed for each load combination at each station
along the length of the beam. In designing the shear reinforcement for a partic-
ular beam, for a particular loading combination, at a particular station due to
the beam major shear, the following steps are involved:
 Determine the factored shear force, Vu.
 Determine the shear force, Vc that can be resisted by the concrete.
 Determine the shear reinforcement required to carry the balance.
The following three sections describe in detail the algorithms associated with
these steps.
6.7.2.1 Determine Factored Shear Force

In the design of the beam shear reinforcement, the shear forces for each load
combination at a particular beam station are obtained by factoring the corre-
sponding shear forces for different load cases, with the corresponding load
combination factors.
6.7.2.2 Determine Concrete Shear Capacity

The shear force carried by the concrete, Vc, is calculated as:
Vc = min(Vci , Vcw) (ACI 11.3.3)
where,
Vi M cre
Vci = 0.6λ f ' c bw d p + Vd + ≥ 1.7 λ f ' c b w d (ACI 11.3.3.1)
M max
Beam Design 6 - 23
( )
Vcw = 3.5λ f ' c + 0.3 f pc bw d p + V p (ACI 11.3.3.2)
d p ≥ 0.80h (ACI 11.3.3.1)
 I 
(
M cre =   6λ f ' c + f pe − f d ) (ACI 11.3.3.1)
 yt 
where,
fd = stress due to unfactored dead load, at the extreme fiber of the sec-
tion where tensile stress is caused by externally applied loads, psi
fpe = compress stress in concrete due to effective prestress forces only

(after allowance for all prestress losses) at the extreme fiber of the
section where tensile stress is caused by externally applied loads,
psi
Vd = shear force at the section due to unfactored dead load, lbs
Vp = vertical component of effective prestress force at the section, lbs
Vci = nominal shear strength provided by the concrete when diagonal

cracking results from combined shear and moment
Mcre = moment causing flexural cracking at the section because of exter-

nally applied loads
Mmax = maximum factored moment at section because of externally ap-

plied loads
Vi = factored shear force at the section because of externally applied

loads occurring simultaneously with Mmax
Vcw = nominal shear strength provided by the concrete when diagonal

cracking results from high principal tensile stress in the web
For light-weight concrete, the f 'c term is multiplied by the shear strength
reduction factor λ.
6 - 24 Beam Design
6.7.2.3 Determine Required Shear Reinforcement

The shear force is limited to a maximum of:
( )
Vmax = Vc + 8 f ' c bw d (ACI 11.4.7.9)
Given Vu, Vc, and Vmax, the required shear reinforcement is calculated as fol-
lows where, φ, the strength reduction factor, is 0.75 (ACI 9.3.2.3).
 If Vu ≤ 0.5φVc
Av
=0 (ACI 11.4.6.1)
s
 If 0.5φVc < Vu ≤ φVmax
Av (Vu − φ Vc )
= (ACI 11.4.7.1, 11.4.7.2)
s φ f yt d
Av  0.75λ f ' c 50bw 

≥ max bw , (ACI 11.4.6.3)
s 
 f yt f yt 
 If Vu > φVmax, a failure condition is declared (ACI 11.4.7.9).
For members with an effective prestress force not less than 40 percent of the
tensile strength of the flexural reinforcement, the required shear reinforcement
is computed as follows (ACI 11.5.6.3, 11.5.6.4):
  0.75λ f 'c 50 
max bw , bw 
Av   fy f y 
≥ min  
s  Aps f pu d
 80 f yt d bw

 If Vu exceeds the maximum permitted value of φVmax, the concrete section

should be increased in size (ACI 11.5.7.9).
Beam Design 6 - 25
Note that if torsion design is considered and torsion reinforcement is needed,

the equation given in ACI 11.5.6.3 does not need to be satisfied independently.
See the next section Design of Beam Torsion Reinforcement for details.
If the beam depth h is less than the minimum of 10 in, 2.5hf, and 0.5bw, the
minimum shear reinforcement given by ACI 11.5.6.3 is not enforced (ACI
11.5.6.1(c)).
The maximum of all of the calculated Av /s values, obtained from each load
combination, is reported along with the controlling shear force and associated
load combination.
The beam shear reinforcement requirements considered by the program are

based purely on shear strength considerations. Any minimum stirrup require-
ments to satisfy spacing and volumetric considerations must be investigated in-
dependently of the program by the user.
6.7.3 Design Beam Torsion Reinforcement

The torsion reinforcement is designed for each design load combination at each
station along the length of the beam. The following steps are involved in de-
signing the shear reinforcement for a particular station due to the beam torsion:
 Determine the factored torsion, Tu.
 Determine special section properties.
 Determine critical torsion capacity.
 Determine the torsion reinforcement required.
6.7.3.1 Determine Factored Torsion

In the design of beam torsion reinforcement, the torsions for each load combi-
nation at a particular beam station are obtained by factoring the corresponding
torsions for different load cases with the corresponding load combination fac-
tors (ACI 11.6.2).
In a statically indeterminate structure where redistribution of the torsion in a

member can occur due to redistribution of internal forces upon cracking, the
6 - 26 Beam Design
design Tu is permitted to be reduced in accordance with the code

(ACI 11.6.2.2). However, the program does not automatically redistribute the
internal forces and reduce Tu. If redistribution is desired, the user should re-
lease the torsional degree of freedom (DOF) in the structural model.
6.7.3.2 Determine Special Section Properties

For torsion design, special section properties, such as Acp, Aoh, Ao, pcp, and ph
are calculated. These properties are described in the following (ACI 2.1).
Acp = Area enclosed by outside perimeter of concrete cross-section
Aoh = Area enclosed by centerline of the outermost closed transverse

torsional reinforcement
Ao = Gross area enclosed by shear flow path
pcp = Outside perimeter of concrete cross-section
ph = Perimeter of centerline of outermost closed transverse torsion-

al reinforcement
In calculating the section properties involving reinforcement, such as Aoh, Ao,

and ph, it is assumed that the distance between the centerline of the outermost
closed stirrup and the outermost concrete surface is 1.75 inches. This is equiva-
lent to 1.5 inches clear cover and a #4 stirrup. For torsion design of flanged
beam sections, it is assumed that placing torsion reinforcement in the flange ar-
ea is inefficient. With this assumption, the flange is ignored for torsion rein-
forcement calculation. However, the flange is considered during Tcr calcula-
tion. With this assumption, the special properties for a rectangular beam sec-
tion are given as:
Acp = bh (ACI 11.6.1, 2.1)
Aoh = (b − 2c)(h − 2c) (ACI 11.6.3.1, 2.1, R11.6.3.6(b))
Ao = 0.85 Aoh (ACI 11.6.3.6, 2.1)
pcp = 2b + 2h (ACI 11.6.1, 2.1)
ph = 2(b − 2c) + 2(h − 2c) (ACI 11.6.3.1, 2.1)
Beam Design 6 - 27
where, the section dimensions b, h, and c are shown in Figure 6-3. Similarly,
the special section properties for a flanged beam section are given as:
Acp = bwh + (bf − bw)hf (ACI 11.6.1, 2.1)
Aoh = (bw – 2c)(h – 2c) (ACI 11.6.3.1, 2.1, R11.6.3.6(b))
Ao = 0.85 Aoh (ACI 11.6.3.6, 2.1)
pcp = 2bf + 2h (ACI11.6.1, 2.1)
ph = 2(h – 2c) + 2(bw – 2c) (ACI 11.6.3.1, 2.1)
where the section dimensions bf, bw, h, hf, and c for a flanged beam are shown
in Figure 6-3. Note that the flange width on either side of the beam web is lim-
ited to the smaller of 4hf or (h – hf) (ACI 13.2.4).
6.7.3.3 Determine Critical Torsion Capacity

The critical torsion capacity, Tcr, for which the torsion in the section can be ig-
nored is calculated as:
 Acp2  f pc
Tcr = φλ f 'c   1+ (ACI 11.6.1(b))
p  4 f 'c
 cp 
where Acp and pcp are the area and perimeter of the concrete cross-section as
described in detail in the previous section; fpc is the concrete compressive stress
at the centroid of the section; φ is the strength reduction factor for torsion,
which is equal to 0.75 by default (ACI 9.3.2.3); and f′c is the specified concrete
compressive strength.
6.7.3.4 Determine Torsion Reinforcement

If the factored torsion Tu is less than the threshold limit, Tcr, torsion can be
safely ignored (ACI 11.6.1). In that case, the program reports that no torsion
reinforcement is required. However, if Tu exceeds the threshold limit, Tcr, it is
assumed that the torsional resistance is provided by closed stirrups, longitudi-
nal bars, and compression diagonal (ACI R11.6.3.6).
6 - 28 Beam Design
If Tu > Tcr the required closed stirrup area per unit spacing, At /s, is calculated
as:
At Tu tan θ
= (ACI 11.6.3.6)
s φ 2 Ao f yt
and the required longitudinal reinforcement is calculated as:
Tu p h
Al = (ACI 11.6.3.7, 11.6.3.6)
φ 2 Ao f y tan θ
c b − 2c c bf
c c
h
dfs
h − 2c h h h − 2c
c c
b bw − 2c
bw
Closed Stirrup in Closed Stirrup in

Rectangular Beam T-Beam Section
Figure 6-3 Closed stirrup and section dimensions for torsion design
where, the minimum value of At /s is taken as:
At 25
= bw (ACI 11.6.5.3)
s f yt
and the minimum value of Al is taken as follows:
Beam Design 6 - 29
5λ f c′ Acp  A   f yt 
Al = −  t  ph  (ACI 11.6.5.3)
fy  s   f y 
In the preceding expressions, θ is taken as 45 degrees for prestressed members

with an effective prestress force less than 40 percent of the tensile strength of
the longitudinal reinforcement; otherwise θ is taken as 37.5 degrees.
An upper limit of the combination of Vu and Tu that can be carried by the sec-
tion is also checked using the equation:
2 2
 Vu   Tu p h   Vc 
  +  2
 ≤ φ  + 8 f c′  (ACI 11.6.3.1)
 bw d   1.7 Aoh   bw d 
For rectangular sections, bw is replaced with b. If the combination of Vu and Tu

exceeds this limit, a failure message is declared. In that case, the concrete sec-
tion should be increased in size.
When torsional reinforcement is required (Tu > Tcr), the area of transverse
closed stirrups and the area of regular shear stirrups must satisfy the following
limit.
 Av A   f c′ 50bw 
 + 2 t  ≥ max 0.75λ bw ,  (ACI 11.6.5.2)
 s s   f yt f y 
If this equation is not satisfied with the originally calculated Av /s and At /s, Av /s
is increased to satisfy this condition. In that case, Av /s does not need to satisfy
the ACI Section 11.5.6.3 independently.
The maximum of all of the calculated Al and At /s values obtained from each
load combination is reported along with the controlling combination.
The beam torsion reinforcement requirements considered by the program are

based purely on strength considerations. Any minimum stirrup requirements
and longitudinal reinforcement requirements to satisfy spacing considerations
must be investigated independently of the program by the user.
6 - 30 Beam Design
6.8 Slab Design

Similar to conventional design, the SAFE slab design procedure involves
defining sets of strips in two mutually perpendicular directions. The locations
of the strips are usually governed by the locations of the slab supports. The
moments for a particular strip are recovered from the analysis and a flexural
design is completed using the ultimate strength design method (ACI 318-08)
for prestressed reinforced concrete as described in the following sections. To
learn more about the design strips, refer to the section entitled "SAFE
Design Features" in the Key Features and Terminology manual.
6.8.1 Design for Flexure

SAFE designs the slab on a strip-by-strip basis. The moments used for the
design of the slab elements are the nodal reactive moments, which are obtained
by multiplying the slab element stiffness matrices by the element nodal dis-
placement vectors. Those moments will always be in static equilibrium with
the applied loads, irrespective of the refinement of the finite element mesh.
The design of the slab reinforcement for a particular strip is completed at spe-
cific locations along the length of the strip. Those locations correspond to the
element boundaries. Controlling reinforcement is computed on either side of
those element boundaries. The slab flexural design procedure for each load
combination involves the following:
 Determine factored moments for each slab strip.
 Determine the capacity of post-tensioned sections.
 Design flexural reinforcement for the strip.
These three steps are described in the subsection that follow and are repeated
for every load combination. The maximum reinforcement calculated for the top
and bottom of the slab within each design strip, along with the corresponding
controlling load combination, is obtained and reported.
Slab Design 6 - 31
6.8.1.1 Determine Factored Moments for the Strip

For each element within the design strip, for each load combination, the pro-
gram calculates the nodal reactive moments. The nodal moments are then add-
ed to get the strip moments.
6.8.1.2 Determine Capacity of Post-Tensioned Sections

Calculation of the post-tensioned section capacity is identical to that described
earlier for rectangular beam sections.
6.8.1.3 Design Flexural Reinforcement for the Strip

The reinforcement computation for each slab design strip, given the bending
moment, is identical to the design of rectangular beam sections described
earlier (or to the flanged beam if the slab is ribbed). In some cases, at a given
design section in a design strip, there may be two or more slab properties
across the width of the design strip. In that case, the program automatically de-
signs the tributary width associated with each of the slab properties separately
using its tributary bending moment. The reinforcement obtained for each of the
tributary widths is summed to obtain the total reinforcement for the full width
of the design strip at the considered design section. This method is used when
drop panels are included. Where openings occur, the slab width is adjusted ac-
cordingly.
6.8.1.3.1 Minimum and Maximum Slab Reinforcement

The minimum flexural tension reinforcement required for each direction of a
slab is given by the following limits (ACI 7.12.2):
As,min = 0.0020 bh for fy = 40 ksi or 50 ksi (ACI 7.12.2.1(a))
As,min = 0.0018 bh for fy = 60 ksi (ACI 7.12.2.1(b))
0.0018 × 60000
As,min = bh for fy > 60 ksi (ACI 7.12.2.1(c))
fy
6 - 32 Slab Design
Reinforcement is not required in positive moment areas where ft, the extreme
fiber stress in tension in the precompressed tensile zone at service loads (after
all prestress losses occurs) does not exceed 2 f c' (ACI 18.9.3.1).
In positive moment areas where the computed tensile stress in the concrete at
service loads exceeds 2 f c' , the minimum area of bonded reinforcement is
computed as:
Nc
As ,min = , where fy ≤ 60 ksi (ACI 18.9.3.2)
0.5 f y
In negative moment areas at column supports, the minimum area of bonded

reinforcement in the top of slab in each direction is computed as:
As ,min = 0.00075 Acf (ACI 18.9.3.3)
where Acf is the larger gross cross-sectional area of the slab-beam strip in the
two orthogonal equivalent frames intersecting a column in a two-way slab
system.
When spacing of tendons exceed 54 inches, additional bonded shrinkage and

temperature reinforcement (as computed above, ACI 7.12.2.1) is required be-
tween the tendons at slab edges, extending from the slab edge for a distance
equal to the tendon spacing (ACI 7.12.3.3)
In addition, an upper limit on both the tension reinforcement and compression

reinforcement has been imposed to be 0.04 times the gross cross-sectional area.
Note that the requirements when fy > 60 ksi currently are not handled.
6.8.2 Check for Punching Shear

The algorithm for checking punching shear is detailed in the section entitled
“Slab Punching Shear Check” in the Key Features and Terminology manual.
Only the code specific items are described in the following sections.
Slab Design 6 - 33
6.8.2.1 Critical Section for Punching Shear

The punching shear is checked on a critical section at a distance of d/2 from the
face of the support (ACI 11.11.1.2). For rectangular columns and concentrated
loads, the critical area is taken as a rectangular area with the sides parallel to
the sides of the columns or the point loads (ACI 11.11.1.3). Figure 6-4 shows
the auto punching perimeters considered by SAFE for the various column
shapes. The column location (i.e., interior, edge, corner) and the punching
perimeter may be overwritten using the Punching Check Overwrites.
d 2
d 2 d 2
Interior Column Edge Column Edge Column
d 2
d 2 d 2
Circular Column T-Shape Column L-Shape Column
Figure 6-4 Punching Shear Perimeters
6.8.2.2 Transfer of Unbalanced Moment

The fraction of unbalanced moment transferred by flexure is taken to be γ f Mu
and the fraction of unbalanced moment transferred by eccentricity of shear is
taken to be γ v Mu.
1
γf = (ACI 13.5.3.2)
1 + (2 3) b1 b2
6 - 34 Slab Design
γv = 1 − γf (ACI 13.5.3.1)
For flat plates, γv is determined from the following equations taken from ACI
421.2R-07 [ACI 2007] Seismic Design of Punching Shear Reinforcement in
Flat Plates.
For interior columns,
1
γ vx = 1 − (ACI 421.2 C-11)
1 + ( 2 3) l y lx
1
γ vy = 1 − (ACI 421.2 C-12)
1 + ( 2 3) lx l y
For edge columns,
γvx = same as for interior columns (ACI 421.2 C-13)
1
γ vy = 1 − (ACI 421.2 C-14)
1 + (2 3) l x l y − 0.2
γvy = 0 when lx/ly ≤ 0.2
For corner columns,
γvx = 0.4 (ACI 421.2 C-15)
γvy = same as for edge columns (ACI 421.2 C-16)
where b1 is the width of the critical section measured in the direction of the
span and b2 is the width of the critical section measured in the direction per-
pendicular to the span. The values lx and ly are the projections of the shear-
critical section onto its principal axes, x and y, respectively.
6.8.2.3 Determine Concrete Capacity

The concrete punching shear stress capacity of a two-way prestressed section is
taken as:
Slab Design 6 - 35
(
vc = φ β p )
f 'c + 0.3 f pc + v p (ACI 11.11.2.2)
  αsd 
β p = min 3.5,  + 1.5   (ACI 11.11.2.2)
  bo 
where, βp is the factor used to compute vc in prestressed slab; bo is the perimeter

of the critical section; fpc is the average value of fpc in the two directions; vp is
the vertical component of all effective prestress stresses crossing the critical
section; and αs is a scale factor based on the location of the critical section.
40 for interior columns,


α s =30 for edge columns, and (ACI 11.11.2.1)
20 for corner columns.

The concrete capacity vc computed from ACI 11.12.2.2 is permitted only when
the following conditions are satisfied:
 The column is farther than four times the slab thickness away from any dis-
continuous slab edges.
 The value of f ' c is taken no greater than 70 psi.

 In each direction, the value of fpc is within the range:
125 ≤ fpc ≤ 500 psi
In thin slabs, the slope of the tendon profile is hard to control and special care
should be exercised in computing vp. In case of uncertainty between the design
and as-built profile, a reduced or zero value for vp should be used.
If the preceding three conditions are not satisfied, the concrete punching shear
stress capacity of a two-way prestressed section is taken as the minimum of the
following three limits:
6 - 36 Slab Design
  4 
φ  2 + λ f 'c
  βc 

  α d
ν c = min φ  2 + s λ f 'c (ACI 11.11.2.1)
  bc 

φ 4λ f '
 c

where, βc is the ratio of the maximum to the minimum dimensions of the criti-
cal section, b0 is the perimeter of the critical section, and αs is a scale factor
based on the location of the critical section (ACI 11.12.2.1).
A limit is imposed on the value of f ' c as:
f ' c ≤ 100 (ACI 11.1.2)
6.8.2.4 Determine Capacity Ratio

Given the punching shear force and the fractions of moments transferred by ec-
centricity of shear about the two axes, the shear stress is computed assuming
linear variation along the perimeter of the critical section. The ratio of the max-
imum shear stress and the concrete punching shear stress capacity is reported
as the punching shear capacity ratio by SAFE.
6.8.3 Design Punching Shear Reinforcement

The use of shear studs as shear reinforcement in slabs is permitted, provided
that the effective depth of the slab is greater than or equal to 6 inches, and not
less than 16 times the shear reinforcement bar diameter (ACI 11.11.3). If the
slab thickness does not meet these requirements, the punching shear reinforce-
ment is not designed and the slab thickness should be increased by the user.
The algorithm for designing the required punching shear reinforcement is used
when the punching shear capacity ratio exceeds unity. The Critical Section for
Punching Shear and Transfer of Unbalanced Moment as described in the earli-
Slab Design 6 - 37
er sections remain unchanged. The design of punching shear reinforcement is

carried out as described in the subsections that follow.

The concrete punching shear stress capacity of a two-way prestressed section
with punching shear reinforcement is as previously determined, but limited to:
vc ≤ φ 2λ f 'c for shear links (ACI 11.11.3.1)
vc ≤ φ 3λ f ' c for shear studs (ACI 11.11.5.1)

Vmax = 6 f 'c bod for shear links (ACI 11.11.3.2)
Vmax = 8 f 'c bod for shear studs (ACI 11.11.5.1)
lows, where, φ, the strength reduction factor, is 0.75 (ACI 9.3.2.3).
Av (Vu − φVc )
= (ACI 11.4.7.1, 11.4.7.2)
s φ f ys d
'
Av f
≥ 2 c bo for shear studs
s fy
 If Vu > φVmax, a failure condition is declared. (ACI 11.11.3.2)

should be increased in size.
6.8.3.3 Determine Reinforcement Arrangement

Punching shear reinforcement in the vicinity of rectangular columns should be
arranged on peripheral lines, i.e., lines running parallel to and at constant dis-
6 - 38 Slab Design
de los lados de la columna. Figura 6-5 muestra una disposición típica de

refuerzo de corte en la proximidad de un interior, borde, y la columna de
esquina rectangular.
La distancia entre la cara de la columna y la primera línea de refuerzo de corte no

deberá exceder de d/2 (ACI R11.3.3, 11.11.5.2). La separación entre armadura de
cortante adyacente en la primera línea de refuerzo de cortante no excederá 2d
medido en una dirección paralela a la cara de la columna (ACI 11.11.3.3).
Refuerzo a punzonamiento es esquinas de las columnas cerca más efectivas

donde hay concentraciones de esfuerzo de corte. Por lo tanto, el número
mínimo de líneas de refuerzo de corte es 4, 6, y 8, de esquina, borde, y
columnas interiores, respectivamente.
Typical Studrail Outermost Outermost

(only first and last peripheral line peripheral line
studs shown) of studs of studs Free
edge
d 2 d 2 Iy
gy
gx
s0 s0 s0
Iy x x gx
Iy
Critical d 2
section
centroid Free
edge y x
Free edge Ix Critical section
y
centroid
Ix
Ix
Interior Column Edge Column Corner Column
Figure 6-5 Typical arrangement of shear studs and critical sections outside
shear-reinforced zone
6.8.3.4 Determine Reinforcement Diameter, Height, and Spacing

La armadura de punzonamiento es más eficaz cuando el anclaje está cerca de
las superficies superior e inferior de la losa. La cubierta de los anclajes no debe
ser menor que el mínimo especificado en la cubierta ACI 7,7 más la mitad del
diámetro de la armadura de flexión.
Refuerzo a punzonamiento en forma de conectores de corte está generalmente

disponible en 3/8-, 1/2-, 5/8-, y 3/4-inch diametro.
Slab Design 6 - 39
Al especificar conectores de corte, la distancia, por lo que, entre la cara de la

columna y la primera línea periférica de conectores de cortante no debe ser menor
que 0.35d. los límites of so and the spacing, s, entre las líneas periféricas se
especifican como:
so ≤ 0.5d (ACI 11.11.5.2)

 0.75d for ν u ≤ 6φλ f 'c
s≤ (ACI 11.11.5.2)
0.50 d for ν u > 6φλ f 'c
g ≤ 2d (ACI 11.11.5.3)
los limites so y espaciamiento, s, entre los links se especifica como:
so ≤ 0.5d (ACI 11.11.3)
s ≤ 0.50d (ACI 11.11.3)
6 - 40 Slab Design
Chapter 7
Design for AS 3600-01
This chapter describes in detail the various aspects of the post-tensioned con-
crete design procedure that is used by SAFE when the user selects the Australi-
an code AS 3600-2001 [AS 2001], which also incorporates Amendment Nos. 1
(May 2002), and 2 (October 2004). Various notations used in this chapter are
listed in Table 7-1. For referencing to the pertinent sections of the AS code in
this chapter, a prefix “AS” followed by the section number is used.
The design is based on user-specified load combinations. The program pro-

vides a set of default load combinations that should satisfy the requirements for
the design of most building type structures.
English as well as SI and MKS metric units can be used for input. The code is
based on Newton-millimeter-second units. For simplicity, all equations and de-
scriptions presented in this chapter correspond to Newton-millimeter-second
units unless otherwise noted.
7.1 Notations
The following table identifies the various notations used in this chapter.
Table 7-1 List of Symbols Used in the AS 3600-01 Code

Ag Gross area of concrete, mm2
Notations 7-1

Al Area of longitudinal reinforcement for torsion, mm2
Ap Area of prestressing steel in flexural tension zone, sq-mm
As Area of tension reinforcement, mm2
Asc Area of compression reinforcement, mm2
Ast Area of tension reinforcement, mm2
As(required) Area of required tension reinforcement, mm2
Asv Area of shear reinforcement, mm2
Asv,min Minimum area of shear reinforcement, mm2
Asv /s Area of shear reinforcement per unit length, mm2 /mm
Asw/s Area of shear reinforcement per unit length consisting of
closed ties, mm2/mm
At Area of a polygon with vertices at the center of longitudinal
bars at the corners of a section, mm2
s Spacing of shear reinforcement along the length, mm
a Depth of compression block, mm
ab Depth of compression block at balanced condition, mm
amax Maximum allowed depth of compression block, mm
b Width of member, mm
bef Effective width of flange (flanged section), mm
bw Width of web (flanged section), mm
c Depth to neutral axis, mm
d Distance from compression face to tension reinforcement,
mm
d' Concrete cover to compression reinforcement, mm
do Distance from the extreme compression fiber to the centroid
of the outermost tension reinforcement, mm
dom Mean value of do, averaged around the critical shear perime-
ter, mm
D Overall depth of a section, mm
7-2 Notations
Chapter 7 - Design for AS 3600-01

Ds Thickness of slab (flanged section), mm
Ec Modulus of elasticity of concrete, MPa
Es Modulus of elasticity of reinforcement, MPa
f 'c Specified compressive strength of concrete, MPa
f'ci Specified compressive strength of concrete at time of initial
prestress, MPa
fpe Compressive stress in concrete due to effective prestress
forces only (after allowance of all prestress losses), MPa
fp Stress in prestressing steel at nominal flexural strength, MPa
fpu Specified tensile strength of prestressing steel, MPa
fpy Specified yield strength of prestressing steel, MPa
fct Characteristic principal tensile strength of concrete, MPa
f 'cf Characteristic flexural tensile strength of concrete, MPa
fcv Concrete shear strength, MPa
fsy Specified yield strength of flexural reinforcement, MPa
fsy,f Specified yield strength of shear reinforcement, MPa
f 's Stress in the compression reinforcement, MPa
Jt Torsional modulus, mm3
ku Ratio of the depth to the neutral axis from the compression
face, to the effective depth, d
Mu0 Design moment resistance of a section with tendons only, N-
mm
Mubal Design moment resistance of a section with tendons and the
necessary mild reinforcement to reach the balanced condi-
tion, N-mm
Mud Reduced ultimate strength in bending without axial force, N-
mm
M* Factored moment at section, N-mm
Notations 7- 3

N* Factored axial load at section, N
s Spacing of shear reinforcement along the beam, mm
Tuc Torsional strength of section without torsional reinforcement,
N-mm
Tu.max Maximum permitted total factored torsion at a section, N-mm
Tus Torsion strength of section with torsion reinforcement, N-mm
T* Factored torsional moment at a section, N-mm
ut Perimeter of the polygon defined by At , mm
*
V Factored shear force at a section, N
Vu.max Maximum permitted total factored shear force at a section, N
Vu.min Shear strength provided by minimum shear reinforcement, N
Vuc Shear force resisted by concrete, N
Vus Shear force resisted by reinforcement, N
γ1 Factor for obtaining depth of compression block in concrete
βh Ratio of the maximum to the minimum dimensions of the
punching critical section
εc Strain in concrete
εc, max Maximum usable compression strain allowed in extreme
concrete fiber, (0.003 mm/mm)
εs Strain in reinforcement
φ Strength reduction factor
θt Angle of compression strut for torsion, degrees
θv Angle of compression strut for shear, degrees

The design load combinations are the various combinations of the load cases
for which the structure needs to be designed. For AS 3600-01, if a structure is
subjected to dead load (D), live load (L), pattern live load (PL), snow (S), wind
(W), and earthquake (E) loads, and considering that wind and earthquake forc-

es are reversible, the load combinations in the following sections may need to
be considered (AS 3.3.1, 3.4 and 7.6.7).
For post-tensioned concrete design, the user can specify the prestressing load
(PT) by providing the tendon profile or by using the load balancing options in
the program. The default load combinations for post-tensioning are defined in
the following sections.

The following load combination is used for checking the requirements at trans-
fer of prestress forces in accordance with AS 3600-01 clauses 3.4 and 7.6.7.
The prestressing forces are considered without any long-term loses for the ini-
tial service load combination check.
1.0D + 1.0PT (AS 3.4)

1.15D + 1.15PT (AS 3.4)
0.9D + 1.15PT (AS 3.4)

The following load combinations are used for checking the requirements of
prestress for serviceability in accordance with AS3.4 and 7.6.7. It is assumed
that all long-term losses have occurred already at the service stage.
1.0D + 1.0PT
1.0D + 1.0L + 1.0PT
7.2.3 Ultimate Limit State Load Combination

prestress in accordance with AS 3.3.1, 3.4 and 7.6.7.
The ultimate limit state combinations required for shear design of beams and
punching shear require the full PT forces (primary and secondary). Flexural de-
sign requires only the hyperstatic (secondary) forces. The hyperstatic (second-
Design Load Combinations 7- 5

ary) forces are determined automatically by SAFE by subtracting out the pri-
mary PT moments when the flexural design is carried out.
1.35D + 1.0PT* (AS/NZS 1170.0-02, 4.2.2(a))

1.2D + 1.5L + 1.0PT* (AS/NZS 1170.0-02, 4.2.2(b))
1.2D + 1.5(0.75PL) + 1.0PT* (AS/NZS 1170.0-02, 4.2.2(b))
1.2D + 0.4L + 1.0S + 1.0PT* (AS/NZS 1170.0-02, 4.2.2(g))
0.9D ± 1.0W +1.0PT* (AS/NZS 1170.0-02, 4.2.2(e))
1.2D ± 1.0W + 1.0PT* (AS/NZS 1170.0-02, 4.2.2(d))
1.2D + 0.4L ± 1.0W + 1.0PT* (AS/NZS 1170.0-02, 4.2.2(d))
1.0D ± 1.0E + 1.0PT* (AS/NZS 1170.0-02, 4.2.2(f))

1.0D + 0.4L ± 1.0E + 1.0PT*
*
— Replace PT by H for flexural design only
Note that the 0.4 factor on the live load in three of the combinations is not valid
for live load representing storage areas. These are also the default design load
combinations in SAFE whenever the AS 3600-2001 code is used. If roof live
load is treated separately or other types of loads are present, other appropriate
load combinations should be used.

The upper and lower limits of f' c are 65 MPa and 20 MPa, respectively, for all
framing type (AS 6.1.1.1(b)).
f 'c ≤ 65 MPa (AS 6.1.1.1)
f 'c ≥ 20 MPa (AS 6.1.1.1)
The upper limit of fsy is 500 MPa (AS 6.2.1, Table 6.2.1).
The code allows use of f' c and fsy beyond the given limits, provided special care
is taken regarding the detailing and ductility (AS 6.1.1, 6.2.1, 19.2.1.1).
SAFE enforces the upper material strength limits for flexure and shear design
of beams and slabs or for torsion design of beams. The input material strengths
7-6 Limits on Material Strength

are taken as the upper limits if they are defined in the material properties as be-
ing greater than the limits. The user is responsible for ensuring that the mini-
mum strength is satisfied.

The strength reduction factor, φ, is defined as given in the following table (AS
2.3(c), Table 2.3):
Type of action effect Strength reduction factor (φ)

(a) Axial force without bending —
(i) Tension 0.8
(ii) Compression 0.6
(b) Bending without axial tension or compression where:
(i) ku ≤ 0.4 0.8
(ii) ku > 0.4 0.8 Mud /Muo ≥ 0.6
(c) Bending with axial tension φ +[(0.8 − φ)(Nu/Nuot)]
φ is obtained from (b)
(d) Bending with axial compression where:
(i) Nu ≥ Nub 0.6
(ii) Nu < Nub 0.6+ [(φ- 0.6)(1 − Nu/Nub)]
(e) Shear 0.7
(f) Torsion 0.7
The value Mud is the reduced ultimate strength of the cross-section in bending
where ku = 0.4 and tensile force has been reduced to balance the reduced com-
pressive forces (AS 8.1.3).
These values can be overwritten; however, caution is advised.
7.5 Design Assumptions for Prestressed Concrete Struc-

tures
Ultimate limit state of prestressed members for flexure and axial loads shall be
based on assumptions given in AS 8.1.
 The strain distribution in the concrete in compression is derived from the

assumption that the plane section remains plane (AS 8.1.2.1(a)).
Strength Reduction Factors 7- 7

 Tensile strength of the concrete is ignored (AS 8.1.2.1 (b)).
 The design stresses in the concrete in compression are taken as 0.85 f c′ . The
maximum strain at the extreme concrete compression fiber shall be assumed
equal to 0.003 (AS 8.1.2.1 (c), 8.1.2.2).
 The strain in bonded prestressing tendons and in any additional reinforce-

ment (compression or tension) is derived from the assumption that plane sec-
tion remains plane (AS 8.1.2.1(a)).
Prestressed concrete members are investigated at the following three stages:
The prestressed flexural members are classified as uncracked and cracked

based on tensile strength ft, the computed extreme fiber stress in tension in the
precompressed tensile zone at service loads.

sile stress.

time dependent prestress losses) are checked against the following limits (AS
8.1.4.2):
 Extreme fiber stress in compression: 0.50 f cp
7-8 Serviceability Requirements of Flexural Members

The extreme fiber stress in tension should not exceed the cracking stress; oth-
erwise the section should be designed as a cracked section.
7.6.2 Serviceability Check at Service Load

Flexural cracking in a prestressed beam shall be deemed to be controlled if un-
der short-term service loads the resulting maximum tensile stress in concrete
does not exceed 0.25 f c′; in that case, no further checks are needed (AS
8.6.2). However, if this limit is exceeded, flexural cracking shall be deemed to
be controlled by providing reinforcement or bonded tendons, or both, near the
tensile face and achieving either of the following (AS 8.6.2, 9.4.2):
(a) limiting the calculated maximum flexural tensile stress under short-term
service loads to 0.6 f c' ; or
(b) limiting both of the following
(i) the increment in steel stress near the tension face to 200 MPa, as the
load increases from its value when the extreme concrete tensile fiber is
at zero stress to the short-term service load value; and
(ii) the center-to-center spacing of reinforcement, including bonded ten-

dons, to 200 mm. (This sub clause is a detailing requirement not
checked by the program.)
The program checks the stresses in the concrete prestressed flexural members
at service loads and after all prestress losses against the following limit (AS
8.6.2):
 Extreme fiber stress in tension in the

precompressed tensile zone at service loads:
– Extreme fiber stresses in tension for cracked section: 0.5 f c'
Thus, although cracking is allowed, it is assumed that the user is limiting the
tensile stress at the service stage as presented in AS 8.6.2.
Serviceability Requirements of Flexural Members 7- 9

7.7 Beam Design


of a particular beam, for a particular station, the following steps are involved:

In the design of flexural reinforcement of prestressed concrete beams, the
factored moments for each load combination at a particular beam station are
obtained by factoring the corresponding moments for different load cases, with
7 - 10 Beam Design

moments can be used to calculate top reinforcement. In such cases, the beam

the concrete.

shown in Figure 7-1 (AS 8.1.2.2).
ε =0.003 0.85 f ′c
b
A′s f ′s Cs
d′ c a = γku d
dp
ds
Ap
ε ps Tcps
Ts Tcs
As εs
BEAM STRAIN STRESS

The design procedure used by SAFE for both rectangular and flanged sections
(L- and T-beams) is summarized in the following subsections. It is assumed
that the design ultimate axial force does not exceed (Ascfsy > 0.15N*) (AS
Beam Design 7- 11
10.7.1a); hence all beams are designed for major direction flexure, shear, and
torsion only.

The amount of post-tensioning steel adequate to resist the design moment M
and minimum reinforcement are provided to satisfy the flexural cracking
requirements (AS 8.1.4.1).
SAFE determines the depth of the neutral axis, a, by imposing force equilibri-
um, i.e., C = T, and performs an iteration to compute the depth of the neutral
axis, which is based on stress-strain compatibility for bonded tendons. For
unbonded tendons, the code equations are used to compute the stress, fps in the
post-tensioning steel. After the depth of the neutral axis has been found, the
stress in the post-tensioning reinforcement fpb is computed based on strain
compatibility.
The following assumptions are used for the stress block used to compute the
flexural bending capacity of rectangular sections (AS 8.1.2.2).
 The maximum strain in the extreme compression fiber is taken as 0.003.
 A uniform compressive stress of 0.85f' c acts on an area bounded by:
 The edges of the cross-sections.
 A line parallel to the neutral axis at the strength limit under the loading
concerned, and located at a distance γkud from the extreme compression
fiber.

given by
amax = γk u d where, (AS 8.1.3)
γ = [0.85 − 0.007( f 'c −28)]
0.65 ≤ γ ≤ 0.85 (AS 8.1.2.2)
ku = 0.4
7 - 12 Beam Design
 If a ≤ amax (AS 8.1.3), the moment capacity of the section, provided by post-
tensioning steel only, is computed as:
 a
=M u0 Ap f p  d p − 
 2
 If a > amax (AS 8.1.3), a failure condition is declared.
If M > M u0 , SAFE calculates the moment capacity and the As required at the
balanced condition. The balanced condition is taken as the marginal tension
controlled case. In that case, it is assumed that the depth of neutral axis c is
equal to cmax. The stress in the post-tensioning steel, fp is then calculated based
on strain compatibility and the area of required tension reinforcement, As, is de-
termined by imposing force equilibrium, i.e., C = T.
C = 0.85 f 'c bamax (AS 8.1.2.2)
=T Ap f pbal + Asbal f sbal
bal
0.85f'c - Ap f pbal
As =
f sbal
bal  a   a 
M=
u Ap f pbal  d p − max  + Asbal f sbal  d s − max 
 2   2 
ing the depth of neutral axis, c.
Beam Design 7- 13

When M < M u0 , the amount of post-tensioning steel is adequate to resist the
design moment M.. Minimum reinforcement is provided to satisfy the ductility
requirements, i.e., M < M u0 .

In this case, the amount of post-tensioning steel, Ap, alone is not sufficient to
resist M, and therefore the required area of tension reinforcement is computed
When M u0 < M < M ubal , SAFE determines the required area of tension rein-
forcement, As, iteratively to satisfy the design moment M and reports this re-
quired area of tension reinforcement. Since M is bounded by M u0 at the lower
end and M ubal at the upper end, and M u0 is associated with As = 0 and M ubal is
associated with As = Asbal , the required area will fall between the range of 0 to
Asbal.
The tension reinforcement is to be placed at the bottom if M is positive, or at

the top if M is negative.
equate
When M > M ubal , compression reinforcement is required (AS 8.1.3). In that
case, SAFE assumes that the depth of neutral axis, c, is equal to cmax . The
values of fp and fs reach their respective balanced condition values, f pbal and
f sbal . The area of compression reinforcement, As' , is determined as follows:

reinforcement is:
= M − M ubal
M us
7 - 14 Beam Design
Mus
Asc = , where
( f 's − 0.85 f 'c )( d − d ′)φ
 c − d′ 
=f ′s 0.003Es   ≤ fsy (AS 8.1.2.1, 6.2.2)
 c 

en by:
M us
Ascom =
φ f y ( d s − d ')
be placed at the top if M is positive, and vice versa if M is negative.

In designing for a factored negative moment, M (i.e., designing top reinforce-
ment), the calculation of the reinforcement area is exactly the same as de-
scribed previously, i.e., no flanged beam data is used.

In that case, moment capacity M u0 is determined as follows:
unbonded tendons, the code equations are used to compute the stress, fps in the
post-tensioning steel. After the depth of the neutral axis has been determined,
the stress in the post-tensioning steel, fpb is computed based on strain compati-
bility.
Beam Design 7- 15

given by
amax = γk u d where, ku = 0.4 (AS 8.1.3)
 a
=M u0 Ap f p  d p − 
 2
controlled case. In that case it is assumed that the depth of neutral axis c is
on strain compatibility for bonded tendons. For unbonded tendons, the code
equations are used to compute the stress, fps in the post-tensioning steel, and the
area of required tension reinforcement, As, is determined by imposing force
 If a ≤ Ds, the subsequent calculations for As are exactly the same as previous-
ly defined for the rectangular beam design. However, in this case the width
of the beam is taken as bf. Compression reinforcement is required when
amax = γk u d where, ku = 0.4.
 If a > Ds, the calculation for As is given by
C = 0.85 f c′amax Accom
b f Ds + bw ( amax − Ds )
Accom =
7 - 16 Beam Design
bal
0.85f c′amax Accom - Ap f pbal
As =
f sbal

design moment M. Minimum reinforcement is provided to satisfy ductility

Beam Design 7- 17

forcement, As, iteratively to satisfy the design moment M and reports the
required area of tension reinforcement. Since M is bounded by M u0 at the low-
er end and M ubal at the upper end, and M u0 is associated with As = 0 and M ubal
is associated with As = Asbal , the required area will be within the range of 0 to
As .

equate
When M > M ubal , compression reinforcement is required. In that case, SAFE
assumes that the depth of the neutral axis, c, is equal to cmax . The values of fp
and fs reach their respective balanced condition values, f pbal and f sbal . The ar-
ea of compression reinforcement, As' , is then determined as follows:

reinforcement is:
= M − M ubal
M us
M us
As′ = , where
φ ( f s′ − 0.85 f c′ )( d − d ')
 c − d′ 
=f ′s 0.003Es  max  ≤ fsy (AS 8.1.2.1, 6.2.2)
 cmax 

en by:
7 - 18 Beam Design
M us
Ascom =
φ f y ( d s − d ')
compression reinforcement is A′s. As is to be placed at the bottom, and A′s is to
be placed at the top if M is positive and vice versa if M is negative.
7.7.1.3 Minimum and Maximum Reinforcement

Reinforcement in post-tensioned concrete beams is computed to increase the
strength of sections as documented for the flexural design of post-tensioned
beams or to comply with the shear link requirements. The minimum flexural
tension reinforcement required for a beam section to comply with the cracking
requirements needs to be separately investigated by the user.
The ultimate strength in bending (Muo), at critical sections shall not be less than
( M uo )min given by:
( M uo )min= 1.2  Z ( f cf′ + P / Ag ) + Pe  (AS 8.1.4.1)
where
Z = the section modulus of the uncracked section, referred to the extreme

fiber at which flexural cracking occurs
f cf' = the characteristic flexural tensile strength of the concrete
e = the eccentricity of the prestressing force (P), measured from the

centroidal axis of the uncracked section

2
 D  f ′cf
Ast .min = 0.22   bd , where (AS 8.1.4.1)
 d  fsy
Beam Design 7- 19
f 'cf = 0.6 f 'c (AS 6.1.1.2)

Ast ≤ 
Asc ≤ 

The shear reinforcement is designed for each load combination in the major
direction of the beam. In designing the shear reinforcement for a particular
beam for a particular load combination, the following steps are involved
 Determine the factored shear force, V*.
 Determine the shear force, Vuc, that can be resisted by the concrete.
The following three subsections describe in detail the algorithms associated

with these steps.
7.7.2.1 Determine Shear Force


The ultimate shear strength (Vuc) of a prestressed beam, excluding the contribu-
tion of shear reinforcement, is the lesser of the values obtained from the fol-
lowing, unless the cross-section under consideration is cracked in flexure, in
which case only Flexural-Shear Cracking, Item (a), applies:
7 - 20 Beam Design
(a) Flexural-Shear Cracking
( )
13
 Ast + Apt f'c 
Vuc =β1 β2 β3bv d o   + Vo + Pv (AS 8.2.7.2(a))
 bw d o 
where,
 do 
β1 = 1.11.6 −  ≥ 1.1 (AS 8.2.7.1)
 1000 
β2 = 1, or (AS 8.2.7.1)
 N* 
= 1−   ≥ 0 for members subject to significant axial tension, or
 3.5 A 
 g 
 N* 
= 1+   for members subject to significant axial compression.
 14 A 
 g 
β3 = 1
Vo = the shear force that would occur at the section when the bending
moment at that section was equal to the decompression moment
(Mo) given by:
M o =Zσ cp.f
where
σ cp.f = the compressive stress because of prestress, at the ex-

treme fiber where cracking occurs
b) Web-shear cracking
Vuc= Vt + Pv (AS 8.2.7.2(b))
where
Beam Design 7- 21
Vt = the shear force, which, in combination with the prestressing force

and other action effects at the section, would produce a principal
tensile stress of 0.33 f c′ at either the centroidal axis or the inter-
section of flange and web, whichever is the more critical.
Where significant reversal of loads may occur, causing cracking in a zone

usually in compression, the value of Vuc obtained from Clause 8.2.7.1 may not
apply.

= Vuc + 0.6bv do
Vu,min (AS 8.2.9)
Vu,max = 0.2 f 'c bdo + Pv (AS 8.2.6)
Given V*, Vuc, and Vu.max, the required shear reinforcement is calculated as fol-
lows, where, φ, the strength reduction factor, is 0.6 by default (AS 2.3).
 If V * ≤ φVuc / 2,
Asv
= 0 , if D ≤ 750 mm, otherwise Asv.min shall be provided (AS 8.2.5).
s
 If (φVuc / 2 ) < V * ≤ φVu.min ,
Asv
= 0, if D < bw /2 or 250 mm, whichever is greater (AS 8.2.5(c)(i)),
s
otherwise Asv.min shall be provided.
 If φVu.min < V * ≤ φVu.max ,
Asv
=
(
V * − φVuc ) , (AS 8.2.10)
s fsy. f do cot θ v
and greater than Asv.min, defined as:
7 - 22 Beam Design
Asv. min  b 

= 0.35 w (AS 8.2.8)
s  f sy . f 
 
θv = the angle between the axis of the concrete compression strut and the
longitudinal axis of the member, which varies linearly from 30 degrees
when V*=φVu.min to 45 degrees when V*=φ Vu,max.
 If V * > φVmax , a failure condition is declared. (AS 8.2.6)
 If V* exceeds its maximum permitted value φVmax, the concrete section size
should be increased (AS 8.2.6).
Note that if torsion design is considered and torsion reinforcement is required,

the calculated shear reinforcement is ignored. Closed stirrups are designed for
combined shear and torsion in accordance with AS 8.3.4(b).
The maximum of all of the calculated Asv /s values obtained from each load
combination is reported along with the controlling shear force and associated
load combination.


signing the longitudinal and shear reinforcement for a particular station due to
the beam torsion:
 Determine the factored torsion, T*.
Beam Design 7- 23

torsions for different load cases, with the corresponding load combination fac-
tors.

design T* is permitted to be reduced in accordance with the code (AS 8.3.2).
However, the program does not automatically redistribute the internal forces
and reduce T*. If redistribution is desired, the user should release the torsional
degree of freedom (DOF) in the structural model.

For torsion design, special section properties such as At, Jt, and ut are calculat-
ed. These properties are described in the following (AS 8.3).
At = Area of a polygon with vertices at the center of longitudinal bars

at the corners of the cross-section
ut = Perimeter of the polygon defined by At
Jt = Torsional modulus
In calculating the section properties involving reinforcement, such as Asw/s and

Al, it is assumed that the distance between the centerline of the outermost
closed stirrup and the outermost concrete surface is 50 mm. This is equivalent
to 38-mm clear cover and a 12-mm-diameter stirrup. For torsion design of
flanged beam sections, it is assumed that placing torsion reinforcement in the
flange area is inefficient. With this assumption, the flange is ignored for torsion
reinforcement calculation. However, the flange is considered during Tuc calcu-
lation. With this assumption, the special properties for a rectangular beam sec-
tion are given as:
At = ( b − 2c )( h − 2c ) , (AS 8.3.5)
ut = 2 ( b − 2c ) + 2 ( h − 2c ) , (AS 8.3.6)
Jt = 0.4x2y (AS 8.3.3)
7 - 24 Beam Design
where, the section dimensions b, h and, c are as shown in Figure 7-3. Similarly,
At = ( bw − 2c )( h − 2c ) , (AS 8.3.5)
ut = 2 ( h − 2c ) + 2 ( bw − 2c ) , (AS 8.3.6)
Jt = 0.4Σx2y (AS 8.3.3)
where the section dimensions bw, h, and c for a flanged beam are as shown in
Figure 7-3. The values x and y refer to the smaller and larger dimensions of a
component rectangle, respectively.
c bb − 22c
c c bef
c c
D
ds
h − 2c hh hh h − 2c
c c
b bw − 2c
bbww


The torsional strength of the section without torsion reinforcement, Tuc, is cal-
culated as:
Tuc =0.3 J t f ′c (AS 8.3.5)
where Jt is the torsion modulus of the concrete cross-section as described in

detail in the previous section
Beam Design 7- 25
Torsion reinforcement also can be ignored if any of the following is satisfied:
T * ≤ 0.25φTuc (AS 8.3.4(a)(i))
T* V*
+ ≤ 0.5 (AS 8.3.4(a)(ii))
φTuc φVuc
T* V*
+ ≤ 1 and D ≤ max(250mm, b/2) (AS 8.3.4(a)(iii))
φTuc φVuc
If the factored torsion T* alone or in combination with V* does not satisfy any
of the preceding three conditions, torsion reinforcement is needed. It is as-
sumed that the torsional resistance is provided by closed stirrups and longitudi-
nal bars (AS 8.3).
 If T* > Tcr, the required closed stirrup area per unit spacing, Asw /s, is calculat-
ed as:
Asw T * tan θ t
= (AS 8.3.5(b))
s φ 2 f sy. f At
where, the minimum value of Asw /s is taken as follows:
Asw. min 0.35bw

= (AS 8.2.8)
s f sy. f
The value θt is the angle between the axis of the concrete compression strut and
the longitudinal axis of the member, which varies linearly from 30 degrees
when T* = φTuc to 45 degrees when T* = φTu,max.
The following equation shall also be satisfied for combined shear and torsion
by adding additional shear stirrups.
T* V*
+ ≤ 1.0 (AS 8.3.4(b))
φTus φVus
where,
7 - 26 Beam Design
A 
Tus = f sy . f  sw 2 At cot θ t (AS 8.3.5(b))
 s 
Vus = (Asv f sy . f d o / s )cot θ v (AS 8.2.10(a))
The required longitudinal rebar area is calculated as:
A 
0.5 f sy. f  sw ut cot 2 θ t
Al =  s  (AS 8.3.6(a))
f sy
An upper limit of the combination of V* and T* that can be carried by the sec-
tion also is checked using the equation:
T* V*
+ ≤ 1.0 (AS 8.3.3)
φTu . max φVu . max
where,
Vu . max = 0.2 f 'c bw d o (AS 8.2.6)
Tu . max = 0.2 f 'c J t (AS 8.3.5(a))
For rectangular sections, bw is replaced with b. If the combination of V* and T*

When torsional reinforcement is required (T* > Tcr), the area of transverse
closed stirrups and the area of regular shear stirrups satisfy the following limit.
 Asv A  0.35b
 + 2 sw  ≥ (AS 8.3.7, 8.2.8)
 s s  f sy . f
If this equation is not satisfied with the originally calculated Asv/s and Asw/s,
Asv/s is increased to satisfy this condition. In that case, Asv/s does not need to
satisfy AS Section 8.2.8 independently.
The maximum of all of the calculated Al and Asv/s values obtained from each
Beam Design 7- 27
The beam torsion reinforcement requirements reported by the program are

and longitudinal rebar requirements to satisfy spacing considerations must be
investigated independently of the program by the user.
7.8 Slab Design

of the strips typically are governed by the locations of the slab supports. The
moments for a particular strip are recovered from the analysis, and a flexural
design is carried out based on the ultimate strength design method (AS 3600-
01) for prestressed reinforced concrete as described in the following subsec-
tions. To learn more about the design strips, refer to the section entitled "SAFE
Design Techniques" in the Key Features and Terminology manual.

placement vectors. These moments will always be in static equilibrium with the
applied loads, irrespective of the refinement of the finite element mesh.
The design of the slab reinforcement for a particular strip is carried out at spe-
cific locations along the length of the strip. These locations correspond to the
these element boundaries. The slab flexural design procedure for each load
 Determine factored moments for each slab strip
 Determine the capacity of post-tensioned sections
 Design flexural reinforcement for the strip
These three steps are described in the subsections that follow and are repeated
7 - 28 Slab Design


The calculation of the post-tensioned section capacity is identical to that
described earlier for rectangular beam sections.

earlier (or to the flanged beam if the slab is ribbed). Where the slab properties
(depth and so forth) vary over the width of the strip, the program automatically
designs slab widths of each property separately for the bending moment to
which they are subjected before summing up the reinforcement for the full
width. This method is used when drop panels are included. Where openings
occur, the slab width is adjusted accordingly.
7.8.1.4 Minimum and Maximum Slab Reinforcement

The minimum requirements for untensioned reinforcement in one-way bonded
slabs is the same as for beams (AS 9.1.1). Flexural cracking in prestressed
slabs shall be deemed controlled if under short-term service loads the resulting
stress is less than 0.25 f c′ ; in that case, no further checks are needed (AS
9.4.2). However, if that limit is exceeded, flexural cracking shall be deemed
under control by providing reinforcement or bonded tendons, or both, near the
tensile face and accomplishing either of the following (AS 9.4.2):
Slab Design 7- 29
(b) limiting both of the following:

dons, to 500 mm. (This sub clause is a detailing requirement that is not
at service loads and after all prestress losses have occurred against the follow-
ing limit (AS 9.4.2):




The punching shear is checked on a critical section at a distance of dom /2 from
the face of the support (AS 9.2.1.1). For rectangular columns and concentrated
the sides of the columns or the point loads (AS 9.2.1.3). Figure 7-4 shows the
auto punching perimeters considered by SAFE for the various column shapes.
7 - 30 Slab Design
The column location (i.e., interior, edge, corner) and the punching perimeter
may be overwritten using the Punching Check Overwrites.
d 2
d 2 d 2
d 2
d 2 d 2

(i) The ultimate shear strength of a slab where M v* is zero, Vuo , is given as
(AS 9.2.3(a)):
a. when no shear link/stud is present
=Vuo ud om ( f cv + 0.3σ cp ) (AS 9.2.3(a))
b. when shear link/stud is present
( )
Vuo ud om 0.5 f c′ + 0.3σ cp ≤ 0.2 f c′ud om
= (AS 9.2.3(b))
where fcv is taken as the minimum of the following two limits:
Slab Design 7- 31
  2 
0.17  1 + f ′c
fcv = min   β h  (AS 9.2.3(a))

0.34 f ′c
where, βh is the ratio of the longest to the minimum dimensions of the crit-
ical section.
(ii) The ultimate shear strength of a slab where M v* is not zero and no shear
reinforcement is provided, Vu , is given as (AS 9.2.4(a)):
= (
Vu Vuo / 1.0 + uM v / 8V *ad om  ) (AS 9.2.4(a))

by SAFE.

The design guidelines for shear links or shear studs are not available in AS
3600-2001. SAFE uses the NZS 3101-06 guidelines to design shear studs or
shear links.

that the effective depth of the slab is greater than or equal to 150 mm, and not
less than 16 times the shear reinforcement bar diameter (NZS 12.7.4.1). If the
7 - 32 Slab Design

The concrete punching shear stress capacity of a section with punching shear
reinforcement is as previously determined for the punching check.

Vmax = 3 Vu,min = 3×Vu (AS 92.2.4(a), (d))
Where Vu is computed from AS 9.2.3 or 9.2.4.Given V*, Vu, and Vu,max, the re-
quired shear reinforcement is calculated as follows, where, φ, is the strength
reduction factor.
Asv
=
(
V * − φVu ), (AS 8.2.10)
s f sy dom
Minimum punching shear reinforcement should be provided such that:
1
Vs ≥ f 'c ud om (NZS 12.7.4.3)
16
 If V* > φVmax, a failure condition is declared. (NZS 12.7.3.4)
 If V* exceeds the maximum permitted value of φVmax, the concrete section


tances from the sides of the column. Figure 7-5 shows a typical arrangement of
shear reinforcement in the vicinity of a rectangular interior, edge, and corner
column.
The distance between the column face and the first line of shear reinforcement
shall not exceed d/2. The spacing between adjacent shear reinforcement in the
first line (perimeter) of shear reinforcement shall not exceed 2d measured in a
direction parallel to the column face (NZS 12.7.4.4).
Slab Design 7- 33

edge
d 2 d 2 Iy
gy
gx
s0 s0 s0
Iy x x gx
Iy
Critical d 2
section
centroid Free
edge y x
y
centroid
Ix
Ix
Figure 7-5 Typical arrangement of shear studs

and critical sections outside shear-reinforced zone
Punching shear reinforcement is most effective near column corners where

there are concentrations of shear stress. Therefore, the minimum number of
lines of shear reinforcement is 4, 6, and 8, for corner, edge, and interior col-
umns respectively.

The punching shear reinforcement is most effective when the anchorage is
close to the top and bottom surfaces of the slab. The cover of anchors should
not be less than the minimum cover specified in NZS 3.11 plus half of the
diameter of the flexural reinforcement.
When specifying shear studs, the distance, so, between the column face and the
first peripheral line of shear studs should not be smaller than 0.5d. The spacing
between adjacent shear studs, g, at the first peripheral line of studs shall not ex-
ceed 2d and in the case of studs in a radial pattern, the angle between adjacent
stud rails shall not exceed 60 degrees. The limits of so and the spacing, s, be-
tween the peripheral lines are specified as:
so ≤ 0.5d (NZS 12.7.4.4)

s ≤ 0.5d (NZS 12.7.4.4)
g ≤ 2d (NZS 12.7.4.4)
7 - 34 Slab Design
Chapter 8
Design for BS 8110-97
crete design procedure that is used by SAFE when British code BS 8110-97
[BSI 1997] is selected. For light-weight concrete and torsion, reference is made
to BS 8110-2:1985 [BSI 1985]. Various notations used in this chapter are listed
in Table 8-1. For referencing to the pertinent sections of the BS code in this
chapter, a prefix “BS” followed by the section number is used.

8.1 Notations
Table 8-1 List of Symbols Used in the BS 8110-97 Code

Acv Area of section for shear resistance, mm2
Notations 8-1

Ag Gross area of cross-section, mm2
Aps Area of prestress steel, mm2
A's Area of compression reinforcement, mm2
Asv Total cross-sectional area of links at the neutral axis, mm2
Asv / sv Area of shear reinforcement per unit length of the member,
mm2/mm
amax Maximum depth of the compression block, mm
b Width or effective width of the section in the compression
zone, mm
bf Width or effective width of flange, mm
bw Average web width of a flanged beam, mm
d or de Effective depth of tension reinforcement, mm
d' Depth to center of compression reinforcement, mm
Es Modulus of elasticity of reinforcement, assumed as 200,000
MPa
fci Concrete strength at transfer, MPa
fcu Characteristic cube strength at 28 days, MPa
fpu Characteristic strength of a prestressing tendon, MPa
fpb Design tensile stress in tendon, MPa
f s' Compressive stress in a beam compression steel, MPa
fy Characteristic strength reinforcement, MPa

fyv Characteristic strength of link reinforcement, MPa (< 500
MPa)
h Overall depth of a section in the plane of bending, mm
8-2 Notations
Chapter 8 - Design for BS 8110-97

hf Flange thickness, mm
k1 Shear strength enhancement factor for support compression
1
Concrete shear strength factor, [ fcu 25]

3
k2
M Design moment at a section, N-mm

Mu Design moment resistance of a section, N-mm
mm
tion, N-mm
sv Spacing of the links along the length of the beam, mm
s Spacing of shear rails, mm
T Tension force, N
V Design shear force at ultimate design load, N
u Perimeter of the punching critical section, mm
v Design shear stress at a beam cross-section or at a punch crit-
ical section, MPa
vc Design ultimate shear stress resistance of a concrete beam,
MPa
vco Ultimate shear stress resistance of an uncracked concrete
section, MPa
vcr Ultimate shear stress resistance of a cracked concrete section,
MPa
vmax Maximum permitted design factored shear stress at a beam
section or at the punch critical section, MPa
vt Torsional shear stress, MPa
x Neutral axis depth, mm
xbal Depth of neutral axis in a balanced section, mm
Notations 8 - 3

z Lever arm, mm
β Torsional stiffness constant
βb Moment redistribution factor in a member
γf Partial safety factor for load
γm Partial safety factor for material strength
εc Maximum concrete strain, 0.0035
εps Strain in prestressing steel
εs Strain in tension steel
'
εs Strain in compression steel

for which the structure needs to be designed. The design load combinations are
obtained by multiplying the characteristic loads by appropriate partial factors
of safety, γf (BS 2.4.1.3). For BS 8110-97, if a structure is subjected to dead
(D), live (L), pattern live (PL), snow (S), and wind (W) loads, and considering
that wind forces are reversible, the load combinations in the following sections
may need to be considered (BS 2.4.3, 4.1.7.1, 4.3.4 and 4.3.5).

fer of prestress forces in accordance with BS 8110-97 clause 4.3.5. The pre-
stressing forces are considered without any long-term loses for the initial ser-
vice load combination check.

1.0D + 1.0PT

prestress for serviceability in accordance with BS 4.3.4. It is assumed that all
long-term losses have already occurred at the service stage.
1.0D + 1.0PT
1.0D + 1.0L + 1.0PT

prestress in accordance with BS 2.4.3.1.1, Table 2.1.
The strength design combinations required for shear design of beams and
sign only requires the hyperstatic (secondary) forces. The hyperstatic (second-
ary) forces are automatically determined by SAFE by subtracting out the pri-
1.4D + 1.0PT* (BS 2.4.3)

1.4D + 1.6L + 1.0PT* (BS 2.4.3)
1.4D + 1.6(0.75PL) + 1.0PT* (BS 2.4.3)
1.0D ± 1.4W +1.0PT*
1.4D ± 1.4W + 1.0PT* (BS 2.4.3)
1.2D + 1.2L ± 1.2W + 1.0PT*
1.4D + 1.6L + 1.6S + 1.0PT*
1.2D + 1.2S ± 1.2W + 1.0PT* (BS 2.4.3)
1.2D + 1.2L + 1.2S ± 1.2W + 1.0PT*
*
— Replace PT with H for flexural design only
Other appropriate loading combinations should be used if roof live load is sep-
arately treated, or other types of loads are present.


Grade C28/C35 and C32/C40 are the minimum recommended for post-
tensioning and pre-tensioning respectively. In both cases the concrete strength
at transfer should not be less than 25 MPa (BS 4.1.8.1).
The specified characteristic strength of untensioned reinforcement is given as

follows (BS 4.1.8.2, 3.1.7.4):
Hot rolled mild reinforcement - 250 MPa (BS 3.1.7.4, Table 3.1)
High yield reinforcement - 500 MPa (BS 3.1.7.4, Table 3.1)
The specified characteristic strength of prestressing steel should conform to BS

448 and BS 5896.
SAFE also checks the tensile strength in the prestressing steel (BS 4.7.1). The
permissible tensile stresses in all types of prestressing steel, in terms of the
specified minimum tensile strength fpu, are summarized as follows:
a. Due to tendon jacking force: 0.75 fpu
b. Immediately after prestress transfer: 0.70 fpu
In any circumstances, the initial prestressing forces shall not exceed 0.75 fpu.
8.4 Partial Safety Factors

The design strengths for concrete and reinforcement are obtained by dividing
the characteristic strength of the material by a partial safety factor, γm. The val-
ues of γm used in the program are listed in the table that follows, as taken from
BS Table 2.2 (BS 2.4.4.1):
Values of γm for the ultimate limit state
Reinforcement, γms 1.15
Prestressing steel, γmp 1.15
Concrete in flexure and axial load, γmc 1.50
Shear strength without shear reinforcement, γmv 1.25
8-6 Limits on Material Strength

These factors are already incorporated in the design equations and tables in the
code. Note that for reinforcement, the default factor of 1.15 is for Grade 500
reinforcement. If other grades are used, this value should be overwritten as
necessary. Changes to the partial safety factors are carried through the design
equations where necessary, typically affecting the material strength portions of
the equations.

tures
The ultimate limit state of prestressed members for flexure and axial loads shall
be based on assumptions given in BS 4.3.7.1.

assumption that a plane section remains plane (BS 4.3.7.1(a)).
 The design stresses in the concrete in compression are taken as 0.45 fcu. The
equal to 0.0035 (BS 4.3.7.1(b)).
 Tensile strength of the concrete is ignored (BS 4.3.7.1(c)).

ment (compression or tension) is derived from the assumption that the plane
section remains plane (BS 4.3.7.1(d)).
The serviceability limit state of prestressed members uses the following as-
sumptions given in BS 4.3.4.1.
 Plane sections remain plane, i.e., strain varies linearly with depth through the
entire load range (BS 4.3.4.1(a)).
 Elastic behavior exists by limiting the concrete stresses to the values given in
BS 4.3.4.2, 4.3.4.3, and 4.3.5 (BS 4.3.4.1(b)).
 In general, it is only necessary to calculate design stresses resulting from the

load arrangements immediately after the transfer of prestress and after all
losses or prestress have occurred; in both cases the effects of dead and im-
Design Assumptions for Prestressed Concrete Structures 8 - 7

posed loads on the strain and force in the tendons may be ignored (BS
4.3.4.1(c)).

(BS 4.3.4.2 and 4.3.4.3):
The prestressed flexural members are classified as Class 1 (uncracked), Class 2

(cracked but no visible cracking), and Class 3 (cracked) based on tensile
strength ft, the computed extreme fiber stress in tension in the precompressed
tensile zone at service loads (BS 4.1.3).

sile stress.
Class 1: No flexural tensile stresses
Class 2: Flexural tensile stresses but no visible cracking
Class 3: Flexural tensile stresses but surface width of cracks are as follows:
 Crack width ≤ 0.1 mm for members in exposure class XS2, XS3,

XD2, XD3, XF3 and XF4 (Table A.1 of BS 8500-1)
 Crack width ≤ 0.2 mm for all other members
8-8 Design Assumptions for Prestressed Concrete Structures


time dependent prestress losses) are checked against the following limits (BS
4.3.5.1 and 4.3.5.2):
 Extreme fiber stress in compression: 0.50 f ci
 Extreme fiber stress in tension for Class 1: ≤ 1.0 MPa
 Extreme fiber stress in tension for Class 2:
pre-tensioned member 0.45 f ci
post-tensioned member 0.36 f ci
The extreme fiber stress in tension for Class 3 should not exceed the appropri-
ate value for a Class 2 member; otherwise the section should be designed as a
cracked section.

The stresses in the concrete for Class 1 and Class 2 prestressed flexural mem-
bers at service loads, and after all prestress losses have occurred, are checked
against the following limits (BS 4.3.4.2, 4.3.4.3):

to prestress plus total load: 0.33 f cu

to prestress plus total load for continuous
beams and other statically indeterminate
structures: 0.4 f cu


– Extreme fiber stresses in tension for Class 1: No tensile stress
– Extreme fiber stresses in tension for Class 2:
pre-tensioned member 0.45 f cu
post-tensioned member 0.36 f cu
Although cracking is allowed for Class 3, it is assumed that the concrete

section is uncracked and the user is limiting the tensile stress at service stage as
presented in Table 4.2, modified by the coefficients in Table 4.3 of BS 8110-
1997. The user needs to provide the tension limits for Class 3 elements at
service loads in the design preferences BS 4.3.4.3(c)).
8.7 Beam Design

8 - 10 Beam Design



the concrete.

shown in Figure 8-1 (BS 3.4.4.4, 4.3.7.1). Furthermore, it is assumed that mo-
ment redistribution in the member does not exceed 10 percent (i.e., βb ≥ 0.9)
(BS 3.4.4.4). The code also places a limitation on the neutral axis depth, x/d ≤
0.5, to safeguard against non-ductile failures (BS 3.4.4.4). In addition, the area
Beam Design 8 - 11
of compression reinforcement is calculated on the assumption that the neutral

axis depth remains at the maximum permitted value.
that the design ultimate axial force does not exceed 0.1 fcu Ag (BS 3.4.4.1);
ly.
ε = 0.0035 0.67 f cu γ m
b
A′s f ′s Cs
d′ x a = 0.9 x
ds dp
Aps
ε ps Tcps
Ts Tcs
As εs
BEAM STRAIN STRESS

requirements (BS 4.12.6).
SAFE determines the depth of the neutral axis, x, by imposing force equilibri-
axis, which is based on stress-strain compatibility. After the depth of the neu-
tral axis has been found, the stress in the post-tensioning reinforcement fpb is
computed based on strain compatibility.
8 - 12 Beam Design
The ductility of a section is controlled by limiting the x/d ratio (BS 3.4.4.4):
x/d = 0.5 (BS 3.4.4.4)
The maximum depth of the compression block is given by:
a = 0.9x (BS 3.4.4.1(b), 4.3.7.3)
The lever arm of the section must not be greater than 0.95 times the effective
depth (BS 3.4.4.1).
z = d − 0.45x ≤ 0.95de (BS 3.4.4.1(e))
 If a ≤ amax (BS 3.4.4.4), the moment capacity of the section, provided by

=M u0 Aps f pb d p − 0.45 x( ) (BS 4.3.7.3)
 If a > amax (BS 3.4.4.4), a failure condition is declared.
controlled case. In that case, it is assumed that the depth of neutral axis x is
equal to cmax. The stress in the post-tensioning steel, fpb is then calculated based
0.67 f cu
C= amax b
γm
=T Aps f pbbal + Asbal f sbal
0.67 f cu
amax b − Aps f pbbal
γm
Asbal =
f sbal
Beam Design 8 - 13
bal bal  amax  bal bal  amax 

M=
u Aps f pb  d p − 2  + As f s  d s − 2 
   
ing the depth of neutral axis, x.


Asbal.

8 - 14 Beam Design
equate
When M > M ubal , compression reinforcement is required (BS 3.4.4.4). In that
case, SAFE assumes that the depth of neutral axis, x, is equal to xmax. The
bal
values of fpb and fs reach their respective balanced condition values, f pb and

reinforcement is:
= M − M ubal
M us
Mus
A' s = , where (BS 3.4.4.4)
 0.67 fcu 
 f 's −
γ c 
( d − d' )

 amax - d' 
f ′s = Esεc   ≤ 0.87fy
 amax 

en by:
M us
Ascom =
0.87 f y ( d s − d ')
Beam Design 8 - 15


um, i.e., C = T, and performs an iteration to compute the depth of neutral axis,
which is based on stress-strain compatibility for bonded tendons. For unbonded
tendons, the code equations are used to compute the stress, fps in the post-
tensioning steel. After the depth of the neutral axis has been determined, the
stress in the post-tensioning steel, fpb is computed based on strain compatibility.
The ductility of a section is controlled by limiting the x/d ratio (BS 3.4.4.4):
x/d = 0.5 (BS 3.4.4.4)
a = 0.9x (BS 3.4.4.1(b), 4.3.7.3)
The lever arm of the section must not be greater than 0.95 times its effective
depth (BS 3.4.4.1):
z = d − 0.45x ≤ 0.95de (BS 3.4.4.1(e))
 If a ≤ amax (BS 3.4.4.4), the moment capacity of the section, provided by

= (
M u0 Aps f pb d p − 0.45 x )
 If a > amax (BS 3.4.4.4), a failure condition is declared.
8 - 16 Beam Design
controlled case. In that case it is assumed that the depth of neutral axis x is
equal to xmax. The stress in the post-tensioning steel, fpb is then calculated based
defined for the rectangular beam design. However, in this case the width of
the beam is taken as bf. Compression reinforcement is required when x/d >
0.5.
 If a > hf, the calculation for As is given by
0.67 f cu
C= amax Accom
γc
Accom = (
b f h f + bw amax − h f )
bal
=T Aps f pb + Asbal f sbal
0.67 f cu
amax Accom − Aps f pbbal
γm
Asbal =
f sbal
Beam Design 8 - 17

requirements.

ε = 0.0035 0.67 f cu γ m 0.67 f cu γ m

bf hf
d′ f ′s Cs
A′s Cf
x
d
Cw
Aps
ε ps
Tw Tf
As εs Ts
bw
BEAM STRAIN STRESS
Asbal.
8 - 18 Beam Design

equate
When M > M ubal , compression reinforcement is required (BS 3.4.4.4). In that
case SAFE assumes that the depth of the neutral axis, x, is equal to xmax. The
bal
f sbal . The area of compression reinforcement, A′s , is then determined as fol-
lows:

reinforcement is:
= M − M ubal
M us
Mus
A' s = , where (BS 3.4.4.4)
 0.67 fcu 
 f 's −
γ c 
( d − d' )

 a - d' 
f ′s = Esεc  max  ≤ 0.87fy.
 amax 

en by:
M us
Ascom =
0.87 f y ( d s − d ')
compression reinforcement is A's. As is to be placed at the bottom, and A's is to
Beam Design 8 - 19

For bonded tendons, there is no minimum un-tensioned reinforcement required.
For unbounded tendons, the minimum flexural reinforcement provided in a rec-

tangular or flanged beam section is given by the following table, which is taken
from BS Table 3.25 (BS 3.12.5.3) with interpolation for reinforcement of in-
termediate strength:
Minimum percentage
Definition of fy = 250 fy = 460
Section Situation percentage MPa MPa
As
Rectangular  100 0.24 0.13
bh
bw A
< 0.4 100 s 0.32 0.18
T- or L-Beam with bf bw h
web in tension bw As
≥ 0.4 100 0.24 0.13
bf bw h
T-Beam with web in As
 100 0.48 0.26
compression bw h
L-Beam with web in As
 100 0.36 0.20
compression bw h
The minimum flexural compression reinforcement, if it is required at all, is

given by the following table, which is taken from BS Table 3.25 (BS 3.12.5.3),
with interpolation for reinforcement of intermediate strength:
8 - 20 Beam Design
Definition of Minimum
Section Situation percentage percentage
A′
Rectangular  100 s 0.20
bh
A′s
Web in tension 100 0.40
bf hf
T or L-Beam
A′s
Web in compression 100 0.20
bw h

reinforcement is imposed to be 0.04 times the gross cross-sectional area (BS
3.12.6.1).

beam for a particular load combination, the following steps are involved (BS
3.4.5):
 Determine the shear stress, v.
 Determine the shear stress, vc, that can be resisted by the concrete.

with these steps.
8.7.2.1 Determine Shear Stress

In the design of the beam shear reinforcement, the shear forces for a particular
load combination at a particular beam section are obtained by factoring the
associated shear forces for different load cases with the corresponding load
V
v= (BS 3.4.5.2)
bw d
Beam Design 8 - 21
The maximum allowable shear stress, vmax is defined as:
vmax = min(0.8 fcu , 5 MPa) (BS 3.4.5.2)
For light-weight concrete, vmax is defined as:
vmax = min(0.63 fcu , 4 MPa) (BS 8110-2:1985 5.4)

The design ultimate shear resistance of the concrete alone, Vc should be con-
sidered at sections that are as follows:
Uncracked sections in flexure (M < Mo) (BS 4.3.8.3)
Cracked sections in flexural (M ≥ Mo) (BS 4.3.8.3)
where,
M is the design bending moment at the section
Mo is the moment necessary to produce zero stress in the concrete at the

extreme tension fiber; in this calculation, only 0.8 of the stress due to
post-tensioning should be taken into account.
8.7.2.2.1.1 Case 1: Uncracked section in flexure

The ultimate shear resistance of the section, Vco, is computed as follows:
Vco =0.67bv h (f t
2
)
+ 0.8 f cp f t , (BS 4.3.8.4)
where,
ft is the maximum design principal stress (BS 4.3.8.4)
ft =0.24 f cu (BS 4.3.8.4)
fcp = design compressive stress at the centroidal axis due to

post-tensioning, taken as positive. (BS 4.3.8.4)
8 - 22 Beam Design
Vc = Vco + P sin β (BS 4.3.8.4)
8.7.2.2.1.2 Case 2: Cracked section in flexure

The ultimate shear resistance of the section, Vcr, is computed as follows:
 f pe  V
 1 − 0.55
Vcr =  vc bv d + M o , and (BS 4.3.8.5)
 
f pu  M

Vcr ≥ 0.1bv d f cu (BS 4.3.8.5)
Vc = min (Vco , Vcr ) + P sin β (BS 4.3.8.5)

Given v, vc and vmax , the required shear reinforcement is calculated as follows
(BS 4.3.8.7):
 If v ≤ vc + 0.4,
Asv 0.4 bw
= (BS 4.3.8.7)
sv 0.87 f yv
 If (vc + 0.4) < v ≤ vmax,
Asv ( v − vc ) bv
= (BS 4.3.8.7)
sv 0.87 f yv
 If v > vmax, a failure condition is declared. (BS 3.4.5.2)
In the preceding expressions, a limit is imposed on fyv as:
fyv ≤ 500 MPa. (BS 3.4.5.1, 4.3.8.1)
The maximum of all of the calculated Asv /sv values, obtained from each load
load combination.
Beam Design 8 - 23

ments to satisfy spacing and volumetric considerations must be investigated
independently of the program by the user.

station along the length of the beam. The following steps are involved in
designing the longitudinal and shear reinforcement for a particular station due
to the beam torsion:
 Determine the torsional shear stress, vt
 Determine special section properties
 Determine critical torsion stress
 Determine the torsion reinforcement required
Note that references in this section are to BS 8110-2:1985 [BSI 1985].
8.7.3.1 Determine Torsional Shear Stress

tors.
In typical framed construction, specific consideration of torsion is not usually

required where torsional cracking is adequately controlled by shear reinforce-
ment. If the design relies on the torsional resistance of a beam, further consid-
eration should be given using the following algorithms (BS 8110-2:85
3.4.5.13).
The torsional shear stress, vt, for a rectangular section is computed as:
2T
vt = (BS 8110-2:85 2.4.4.1)
2
h
min (hmax − hmin / 3)
8 - 24 Beam Design
For flanged sections, the section is considered as a series of rectangular

segments and the torsional shear stress is computed for each rectangular com-
ponent using the preceding equation, but considering a torsional moment
attributed to that segment, calculated as:
 3
hmin hmax 
Tseg = T   (BS 8110-2:85 2.4.4.2)

 ∑(h 3
h
min max ) 

hmzx = Larger dimension of a rectangular section
hmin = Smaller dimension of a rectangular section
If the computed torsional shear stress, vt, exceeds the following limit for sec-
tions with the larger center-to-center dimension of the closed link less than 550
mm, a failure condition is generated if the torsional shear stress does not satis-
fy:
y1
vt ≤ min(0.8 fcu ,5N/mm 2 ) × (BS 8110-2:85 2.4.5)
550
8.7.3.2 Determine Critical Torsion Stress

The critical torsion stress, vt,min, for which the torsion in the section can be
ignored is calculated as:
(
vt ,min = min 0.067 fcu ,0.4N/mm 2 ) (BS 8110-2:85 2.4.6)
where fcu is the specified concrete compressive strength.
For light-weight concrete, vt,min is defined as:
(
vt ,min = min 0.067 fcu ,0.4N/mm 2 × 0.8 ) (BS 8110-2:85 5.5)

If the factored torsional shear stress, vt is less than the threshold limit, vt,min,
torsion can be safely ignored (BS 8110-2:85 2.4.6). In that case, the program
reports that no torsion reinforcement is required. However, if vt exceeds the
Beam Design 8 - 25
threshold limit, vt,min, it is assumed that the torsional resistance is provided by

closed stirrups and longitudinal bars (BS 8110-2:85 2.4.6).
c b − 2c c bf
c c
ds
h − 2c h h h − 2c
c c
b bw − 2c
bw

 If vt > vt,min, the required closed stirrup area per unit spacing, Asv,t /sv, is calcu-
lated as:
Asv ,t T
= (BS 8110-2:85 2.4.7)
sv 0.8 x1 y1 (0.87 f yv )
Asv ,t f yv ( x1 + y1 )
Al = (BS 8110-2:85 2.4.7)
sv f y
In the preceding expressions, x1 is the smaller center-to-center dimension of

the closed link and y1 is the larger center-to-center dimension of the closed
link.
8 - 26 Beam Design
An upper limit of the combination of v and vt that can be carried by the sec-
(
v + vt ≤ min 0.8 fcu , 5N/mm 2 ) (BS 8110-2:85 2.4.5)
If the combination of shear stress, v and torsional shear stress, vt exceeds this
limit, a failure message is declared. In that case, the concrete section should be
increased in size.
The maximum of all of the calculated Al and Asv,t /sv values obtained from each

based purely on strength considerations. Any minimum stirrup requirements or
longitudinal rebar requirements to satisfy spacing considerations must be
8.8 Slab Design

design is carried out based on the ultimate strength design method (BS 8110-

Slab Design 8 - 27




8 - 28 Slab Design
cordingly.

There are no minimum requirements for untensioned reinforcement in one-way
bonded slabs. One-way spanning floors with unbounded tendons should have
minimum reinforcement requirements in accordance with BS Table 3.25 (BS
3.12.5.3)
In flat slabs, reinforcement is added at the top over supports to be 0.00075

times the gross cross-sectional area. This reinforcement extends 1.5 times the
slab depth on each side of the column. The length of the reinforcement should
be at least 0.2L where L is the span of the slab.
There are no minimum requirements for span zone. However, additional un-
tensioned reinforcement shall be designed to accommodate the full tension
force generated by assumed flexural tensile stresses in the concrete for the fol-
lowing situations (Concrete Society, Technical Report 43):
 all locations in one-way spanning floors using unbonded tendons
 all locations in one-way spanning floors where transfer tensile stress exceeds
0.36 f ci
 support zones in all flat slabs
 span zones in flat slabs using unbonded tendons where the tensile stress
exceeds 0.15 f cu .
The reinforcement should be designed to act at a stress of 5/8fy as follows:
Ft
As =
( ) fy
5/8
where
Slab Design 8 - 29
fct (h − x )b
Ft = −
2
The value of fct will be negative in tension.

reinforcement has been imposed to be 0.04 times the gross cross-sectional area
(BS 3.12.6.1).


The punching shear is checked at the face of the column (BS 3.7.6.4) and at a
critical section at a distance of 1.5d from the face of the support (BS 3.7.7.6).
For rectangular columns and concentrated loads, the critical area is taken as a
rectangular area with the sides parallel to the sides of the columns or the point
loads (BS 3.7.7.1). Figure 8-4 shows the auto punching perimeters considered
by SAFE for the various column shapes. The column location (i.e., interior,
edge, corner) and the punching perimeter may be overwritten using the Punch-
ing Check Overwrites.

The design ultimate shear resistance of the concrete alone Vc should be consid-
ered at sections that are as follows:
Uncracked sections in flexure (M < Mo) (BS 4.3.8.3)
Cracked sections in flexural (M ≥ Mo) (BS 4.3.8.3)
where,
8 - 30 Slab Design
1.5d
1.5d 1.5d
1.5d
1.5d 1.5d

extreme tension fiber; in this calculation only 0.8 of the stress due to

=Vco 0.67bv h (f t
2
)
+ 0.8 fcp ft , (BS 4.3.8.4)
where,
ft is the maximum design principal stress (BS 4.3.8.4)
ft =0.24 f cu (BS 4.3.8.4)
fcp = design compressive stress at the centoidal axis

due to prestress, taken as positive. (BS 4.3.8.4)
Slab Design 8 - 31
V=
c Vco + PSinβ (BS 4.3.8.4)

 f pe  V
 1 − 0.55
Vcr =  vc bv d + M o , and (BS 4.3.8.5)
 f pu  M

Vcr ≥ 0.1bv d f cu (BS 4.3.8.5)
Vc = min (Vco , Vcr ) + P sin β (BS 4.3.8.5)

Given the punching shear force and the fractions of moments transferred by
eccentricity of shear about the two axes, the nominal design shear stress, v, is
calculated as:
Veff
v= , where (BS 3.7.7.3)
ud
 My M 
Veff = V  f + 1.5 + 1.5 x  , (BS 3.7.6.2, 3.7.6.3)
 V x V y 
u is the perimeter of the critical section
x and y are the length of the side of the critical section parallel to the ax-
is of bending
Mx and My are the design moments transmitted from the slab to the col-
umn at the connection
V is the total punching shear force
f is a factor to consider the eccentricity of punching shear force and is

taken as:
8 - 32 Slab Design
1.00 for interior columns


f = 1.25 for edge columns, and (BS 3.7.6.2 and BS 3.7.6.3)
1.25 for corner columns

The ratio of the maximum shear stress and the concrete punching shear stress
capacity is reported as the punching shear capacity ratio by SAFE.

that the effective depth of the slab is greater than or equal to 200 mm (BS
3.7.7.5). If the slab thickness does not meet these requirements, the punching
shear reinforcement is not designed, and the slab thickness should be increased
by the user.
Punching Shear as described in the earlier sections remains unchanged. The
design of punching shear reinforcement is carried out as described in the sub-
sections that follow.


The shear stress is limited to a maximum limit of
vmax = 2 vc (BS 3.7.7.5)
Given v, vc and vmax, the required shear reinforcement is calculated as follows

(BS 3.7.7.5).
 If v ≤ 1.6vc
Slab Design 8 - 33
Av ( v − vc ) ud 0.4ud
= ≥ , (BS 3.7.7.5)
s 0.87 f yv 0.87 f yv
 If 1.6vc ≤ v < 2.0vc
Av 5 ( 0.7v − vc ) ud 0.4ud
= ≥ , (BS 3.7.7.5)
s 0.87 f yv 0.87 f yv
 If v > vmax, a failure condition is declared. (BS 3.7.7.5)
If v exceeds the maximum permitted value of vmax, the concrete section should
be increased in size.

columns.

edge
d 2 d 2 Iy
gy
gx
s0 s0 s0
Iy x x gx
Iy
Critical d 2
section
centroid Free
edge y x
y
centroid
Ix
Ix
Figure 8-5 Typical arrangement of shear studs and

critical sections outside shear-reinforced zone
8 - 34 Slab Design
The distance between column face and the first line of shear reinforcement
first line of shear reinforcement shall not exceed 1.5d measured in a direction
parallel to the column face (BS 11.12.3.3).

lines of shear reinforcement is 4, 6, and 8 for corner, edge, and interior col-
umns respectively.

not be less than the minimum cover specified in BS 3.3 plus half of the diame-
ter of the flexural reinforcement.
Punching shear reinforcement in the form of shear studs is generally available

in 10-, 12-, 14-, 16-, and 20-millimeter diameters.
between adjacent shear studs, g, at the first peripheral line of studs shall not
exceed 1.5d. The limit of so and the spacing, s, between the peripheral lines are
specified as:
so ≤ 0.5d (BS 3.7.7.6)
s ≤ 0.75d (BS 3.7.7.6)
g ≤ 1.5d (BS 3.7.7.6)
Slab Design 8 - 35
Chapter 9
Design for CSA A23.3-04
crete design procedure that is used by SAFE when the user selects the Canadi-
an code CSA A23.3-04 [CSA 2004]. Various notations used in this chapter are
listed in Table 9-1. For referencing to the pertinent sections of the CSA code in
this chapter, a prefix “CSA” followed by the section number is used.

based on Newton-millimeter-second units. For simplicity, all equations and
descriptions presented in this chapter correspond to Newton-millimeter-second
9.1 Notations
Table 9-1 List of Symbols Used in the CSA A23.3-04 Code

Ap Area of tension prestressing tendons, mm2
Notations 9-1

As(required) Area of steel required for tension reinforcement, mm2
Av Area of shear reinforcement, mm2
Av / s Area of shear reinforcement per unit length of the member,

mm2/mm
Avs Area of headed shear reinforcement, mm2
Avs / s Area of headed shear reinforcement per unit length of the

member, mm2/mm
bf Effective width of flange (T-beam section), mm
bw Width of web (T-beam section), mm
b0 Perimeter of the punching critical section, mm
b1 Width of the punching critical section in the direction of bend-

ing, mm
b2 Width of the punching critical section perpendicular to the

direction of bending, mm
d Distance from compression face to tension reinforcement, mm
d' Concrete cover to center of reinforcing, mm
dp Distance from compression face to prestressing tendons, mm
ds Thickness of slab, mm
9-2 Notations
Chapter 9 - Design for CSA A23.3-04

dv Effective shear depth, mm
Ep Modulus of elasticity of prestressing tendons, MPa
Es Modulus of elasticity of reinforcement, assumed as 2×105 MPa
f ci' Specified compressive strength of concrete at time of prestress

transfer, MPa
f c' Specified compressive strength of concrete, MPa
fy Specified yield strength of flexural reinforcement, MPa
fyh Specified yield strength of shear reinforcement, MPa
fyv Specified yield strength of headed shear reinforcement, MPa
h Overall depth of a section, mm
Ig Moment of inertia of gross concrete section about centroidal

axis, neglecting reinforcement.
Mf Factored moment at section, N-mm
φMr0 Design moment resistance of a section with tendons only, N-

mm
φMrbal Design moment resistance of a section with tendons and the

necessary mild reinforcement to reach the balanced condition,
N-mm
s Spacing of the shear reinforcement along the length of the

beam, mm
Vc Shear resisted by concrete, N
Vr,max Maximum permitted total factored shear force at a section, N
Notations 9 - 3

Vf Factored shear force at a section, N
Vs Shear force at a section resisted by steel, N
α1 Ratio of average stress in rectangular stress block to the speci-

fied concrete strength
β1 Factor for obtaining depth of compression block in concrete
βc Ratio of the maximum to the minimum dimensions of the

εcu Maximum strain in concrete at ultimate
εp Strain in prestressing tendons
εs Strain in reinforcing steel
ϕc Resistance factor for concrete
ϕp Resistance factor for prestressing tendons
ϕs Resistance factor for steel
γf Fraction of unbalanced moment transferred by flexure
γv Fraction of unbalanced moment transferred by eccentricity of

shear
λ Shear strength factor

for which the structure needs to be designed. For CSA A23.3-04, if a structure
is subjected to dead (D), live (L), pattern live (PL), snow (S), wind (W), and
earthquake (E) loads, and considering that wind and earthquake forces are

reversible, the load combinations in the following sections may need to be con-
sidered (CSA 8.3.2, Table C.1).
For post-tensioned concrete design, the user also can specify the prestressing
load (PT) by providing the tendon profile or by using the load balancing
options in the program. The default load combinations for post-tensioning are
defined in the following sections.

fer of prestress forces, in accordance with CSA 18.3.1. The prestressing forces
are considered without any long-term loses for the initial service load combina-
tion check.
1.0D + 1.0PT
9.2.2 Service Load Combinations

prestress for serviceability in accordance with CSA 18.3.2. It is assumed that
1.0D + 1.0PT
1.0D + 1.0L + 1.0PT

prestress in accordance with CSA 18.3.2(a). The permanent load for this load
combination is taken as 50 percent of the live load. It is assumed that all long
term losses have already occurred at the service stage.
1.0D + 1.0PT
1.0D + 0.5L + 1.0PT


prestress for strength in accordance with CSA A23.3-04, Chapters 8 and 18.
ary) forces are determined automatically by SAFE by subtracting the primary
PT moments when the flexural design is carried out.
1.4D + 1.0PT* (CSA 8.3.2,Table C.1, Case 1)
1.25D + 1.5L + 1.0PT*

1.25D + 1.5L + 1.0PT* ± 0.4W
1.25D + 1.5L + 1.0PT* + 0.5S (CSA 8.3.2,Table C.1, Case 2)
0.9D + 1.5L + 1.0PT*
0.9D + 1.5L + 1.0PT* ± 0.4W
0.9D + 1.5L + 1.0PT* + 0.5S
1.25D + 1.5(0.75 PL) + 1.0PT* (CSA 13.8.4.3)
1.25D + 1.5S + 1.0PT*

1.25D + 1.5S + 1.0PT* + 0.5L
1.25D + 1.5S + 1.0PT* ± 0.4W (CSA 8.3.2,Table C.1, Case 3)
0.9D + 1.5S + 1.0PT*
0.9D + 1.5S + 1.0PT* + 0.5L
0.9D + 1.5S + 1.0PT* ± 0.4W
1.25D ± 1.4W + 1.0PT*
1.25D ± 1.4W + 1.0PT* + 0.5L
1.25D ± 1.4W + 1.0PT* + 0.5S (CSA 8.3.2,Table C.1, Case 4)
0.9D ± 1.4W + 1.0PT*
0.9D ± 1.4W + 1.0PT* + 0.5L
0.9D ± 1.4W + 1.0PT* + 0.5S
1.0D ± 1.0E + 1.0PT*
1.0D ± 1.0E + 0.5L + 1.0PT* (CSA 8.3.2,Table C.1, Case 5)
1.0D ± 1.0E + 0.25S + 1.0PT*
1.0D + 0.5L + 0.25S ± 1.0E + 1.0PT*
*

These are also the default design combinations in SAFE whenever the CSA
A23.3-04 code is used. The user should use other appropriate load combina-
tions if roof live load is treated separately, or if other types of loads are present.

The upper and lower limits of f'c are 80 MPa and 20 MPa respectively. The
upper limit of fy is 500 MPa for non-prestressed reinforcement (CSA 8.6.1.1).
For compression reinforcement with fy exceeding 400 MPa, the value of fy

assumed in design calculations shall not exceed the stress corresponding to a
strain of 0.0035 (CSA 8.5.21).
are taken as the upper limits if they are defined in the material properties as
being greater than the limits. The user is responsible for ensuring that the min-
imum strength is satisfied.
SAFE also checks the following tensile strength limits in prestressing steel
(CSA 18.4). The permissible tensile stresses in all types of prestressing steel, in
terms of the specified minimum tensile strength fpu, are summarized as follows:
 Due to tendon jacking force for post-tensioning tendons:
0.85 fpu ≤ 0.94 fpy
 Due to tendon jacking force for pretensioning tendons:
0.80 fpu
 Immediately after prestress transfer:
0.82 fpy ≤0.74 fpu
 Post-tensioning tendons, at anchorages and couplers, immediately after ten-

don anchorage:
0.70 fpu

The specified yield strength of prestressing tendons is based on the require-

ments specified in ASTM A 416/A 416 M, ASTM A 421/A421 M, and ASTM
A 722/A 722 m, which specify the following minimum values for fpy:
 low-relaxation wire and strands fpy = 0.90 fpu
 stress-relieved wire and strands, and plain bars fpy = 0.85 fpu
 deformed bar fpy = 0.80 fpu

The strength reduction factors, φ, are material dependent and defined as:
φc = 0.65 for concrete (CSA 8.4.2)
φs = 0.85 for reinforcement (CSA 8.4.3a)
φp = 0.90 for post-tensioning tendons (CSA 8.4.3a)
The preceding values for φc, φs, and φp are the default values. These values can
be modified in the design preferences. For structural concrete manufactured in
prequalified manufacturing plants, φc can be taken as 0.7 (CSA 8.4.2, 16.1.3).

based on assumptions given in CSA 10.1.
portional to the distance from the neutral axis, except for unbonded tendons
(CSA 10.1.2).
be assumed equal to 0.0035 (CSA 10.1.3).
 The balanced strain condition shall exist at a cross-section when tension rein-
forcement reaches its yield strain just as the concrete in compression reaches
its maximum strain of 0.0035 (CSA 10.1.4).
9-8 Strength Reduction Factors

 The tensile strength of concrete shall be neglected in the calculation of the

factored flexural resistance of prestressed concrete members (CSA 10.1.5).
lar concrete stress distribution (CSA 10.1.7).
 The concrete stress of α cϕc f c' shall be assumed uniformly distributed over an
fiber of maximum compressive strain (CSA 10.1.7(a)).
 The distance from the fiber of maximum strain to the neutral axis, c, shall be
measured in a direction perpendicular to the neutral axis (CSA 10.1.7.(b)).
 The factors α1 and β1 shall be taken as follows (CSA 10.1.7.(c)).
– α1 = 0.85 – 0.0015 f c' ≥ 0.67
– β1 = 0.97 – 0.0025 f c' ≥ 0.67

(CSA 18.3):

The stress in the concrete immediately after prestress force transfer (before
time dependent prestress losses) are checked against the following limits (CSA
18.3.1.1(a), 18.3.1.1(b) and 18.3.1.1(c)):
 Extreme fiber stress in compression:

0.60 f ci'
 Extreme fiber stress in tension, except as permitted in the subsequent item:
0.25λ f ci'
 Extreme fiber stress in tension at ends of simply supported members:
0.5λ f ci'

The stresses in prestressed concrete flexural members at service loads, and af-
ter all prestress losses occur, are checked against the following limits (CSA
18.3.2):
0.60 f c'

loads:
0.5λ f c'

loads, exposed to corrosive environment:
0.25λ f c'
9.6.3 Serviceability Check at Long-Term Service Load

The stresses in prestressed concrete flexural members at long-term service
loads, and after all prestress losses have occurred, are checked against the same
limits as for the normal service load, except for the following (CSA 18.3.2):

Extreme fiber stress in compression due to prestress plus sustained load:
0.45 f c'
9.7 Beam Design


 Determine required flexural reinforcement if required

In the design of flexural reinforcement of post-tensioned beams, the factored
moments for each load combination at a particular beam station are obtained by
Beam Design 9 - 11
factoring the corresponding moments for different load cases, with the corre-
sponding load factors.
beam may be designed as a rectangular or flanged beam. Negative beam mo-
ments can be used to calculate top reinforcement. In such cases the beam may
be designed as a rectangular or inverted flanged beam.

the concrete.

shown in Figure 9-1 (CSA 10.1.7). Furthermore it is assumed that the compres-
sion carried by the concrete is less than or equal to that which can be carried at
the balanced condition (CSA 10.1.4). When the applied moment exceeds the
moment capacity at this design condition, the area of compression reinforce-
ment is calculated on the assumption that the additional moment will be carried
by compression and additional tension reinforcement.
(L- and T-beams) is summarized in the subsections that follow. It is assumed
that the design ultimate axial force in a beam is negligible; hence all the beams
are designed for major direction flexure, shear, and torsion only.

SAFE first determines whether the moment capacity provided by the post-
tensioning tendons alone is enough. In calculating the capacity, it is assumed
that As = 0. In that case, moment capacity φ M n0 is determined as follows:
9 - 12 Beam Design
ε = 0.0035 α1 f ′cφc
b
A′s Cs
c a = β1c
d′
dp
ds
Ap
εp
Tc
εs Ts
As
(I) BEAM (II) STRAIN (II) STRESS
The maximum depth of the compression zone, cmax, is calculated based on

strain-stress compatibility (CSA 18.6.1):
 εcu 
cmax = 
 εcu + ε p  E p d p (CSA 18.6.1)
 
where,
εcu = 0.0035 (CSA 10.1.4)
Therefore, the limits c ≤ cmax is set for tension-controlled sections.
The ductility of a section is ensured by limiting the c/d ratio and strength
reduction factor φ. The minimum ductility required by the CSA code is limited
as c/dp ≤ 0.5 (CSA 18.6.2).

given by:
Beam Design 9 - 13
amax =β1cmax (CSA 10.1.7(a))
β1 = 0.97 – 0.0025 f c' ≥ 0.67 (CSA 10.1.7)
stress in the post-tensioning steel, fpr is computed based on strain compatibility.
On the basis of the calculated fpr, the depth of the neutral axis is recalculated,
and fpr is further updated. After this iteration process has converged, the depth
of the rectangular compression block is determined as follows:
a = β1c
 If c ≤ cmax (CSA 18.6.2), the moment capacity of the section, provided by

 a
=φ M r0 φ Aps f pr  d p − 
 2
 If c > cmax (CSA 18.6.2), a failure condition is declared.
 If M f > φ Mr0 , SAFE calculates the moment capacity and the As required at
sion controlled case. In that case, it is assumed that the depth of the neutral
axis c is equal to cmax. The stress in the post-tensioning steel, fpr is then calcu-
lated based on strain compatibility and the area of required tension rein-
forcement, As, is determined by imposing force equilibrium, i.e., C = T.
C = α1 fc'φc amax b
=T Ap f prbal + Asbal fsbal
α1 fc'φc amax b − Ap f prbal

Asbal =
fsbal
9 - 14 Beam Design
bal  amax  bal bal  amax 

φM
= r φ Ap f prbal  d p −  + φ As fs  ds − 2 
 2   

( )
When M f < φ Mr0 , the amount of post-tensioning steel is adequate to resist
the design moment Mf. Minimum reinforcement is provided to satisfy the duc-
(
tility requirements (CSA 18.3.13, 18.7 and 18.8), i.e., M f < φ Mr0 . )

resist Mf, and therefore the required area of tension reinforcement is computed
When φ Mr0 < M f < φ Mrbal , SAFE determines the required area of tension rein-
forcement, As, iteratively to satisfy the design moment Mf and reports the
required area of tension reinforcement. Since Mf is bounded by φ Mr0 at the
lower end and φ Mrbal at the upper end, and φ Mr0 is associated with As = 0
and φ Mrbal is associated with As = Asbal , the required area will be within the
range of 0 to As .
The tension reinforcement is to be placed at the bottom if Mf is positive or at

the top if Mf is negative.
Beam Design 9 - 15
9.7.1.2.1.3 Case 3: Post-tensioning steel and tension reinforcement is

not adequate
( )
When M f > φ Mrbal , compression reinforcement is required (CSA 18.6.2). In
that case, SAFE assumes that the depth of the neutral axis, c, is equal to cmax .
The values of fpr and fs reach their respective balanced condition values, f prbal
and fsbal . The area of compression reinforcement, A′s , is determined as fol-
lows:

reinforcement is:
M=
rs M f − φ Mrbal
Mrs
A′s = , where
(φs f ′s − φcα1 f ′c )( ds − d ′)
 c - d' 
f ′s = 0.0035Es   ≤ fy (CSA 10.1.2, 10.1.3)
 c 

en by:
M rs
Ascom =
f y (d − d ')φ s
be placed at the top if Mf is positive, and vice versa if Mf is negative.
9 - 16 Beam Design

In designing for a factored negative moment, Mf (i.e., designing top reinforce-
ment), the calculation of the reinforcement area is exactly the same
as described previously, i.e., no flanged beam data is used.
ε = 0.0035 α1 f ′cφc α1 f ′cφc

bf hs
d′ f ′s Cs
A′s Ct
c
dp
ds
Cw
Ap
εp
Tw Tf
As εs Ts
bw
BEAM STRAIN STRESS

The maximum depth of the compression zone, cmax, is calculated based on

strain-stress compatibility (CSA 18.6.1):
 εcu 
cmax = 
 εcu + ε p  E p d p (CSA 18.6.1)
 
where,
Beam Design 9 - 17
εcu = 0.0035 (CSA 10.1.4)
Therefore, the limits c ≤ cmax is set for tension-controlled sections.
The ductility of a section is ensured by limiting the c/d ratio and strength re-
duction factor φ. The minimum ductility required by the CSA code is limited to
c/dp ≤ 0.5 (CSA 18.6.2).

given by:
amax =β1cmax (CSA 10.1.7(a))
β1 = 0.97 – 0.0025 f c' ≥ 0.67 (CSA 10.1.7)
stress in the post-tensioning steel, fpr is computed based on strain compatibility.
Based on the calculated fpr, the depth of the neutral axis is recalculated, and fpr
a = β1c
 If c ≤ cmax (CSA 18.6.2), the moment capacity of the section, provided by

 a
=φ Mr0 φ Aps f pr  d p − 
 2 
 If c > cmax (CSA 18.6.2), a failure condition is declared.
 If M f > φ Mr0 , SAFE calculates the moment capacity and the As required at
sion controlled case. In that case, it is assumed that the depth of neutral axis c
is equal to cmax. The stress in the post-tensioning steel, fpr is then calculated
9 - 18 Beam Design
based on strain compatibility and the area of required tension reinforcement,

As, is determined by imposing force equilibrium, i.e., C = T.
 If a ≤ hs, the subsequent calculations for As are exactly the same as previously
the beam is taken as bf. Compression reinforcement is required when a >
amax.
 If a > hs, the calculation for As is given by:
C = α1 fc′φc amax Accom
b f ds + bw ( amax − ds )
Accom =
=T Ap f prbal + Asbal fsbal
α1 fc′φc amax Accom − Ap f prbal

Asbal =
fsbal
bal  amax   a 
φM
= r φ Ap f prbal  d p −  + φ Asbal fsbal  ds − max 
 2   2 
reinforcing steel, fs, is determined from the elastic-perfectly plastic stress-strain
Beam Design 9 - 19

(
When M f < φ Mr0 ) the amount of post-tensioning steel is adequate to resist
the design moment Mf. Minimum reinforcement is provided to satisfy ductility
(
requirements (CSA 18.3.13, 18.7 and 18.8), i.e., M f < φ Mr0 . )

resist Mf, and therefore the required area of tension reinforcement is computed
When φ Mr0 < M f < φ Mrbal , SAFE determines the required area of tension rein-
forcement, As, iteratively to satisfy the design moment Mf and reports this re-
quired area of tension reinforcement. Since Mf is bounded by φ Mr0 at the lower
end and φ Mrbal at the upper end, and φ Mr0 is associated with As = 0 and
φ Mrbal is associated with As = Asbal , the required area will be within the range
of 0 to As .
The tension reinforcement is to be placed at the bottom if Mf is positive, or at

the top if Mf is negative.
9.7.1.2.2.5 Case 3: Post-tensioning steel and tension reinforcement is

not adequate
( )
When M f > φ Mrbal , compression reinforcement is required (CSA 18.6.2). In
that case, SAFE assumes that the depth of the neutral axis, c, is equal to cmax .
The values of fpr and fs reach their respective balanced condition values, f prbal
and fsbal . Then the area of compression reinforcement, A′s , is determined as
follows:

reinforcement is:
M=
rs M f − φ Mrbal
9 - 20 Beam Design
Mrs
A′s = , where
(φs f ′s − φcα1 f ′c )( ds − d ' )
 c − d' 
f ′s = 0.0035Es   ≤ f y. (CSA 10.1.2, 10.1.3)
 c 

en by:
M rs
Ascom =
f y (d − d ')φ s
be placed at the top if Mf is positive, and vice versa if Mf is negative.

en by the limits specified in CSA 18.8.2, Table 18.1.

As ≤ 
A′s ≤ 

ular beam, for a particular load combination at a particular station due to the
beam major shear, the following steps are involved:
Beam Design 9 - 21
 Determine the factored forces acting on the section, Mf and vf. Note that Mf is
needed for the calculation of vc.
 Determine the shear stress, vc that can be resisted by the concrete.
these steps.

In the design of the beam shear reinforcement of a concrete beam, the shear
forces for a particular load combination at a particular beam section are
obtained by factoring the associated shear forces and moments with the cor-
responding load combination factors.

Vc = φc λβ f ′c bw dv (CSA 11.3.4)
where,
f ′c ≤ 8 MPa (CSA 11.3.4)
φc is the resistance factor for concrete. By default it is taken as 0.65 (CSA

8.4.2). For concrete produced in a pre-qualified manufacturing plant, the
value can be taken as 0.70 (CSA 16.1.3). This value can be overwritten
in the design preferences.
λ is the strength reduction factor to account for low density concrete (CSA
2.2). For normal density concrete, its value is 1 (CSA 8.6.5), which is
taken by the program as the default value. For concrete using lower den-
sity aggregate, the user can change the value of λ in the material proper-
ty data. The recommended value for λ is as follows (CSA 8.6.5).
9 - 22 Beam Design
1.00, for normal density concrete,


0.85, for semi-low-density concrete
λ= in which all of the fine aggregate is natural sand,
0.75, for semi-low-density concrete

 in which none of the fine aggregate is natural sand.
β is the factor for accounting for the shear resistance of cracked concrete
(CSA 2.2). Its value is normally between 0.1 and 0.4. It is determined
according to CSA 11.3.6 and described further in the following sections.
bw is the effective web width. For rectangular beams, it is the width of the
beam. For flanged beams, it is the width of the web of the beam.
dv is the effective shear depth. It is taken as the greater of 0.9d or 0.72h

(CSA 2.3), where d is the distance from the extreme compression fiber to
the centroid of tension reinforcement, and h is the overall depth of the
cross-section in the direction of the shear force.
The value of β is preferably taken as the special value (CSA 11.3.6.2), or it is

determined using the simplified method (CSA 11.3.6.3), if applicable. When
the conditions of the special value or simplified method do not apply, the
general method is used (CSA 11.3.6.4).
If the overall beam depth, h, is less than 250 mm or if the beam depth of a
flanged beam below the slab is not greater than one-half of the width of the
web or 350 mm, β is taken as 0.21 (CSA 11.3.6.2).
β = 0.21 (CSA 11.3.6.2)
When the specified yield strength of the longitudinal reinforcing fy does not
exceed 400 MPa, and the specified concrete strength f ′c does not exceed 60
MPa, β is determined in accordance with the simplified method, as follows
(CSA 11.6.3.3):
 When the section contains at least the minimum transverse reinforcement, β

is taken as 0.18 (CSA 11.3.6.3a).
β = 0.18 (CSA 11.3.6.3.a)
Beam Design 9 - 23
When the section contains no transverse reinforcement, β is determined based

on the specified maximum nominal size of coarse aggregate, ag .
For maximum size of coarse aggregate not less than 20 mm, β is taken as:
230
β= (CSA 11.3.6.3 b)
1000 + dv
where dv is the effective shear depth expressed in millimeters, which is

described in preceding sections.
For a maximum size of coarse aggregate less than 20 mm, β is taken as:
230
β= (CSA 11.3.6.3 c)
1000 + sze
35
where,
= Sze Sz ≥ 0.85Sz (CSA 11.3.6.3.c)
15 + ag
In the preceding expression, the crack spacing parameter, sze, shall be taken as
the minimum of dv and the maximum distance between layers of distributed
longitudinal reinforcement. However, sze is conservatively taken as equal to dv.
In summary, for simplified cases, β can be expressed as follows:


 0.18, if minimum transverse reinforcement is provided,
 230
β  , if no transverse reinforcement is provided, and ag ≥ 20mm,
1000 + dv
 230
 , if no transverse reinforcement is provided, and ag < 20mm.
1000 + Sze
 When the specified yield strength of the longitudinal reinforcing fy is greater

than 400 MPa, the specified concrete strength f' c is greater than 60 MPa, or
tension is not negligible, β is determined in accordance with the general
method as follows (CSA 11.3.6.1, 11.3.6.4):
9 - 24 Beam Design
0.40 1300
=β • (CSA 11.3.6.4)
(1 + 1500ε x ) (1000 + S ze )
In the preceding expression, the equivalent crack spacing parameter, sze is taken
equal to 300 mm if minimum transverse reinforcement is provided (CSA
11.3.6.4). Otherwise it is determined as stated in the simplified method.
300 if minimum transverse reinforcement is provided,


Sze =  35
S ≥ 0.85Sz otherwise.
15 + a z
 g
(CSA 11.3.6.3, 11.3.6.4)
The value of ag in the preceding equations is taken as the maximum aggregate

size for f ' c of 60 MPa, is taken as zero for f ' c of 70 MPa, and is linearly inter-
polated between these values (CSA 11.3.6.4).
The longitudinal strain, εx at mid-depth of the cross-section is computed from

the following equation:
M f d v + V f + 0.5 N f
εx = (CSA 11.3.6.4)
2(E s As )
In evaluating εx the following conditions apply:
 εx is positive for tensile action.
 Vf and Mf are taken as positive quantities. (CSA 11.3.6.4(a))
 Mf is taken as a minimum of Vfdv. (CSA 11.3.6.4(a))
 Nf is taken as positive for tension. (CSA 2.3)
As is taken as the total area of longitudinal reinforcement in the beam. It is tak-

en as the envelope of the reinforcement required for all design load combina-
tions. The actual provided reinforcement might be slightly higher than this
quantity. The reinforcement should be developed to achieve full strength (CSA
11.3.6.3(b)).
Beam Design 9 - 25
If the value of εx is negative, it is recalculated with the following equation, in

which Act is the area of concrete in the flexural tensile side of the beam, taken
as half of the total area.
M f d v + V f + 0.5 N f
εx = (CSA 11.3.6.4(c))
2(E s As + Ec Act )
Es = 200, 000 MPa (CSA 8.5.4.1)
Ec = 4500 f c' MPa (CSA 8.6.2.3)
If the axial tension is large enough to induce tensile stress in the section, the
value of εx is doubled (CSA 11.3.6.4(e)).
For sections closer than dv from the face of the support, εx is calculated based
on Mf and Vf of a section at a distance dv from the face of the support (CSA
11.3.6.4(d)). This condition currently is not checked by SAFE.
An upper limit on εx is imposed as:
ε x ≤ 0.003 (CSA 11.3.6.4(f))
In both the simplified and general methods, the shear strength of the section
due to concrete, vc , depends on whether the minimum transverse reinforcement
is provided. To check this condition, the program performs the design in two
passes. In the first pass, it is assumes that no transverse shear reinforcement is
needed. When the program determines that shear reinforcement is needed, the
program performs the second pass assuming that at least minimum shear rein-
forcement is provided.

The shear force is limited to Vr ,max where:
Vr ,max = 0.25φc f 'c bw d (CSA 11.3.3)
Given Vf, Vc, and Vr,max, the required shear reinforcement is calculated as fol-
lows:
9 - 26 Beam Design
 If V f ≤ Vc
Av
=0 (CSA 11.3.5.1)
s
 If Vc < V f ≤ Vr ,max
Av (V f − Vc ) tan θ
= (CSA 11.3.3, 11.3.5.1)
s φ s f yt d v
 If V f > Vr ,max , (CSA 11.3.3)
a failure condition is declared.
A minimum area of shear reinforcement is provided in the following regions

(CSA 11.2.8.1):
(a) in regions of flexural members where the factored shear force V f ex-
ceeds Vc
(b) in regions of beams with an overall depth greater than 750 mm
(c) in regions of beams where the factored torsion T f exceeds 0.25Tcr
Where the minimum shear reinforcement is required by CSA 11.2.8.1, or by

calculations, the minimum area of shear reinforcement per unit spacing is taken
as:
Av f′
≥ 0.06 c bw (CSA 11.2.8.2)
s fy
In the preceding equations, the term θ is used where θ is the angle of inclina-
tion of the diagonal compressive stresses with respect to the longitudinal axis
of the member. The θ value is normally between 22 and 44 degrees. It is de-
termined according to CSA 11.3.6.
Similar to the β factor, which was described previously, the value of θ is pref-
erably taken as the special value (CSA 11.3.6.2) or it is determined using the
Beam Design 9 - 27
simplified method (CSA 11.3.6.3), whenever applicable. The program uses the
general method when conditions for the simplified method are not satisfied
(CSA 11.3.6.4).
 If the overall beam depth, h, is less than 250 mm or if the depth of the
flanged beam below the slab is not greater than one-half of the width of the
web or 350 mm, θ is taken as 42 degrees (CSA 11.3.6.2).
 If the specified yield strength of the longitudinal reinforcing fy does not ex-
ceed 400 MPa, or the specified concrete strength f'c does not exceed 60 MPa,
θ is taken to be 35 degree (CSA 11.3.6.3).
θ = 35o for Pf ≤ 0 or f y ≤ 400 MPa or f' c ≤ 60 MPa (CSA11.3.6.3)
 If the axial force is tensile, the specified yield strength of the longitudinal re-
inforcing fy > 400 MPa, and the specified concrete strength f' c > 60 MPa, θ is
determined using the general method as follows (CSA 11.3.6.4),
θ= 29 + 7000ε x for Pf < 0 , f y > 400 MPa, f' c ≤ 60 MPa (CSA11.3.6.4)
where ε x is the longitudinal strain at the mid-depth of the cross-section for the
factored load. The calculation procedure has been described in preceding sec-
tions.
The maximum of all of the calculated Av s values, obtained from each load
load combination.
The beam shear reinforcement requirements reported by the program are based
purely on shear strength considerations. Any minimum stirrup requirements to
satisfy spacing and volumetric requirements must be investigated independent-
ly of the program by the user.

9 - 28 Beam Design
 Determine the factored torsion, Tf
 Determine critical torsion capacity

tors.

member can occur because of redistribution of internal forces upon cracking,
the design Tf is permitted to be reduced in accordance with the code (CSA
11.2.9.2). However, the program does not automatically redistribute the inter-
nal forces and reduce Tf. If redistribution is desired, the user should release the
torsional degree of freedom (DOF) in the structural model.

For torsion design, special section properties, such as Ac, Aoh, Ao, pc, and ph are
calculated. These properties are described in the following (CSA 2.3).
Ac = Area enclosed by outside perimeter of concrete cross-section

pc = Outside perimeter of concrete cross-section

al reinforcement

Beam Design 9 - 29
closed stirrup and the outermost concrete surface is 50 millimeters. This is

equivalent to a 38-mm clear cover and a 12-mm stirrup. For torsion design of
reinforcement calculation. However, the flange is considered during Tcr calcu-
tion are given as follows:
Ac = bh (CSA 11.2.9.1)
Aoh = (b − 2c)(h − 2c) (CSA 11.3.10.3)
Ao = 0.85 Aoh (CSA 11.3.10.3)
pc = 2b + 2h (CSA 11.2.9.1)
ph = 2(b − 2c) + 2(h − 2c) (CSA 11.3.10.4)
the special section properties for a flanged beam section are given as follows:
Ac = bwh + (bf – bw)hs (CSA 11.2.9.1)
Aoh = (bw – 2c)(h – 2c) (CSA 11.3.10.3)
Ao = 0.85 Aoh (CSA 11.3.10.3)
pc = 2bf + 2h (CSA 11.2.9.1)
ph = 2(h – 2c) + 2(bw – 2c) (CSA 11.3.10.4)
in Figure 9-3. Note that the flange width on either side of the beam web is lim-
ited to the smaller of 6hs or 1/12 the span length (CSA 10.3.4).
9 - 30 Beam Design
c bb − 22c
c c bef
c c
hdss
c c
b bw − 2c
bbww


The critical torsion capacity, Tcr, for which the torsion in the section can be
 Ac2 
0.38λφc f 'c  
Tcr =  pc  (CSA 11.2.9.1)
4
where Acp and pc are the area and perimeter of the concrete cross-section as
described in the previous section; λ is a factor to account for low-density con-
crete; φc is the strength reduction factor for concrete, which is equal to 0.65;
and f' c is the specified concrete compressive strength.

If the factored torsion Tf is less than the threshold limit, Tcr, torsion can be safe-
ly ignored (CSA 11.2.9.1). In that case, the program reports that no torsion re-
inforcement is required. However, if Tf exceeds the threshold limit, Tcr, it is as-
Beam Design 9 - 31
nal bars (CSA 11.3).
 If Tf > Tcr, the required closed stirrup area per unit spacing, At /s, is calculated
as:
At T f tan θ
= (CSA 11.3.10.3)
s φs 2 Ao f yt
2
Mf  0.45 phT f 
+ 0.5 N f + (V f − 0.5Vs )
2
+   cot θ
dv  2 Ao 
Al =
φs f y
(CSA 11.3.10.6, 11.3.9)
In the preceding expressions, θ is computed as previously described for

shear, except that if the general method is being used, the value εx is calculat-
ed as specified in CSA 11.3.6.4 is replaced by:
2
Mf  0.9 phT f 
2
+ Vf +   + 0.5 N f
dv  2 Ao 
εx = (CSA 11.3.10.5)
2 ( Es As )
2 2
 Vf   T f ph 
  +  2 
 ≤ 0.25φc f 'c (CSA 11.3.10.4(b))
 bw d v   1.7 Aoh 
For rectangular sections, bw is replaced with b. If the combination of Vf and Tf

9 - 32 Beam Design
When torsional reinforcement is required (Tf > Tcr), the area of transverse
limit.
 Av A  b
 + 2 t  ≥ 0.06 f 'c w (CSA 11.2.8.2)
 s s  f yt
is increased to satisfy this condition.

9.8 Slab Design

design is carried out based on the ultimate strength design method (CSA A
23.3-04) for prestressed reinforced concrete as described in the following sec-

Slab Design 9 - 33
These two steps are described in the subsections that follow and are repeated
controlling load combination numbers, is obtained and reported.


cordingly.

If the computed tensile stress in the concrete immediately after prestress trans-
fer exceeds 0.25λ f ′ci (CSA 18.3.1.1), the bonded reinforcement with a min-
9 - 34 Slab Design
imum area of As is provided in the tensile zone to resist the total tensile force,
Nc, in the concrete computed on the basis of an uncracked section (CSA
18.3.1.3).
As = N c /(0.5 f y ) (CSA 18.3.1.3)

slab is given by the following limit (CSA 18.8.1, 18.8.2):
Concrete stress (see Clause 18.3.2(c))

Tensile stress Tensile stress
≤ 0.5λ f ′c > 0.5λ f ′c
Type of tendon Type of tendon

Type of member Bonded Unbonded Bonded Unbonded
Beams 0 0.004A 0.003A 0.005A
One-way slabs 0 0.003A 0.002A 0.004A
Two-way slabs
Negative moment regions 0 0.0006hln 0.00045hln 0.00075hln
Positive moment regions,
0 0.004A 0.003A 0.005A
concrete stress > 0.2λ f ′c
Positive moment regions,

0 0 -- --
concrete tensile stress ≤ 0.2λ f ′c


Slab Design 9 - 35

face of the support (CSA 13.3.3.1 and CSA 13.3.3.2). For rectangular columns
and concentrated loads, the critical area is taken as a rectangular area with the
sides parallel to the sides of the columns or the point loads (CSA 13.3.3.3).
Figure 9-4 shows the auto punching perimeters considered by SAFE for the
various column shapes. The column location (i.e., interior, edge, corner) and
the punching perimeter may be overwritten using the Punching Check Over-
writes.
d 2
d 2 d 2
d 2
d 2 d 2

The fraction of unbalanced moment transferred by flexure is taken to be γf Mu
taken to be γv Mu, where
9 - 36 Slab Design
1
γf = , and (CSA 13.10.2)
1 + ( 2 3 ) b1 b2
1
γv = 1− , (CSA 13.3.5.3)
1 + ( 2 3 ) b1 b2
span and b2 is the width of the critical section measured in the direction
perpendicular to the span.

The concrete punching shear factored strength is taken as the minimum of the
  2 
ϕc  1 +  0.19λ f ′c
  βc 
  α d
vc = min ϕc  0.19 + s  λ f ′c (CSA 13.3.4.1)
  b0 

ϕc 0.38λ f ′c

where, βc is the ratio of the minimum to the maximum dimensions of the criti-
based on the location of the critical section.


α s = 3 for edge columns, and (CSA 13.3.4.1(b))
2 for corner columns

The value of f 'c is limited to 8 MPa for the calculation of the concrete shear
capacity (CSA 13.3.4.2)
If the effective depth, d, exceeds 300 mm, the value of vc is reduced by a factor
equal to 1300/(1000 + d) (CSA 13.3.4.3).
Slab Design 9 - 37

eccentricity of shear about the two axes, the shear stress is computed assuming
imum shear stress and the concrete punching shear stress capacity is
reported as the punching shear capacity ratio by SAFE.

that the effective depth of the slab is greater than or equal to 120 mm (CSA
13.2.1).
carried out as follows.

with punching shear reinforcement is:
vc = 0.28λφ c f 'c for shear studs (CSA 13.3.8.3)
vc = 0.19λφc f 'c for shear stirrups (CSA 13.3.9.3)

The shear force is limited to a maximum of vr ,max , where
vr ,max = 0.75λφc f 'c for shear studs (CSA 13.3.8.2)
vr ,max = 0.55λφc f 'c for shear stirrups (CSA 13.3.9.2)
9 - 38 Slab Design
Given vf, vc, and vf,,max, the required shear reinforcement is calculated as fol-
lows, where, φs, is the strength reduction factor.
 If vf > vr,max,
Av ( v f − vc )
= b (CSA 13.3.8.5, 13.3.9.4)
s φs f yv o
 If vf > vr,max, (CSA 13.3.8.2)
a failure condition is declared.
 If Vf exceeds the maximum permitted value of Vr,max, the concrete section

9.8.3.3 Determine the Reinforcement Arrangement

columns.

edge
d 2 d 2 Iy
gy
gx
s0 s0 s0
Iy x x gx
Iy
Critical d 2
section
centroid Free
edge y x
y
centroid
Ix
Ix
Slab Design 9 - 39
shall not exceed 0.4d. The spacing between adjacent shear reinforcement in the
first line of shear reinforcement shall not exceed 2d measured in a direction
parallel to the column face.

umns respectively.

not be less than the minimum cover specified in CSA 7.9 plus one half of the

in 9.5-, 12.7-, 15.9-, and 19.1-millimeter diameters.
first peripheral line of shear studs should not be smaller than 0.4d. The limits of
the spacing, s, between the peripheral lines are specified as:
so ≤ 0.4 d (CSA 13.3.8.6)

0.75d v f ≤ 0.56λφc f 'c
s ≤ (CSA 13.3.8.6)
0.50 d v f > 0.56λφc f 'c
For shear stirrups,
so ≤ 0.25d (CSA 13.3.9.5)

s ≤ 0.25d (CSA 13.3.9.5)
The minimum depth for reinforcement should be limited to 300 mm (CSA

13.3.9.1).
9 - 40 Slab Design
Chapter 10
Design for Eurocode 2-2004
crete design procedure that is used by SAFE when the user selects the Europe-
an code Eurocode 2-2004 [EN 1992-1-1:2004]. For the load combinations ref-
erence also is made to Eurocode 0 [EN 1990], which is identified with the pre-
fix “EC0.” Various notations used in this chapter are listed in Table 10-1. For
referencing to the pertinent sections of the EC code in this chapter, a prefix
“EC2” followed by the section number is used. It also should be noted that this
section describes the implementation of the CEN Default version of Eurocode
2-2004, without a country specific National Annex. Where Nationally Deter-
mined Parameters [NDPs] are to be considered, this is highlighted in the re-
spective section by the notation [NDP].

vides a set of default load combinations that should satisfy requirements for the
design of most building type structures.
Notations 10 - 1
10.1 Notations
Table 10-1 List of Symbols Used in the Eurocode 2-2004 Code

Ac Area of concrete section, mm2
Asw Total cross-sectional area of links at the neutral axis, mm2
Asw /sv Area of shear reinforcement per unit length of the member,
mm2

zone, mm
d Effective depth of tension reinforcement, mm
d' Effective depth of compression reinforcement, mm

MPa
fcd Design concrete strength = αcc fck / γc , MPa
fck Characteristic compressive concrete cylinder strength at 28

days, MPa
10 - 2 Notations
Chapter 10 - Design for Eurocode 2-2004

fcwd Design concrete compressive strength for shear design = αcc
f cwk
, MPa
γc
fcwk Characteristic compressive cylinder strength for shear design,

MPa
fyd Design yield strength of reinforcing steel = fyk /γs, MPa
fyk Characteristic strength of shear reinforcement, MPa
f ′s Compressive stress in beam compression steel, MPa
fywd Design strength of shear reinforcement = fywk /γs, MPa
fywk Characteristic strength of shear reinforcement, MPa
h Overall thickness of slab, mm
m Normalized design moment, M/bd2η fcd
mlim Limiting normalized moment capacity as a singly reinforced

beam
MED0 Design moment resistance of a section with tendons only,

N-mm
MEDbal Design moment resistance of a section with tendons and the

tion, N-mm
sv Spacing of the shear reinforcement along the length of the

beam, mm
u Perimeter of the punch critical section, mm
Notations 10 - 3

VRdc Design shear resistance from concrete alone, N
VRd,max Design limiting shear resistance of a cross-section, N
VEd Shear force at ultimate design load, N
x Depth of neutral axis, mm
xlim Limiting depth of neutral axis, mm
η Concrete strength reduction factor for sustained loading and

stress-block
β Enhancement factor of shear resistance for concentrated load;

also the coefficient that takes account of the eccentricity of
loading in determining punching shear stress; factor for the
depth of compressive stress block
γc Partial safety factor for concrete strength
γs Partial safety factor for steel strength
δ Redistribution factor
εc Concrete strain
ε's Strain in compression steel.
ν Effectiveness factor for shear resistance without concrete

crushing
ρ Tension reinforcement ratio
ω Normalized tensile steel ratio, As fyd /η fcd bd
ω' Normalized compression steel ratio, A's fyd γs /α f's bd
10 - 4 Notations

ωlim Normalized limiting tensile steel ratio

for which the structure needs to be checked. Eurocode 0-2002 allows load
combinations to be defined based on EC0 Eqation 6.10 or the less favorable of
EC0 Equations 6.10a and 6.10b [NDP].
∑γ
j ≥1
G, j Gk , j + γ P P + γ Q ,1Qk ,1 + ∑ γ Q ,iψ 0,i Qk ,i
i >1
(EC0 Eqn. 6.10)
∑γ
j ≥1
G, j Gk , j + γ P P + γ Q ,1ψ 0,1Qk ,1 + ∑ γ Q ,iψ 0,i Qk ,i
i >1
(EC0 Eqn. 6.10a)
∑ξ γ
j ≥1
j G, j Gk , j + γ P P + γ Q ,1Qk ,1 + ∑ γ Q ,iψ 0,i Qk ,i
i >1
(EC0 Eqn. 6.10b)
Load combinations considering seismic loading are generated automatically

based on EC0 Eqation 6.12b.
∑G
j ≥1
k, j + P + AEd + ∑ψ 2,i Qk ,i
i >1
(EC0 Eqn. 6.12b)
For this code, if a structure is subjected to dead (D), live (L), pattern live (PL),
snow (S), wind (W), and earthquake (E) loads, and considering that wind and
earthquake forces are reversible, the load combinations in the following sec-
tions may need to be considered (Eurocode 0-2002, Eqation 6.10 or the less fa-
vorable of Equations 6.10a and 6.10b).
(PT) by providing the tendon profile or by using load balancing options in the
program. The default load combinations for post-tensioning are defined in the
following sections.


fer of prestress force in accordance with EC0 6.5.3 and Table A1.1. The pre-
1.0D + 1.0PT

The following characteristic load combinations are used for checking the
requirements of prestress for serviceability in accordance with EC0 6.5.3 and
Table A1.1. It is assumed that all long-term losses have occurred already at the
service stage.
1.0D + 1.0PT
1.0D + 1.0L + 1.0PT

prestress in accordance with EC2-2004.
The combinations required for shear design of beams and punching shear re-
quire the full PT forces (primary and secondary). Flexural design requires only
the hyperstatic (secondary) forces. The hyperstatic (secondary) forces are
determined automatically by SAFE by subtracting out the primary PT moments
when the flexural design is carried out.
The following load combinations need to be considered if Equation 6.10 is

specified for generation of the load combinations (EC0 6.4.3) [NDP].
γGj,sup D + 1.0PT* (EC0 Eqn. 6.10)
γGj,supD + γQ,1 L + 1.0PT* (EC0 Eqn. 6.10)
γGj,supD + (0.75)γQ,1 PL + 1.0PT* (EC0 Eqn. 6.10)
10 - 6 Design Load Combinations

γGj,inf D ± γQ,1 W + 1.0PT*

γGj,sup D ± γQ,1 W + 1.0PT* (EC0 Eqn. 6.10)
γGj,sup D + γQ,1 L ± γQ,i ψ0,i W + 1.0PT*

γGj,sup D + γQ,1 L + γQ,i ψ0,i S + 1.0PT*
γGj,sup D ± γQ,1 W + γQ,i ψ0,i L + 1.0PT*
γGj,sup D ± γQ,1 W + γQ,i ψ0,i S + 1.0PT* (EC0 Eqn. 6.10)
γGj,sup D + γQ,1 S ± γQ,i ψ0,i W + 1.0PT*
γGj,sup D + γQ,1 S + γQ,i ψ0,i L + 1.0PT*
γGj,sup D + γQ,1 L + γQ,i ψ0,i S ± γQ,i ψ0,i W + 1.0PT*

γGj,sup D ± γQ,1 W + γQ,i ψ0,i L + γQ,i ψ0,i S + 1.0PT* (EC0 Eqn. 6.10)
γGj,sup D + γQ,1 S ± γQ,i ψ0,i W + γQ,i ψ0,i L + 1.0PT*
D ± 1.0E + 1.0PT*
D ± 1.0E + ψ2,i L + 1.0PT*
(EC0 Eqn. 6.12b)
D ± 1.0E + ψ2,i L + ψ2,i S + 1.0PT*
*
If the load combinations are specified to be generated from the max of EC0
Equations. 6.10a and 6.10b, the following load combinations from both equa-
tions are considered in the program.
γGj,sup D + 1.0PT* (EC0 Eqn. 6.10a)

ξ γGj,sup D + 1.0PT* (EC0 Eqn. 6.10b)
γGj,supD + γQ,1 ψ0,1 L + 1.0PT* (EC0 Eqn. 6.10a)

ξ γGj,supD + γQ,1 L + 1.0PT* (EC0 Eqn. 6.10b)
γGj,supD + (0.75)γQ,1 ψ0,1 PL + 1.0PT* (EC0 Eqn. 6.10a)

ξ γGj,supD + (0.75)γQ,1 PL + 1.0PT* (EC0 Eqn. 6.10b)
γGj,inf D ± γQ,1 ψ0,1 W + 1.0PT* (EC0 Eqn. 6.10a)

γGj,sup D ± γQ,1 ψ0,1 W + 1.0PT* (EC0 Eqn. 6.10a)
γGj,inf D ± γQ,1 W + 1.0PT* (EC0 Eqn. 6.10b)
ξ γGj,sup D ± γQ,1 W + 1.0PT* (EC0 Eqn. 6.10b)

γGj,sup D + γQ,1 ψ0,1 L ± γQ,i ψ0,i W + 1.0PT*

γGj,sup D + γQ,1 ψ0,1 L + γQ,i ψ0,i S + 1.0PT*
γGj,sup D ± γQ,1 ψ0,1 W + γQ,i ψ0,i L + 1.0PT* (EC0 Eqn. 6.10a)
γGj,sup D ± γQ,1 ψ0,1 W + γQ,i ψ0,i S + 1.0PT*
γGj,sup D + γQ,1 ψ0,1 S + γQ,i ψ0,i L + 1.0PT*
γGj,sup D + γQ,1 ψ0,1 S ± γQ,i ψ0,i W + 1.0PT*
ξ γGj,sup D + γQ,1 L ± γQ,i ψ0,i W + 1.0PT*

ξ γGj,sup D + γQ,1 L + γQ,i ψ0,i S + 1.0PT*
ξ γGj,sup D + γQ,1 S ± γQ,i ψ0,i W + 1.0PT*
(EC0 Eqn. 6.10b)
ξ γGj,sup D + γQ,1 S + γQ,i ψ0,i L + 1.0PT*
γGj,inf D ± γQ,1 W + γQ,i ψ0,i L + 1.0PT*
γGj,inf D ± γQ,1 W + γQ,i ψ0,i S + 1.0PT*
D ± 1.0E + 1.0PT*
D ± 1.0E + ψ2,i L + 1.0PT* (EC0 Eqn. 6.12b)
D ± 1.0E + ψ2,i L + ψ2,i S + 1.0PT*
*
For both sets of load combinations, the variable values for the CEN Default
version of the load combinations are defined in the list that follows [NDP].
γGj,sup = 1.35 (EC0 Table A1.2(B))
γGj,inf = 1.00 (EC0 Table A1.2(B))
γQ,1 = 1.5 (EC0 Table A1.2(B))
γQ,i = 1.5 (EC0 Table A1.2(B))
ψ0,i = 0.7 (live load, assumed not to be storage) (EC0 Table A1.1)
ψ0,i = 0.6 (wind load) (EC0 Table A1.1)
ψ0,i = 0.5 (snow load, assumed H ≤ 1000 m) (EC0 Table A1.1)
ξ = 0.85 (EC0 Table A1.2(B))
ψ2,i = 0.3 (live, assumed office/residential space) (EC0 Table A1.1)
ψ2,i = 0 (snow, assumed H ≤ 1000 m) (EC0 Table A1.1)

These are also the default design load combinations in SAFE whenever the
Eurocode 2-2004 code is used. If roof live load is treated separately or other
types of loads are present, other appropriate load combinations should be used.

The characteristic strengths of concrete are provided in EC2 Table 3.1 where
characteristic strengths of concrete range between 12 and 90 MPa.
12 MPa ≤ f ck ≤ 90 MPa (EC2 Table 3.1)
Grades C28/C35 and C32/C40 are the minimum recommended for post-
tensioning and pre-tensioning respectively. In both cases, the concrete strength
at transfer should not be less than 25 MPa.
The specified characteristic strength of reinforcement is given as follows (EC2

3.2.2(3)):
400 MPa ≤ f yk ≤ 600 MPa (EC2 3.2.2(3))
The specified characteristic strength of prestressed steel should conform to EN

10138, Part 2 to 4 or European Technical Approval (EC2 3.3.2).
The program also checks the following tensile strength in prestressing steel
(EC2 5.10.2.1). The maximum stresses applied to the tendon, σp,max, in all types
of prestressing steel, in terms of the specified minimum tensile strength fpk, are
summarized as follows:
σ p,max = min {k1 f pk , k2 f p 0.1k } (EC2 5.10.2.1)
The recommended value for k1 and k2 are 0.8 and 0.9 where, f p 0.1k( ) is defined
as the characteristic value of 0.1% proof load and ( f ) is the characteristic
pk
maximum load in axial tension (EC2 3.3.3, Figure 3.9).
The stress in tendons immediately after tensioning or after prestress transfer is

also limited to the following:

σ pm 0 = min {k7 f pk , k8 f p 0.1k } (EC2 5.10.3)
The recommended values for k7 and k8 are 0.75 and 0.85.

the characteristic strength, fck , f pk and f p 0.1k of the material by a partial factor
of safety, γs and γc, as follows (EC2 3.1.6, 3.2.7, 3.3.6(6)) [NDP].
α cc fck / γ c
fcd = (EC2 3.1.6 (1))
α cc fcwk / γ c
fcwd = (EC2 3.1.6 (1))
f yd f yk / γ s
= (EC2 3.2.7 (2))
f ywd f ywk / γ s
= (EC2 3.2.7 (2))
f pd f p 0.1k / γ s
= (EC2 3.3.6 (6))
The value αcc is the coefficient that accounts for long-term effects on the com-
pressive strength; αcc is taken as 1.0 by default and can be overwritten by the
user (EC2 3.1.6(1)).
The values of partial safety factors, γs and γc, for the materials and the design
strengths of concrete and reinforcement used in the program are listed in the
following table (EC2 2.4.2.4 (1), Table 2.1N):
Values of γm for the ultimate limit state [NDP]
Reinforcement, γs 1.15
Prestressing steel, γp 1.15
Concrete in flexure and axial load, γc 1.50
These values are recommended by the code to give an acceptable level of safe-
ty for normal structures under typical design situations (EC2 3.1.6(1)). For ac-
10 - 10 Partial Safety Factors

cidental and earthquake situations, the recommended values are less than the
tabulated value. The user should consider those cases separately.
These factors are already incorporated into the design equations and tables in
the code. The user is allowed to overwrite these values; however, caution is
advised.

tures
Ultimate limit state design of prestressed members for flexure and axial loads
shall be based on assumptions given in EC2 6.1(2).
 The strain distribution in the concrete in compression is derived from the as-
sumption that plane sections remain plane.
 The design stresses in the concrete in compression are taken as η fcd. Maxi-
mum strain at the extreme concrete compression fiber shall be assumed equal
to εcu3.
 The tensile strength of the concrete is ignored.
 The strains in bonded post-tensioning tendons and in any additional rein-

forcement (compression or tension) are the same as that in the surrounding
concrete.
The serviceability limit state of prestressed members uses the following

assumptions given in EC2 7.2.
entire load range.
EC2 7.2(3).
 In general, it is only necessary to calculate design stresses due to the load

arrangements immediately after the transfer of prestress and after all losses
or prestress have occurred; in both cases the effects of dead and imposed
loads on the strain and force in the tendons may be ignored.

Prestressed concrete members are investigated at three stages:

time dependent prestress losses) are checked against the following limits (EC2
5.10.2.2 and 7.1):
 Extreme fiber stresses in compression:
0.60 f ck (t) (EC2 5.10.2.2(5))
Unless reinforcing steel has been added, the stress limits will normally be
"without bonded reinforcement" values, as any bonded tendons normally will
be at the compression face at transfer.
 Extreme fiber stresses in tension (EC2 7.1)
≤ fctm(t) where, (EC2 7.1(2))
fctm = 0.30 fck( )

2/3
for fck ≤ C50/C60 (EC2 Table 3.1)
=fctm 2.12ln (1 + fcm / 10 ) for fck > C50/C60 (EC2 Table 3.1)
= fck + 8MPa
fcm (EC2 Table 3.1)
 Extreme fiber stresses in tension should not exceed fctm; otherwise, the sec-
tion should be designed as a cracked section (EC2 7.1).


The stresses in the concrete for prestressed concrete flexural members at ser-
vice loads, and after all prestress losses have occurred, are checked against the
following limits (EC2 7.2(2)):
0.6 f ck (EC2 7.2(2))
 Extreme fiber stresses in tension in the precompressed tensile zone at charac-

teristic service loads are defined as follows (EC2 7.2(5)):
– Extreme fiber stresses in tension for reinforcement:
0.8 f yk (EC2 7.2(5))
– Extreme fiber stresses in tension for prestressing tendons:
0.75 f pk (EC2 7.2(5))
Although cracking is permitted for Exposure Classes X0, XC1, XC2, XC3, and
XC4, it may be assumed that the design hypothetical tensile stresses exist at the
limiting crack widths given in Eurocode 2, Table 7.1N. Limits to the design
hypothetical tensile stresses under Frequent Load combinations are given in the
following table (TR43, Second Edition):
Group Limiting crack width(mm) Design stress

Bonded Tendons 0.1 1.35 fctm
0.2 1.65 fctm
Unbonded tendons - 1.35 fctm
10.7 Beam Design

Beam Design 10 - 13


The beam section is then designed for the maximum positive and maximum
negative factored moments obtained from all of the load combinations. Positive
beam moments can be used to calculate bottom reinforcement. In such cases
the beam may be designed as a rectangular or a flanged beam. Negative beam

10 - 14 Beam Design
the concrete.
The design procedure is based on the simplified rectangular stress block shown
in Figure 10-1 (EC2 3.1.7(3)).
ε cu 3 η f cd
b
A′s f ′s Cs
x a = λx
d′
dp
ds h
Ap
εp Tcps
Ts Tcs
As εs
STRAIN STRESS
BEAM
DIAGRAM DIAGRAM
SECTION
The area of the stress block and the depth of the center of the compressive
force from the most compressed fiber are taken as:
Fc = η fcd a b
a=λx
where x is the depth of the neutral axis; the factor λ defines the effective height
of the compression zone; and the factor η defines the effective strength, as fol-
lows:
λ = 0.8 for fck ≤50 MPa (EC2 3.1.7(3))
Beam Design 10 - 15
 fck − 50 
λ = 0.8   for 50 ≤ fck ≤ 90 MPa (EC2 3.1.7(3))
 400 
η = 1.0 for fck ≤ 50 MPa and (EC2 3.1.7(3))
 f − 50 
η 1.0 −  CK
=  for 50 ≤ f ck ≥ 90 MPa (EC2 3.1.7(3))
 200 
Furthermore, it is assumed that moment redistribution in the beam does not ex-
ceed the code specified limiting value. The code also places a limitation on the
neutral axis depth, to safeguard against non-ductile failures (EC2 5.5(4)).
When the applied moment exceeds the limiting moment capacity as a singly re-
inforced beam, the area of compression reinforcement is calculated on the
assumption that the neutral axis depth remains at the maximum permitted val-
ue.
(L- and T-beams), is summarized in the subsections that follow.

0
In that case, the moment capacity M ED is determined as follows:
The maximum depth of the compression zone, xmax, is calculated based on the
limitation that the tension reinforcement strain shall not be less than εsmin:
 ε cu 3 
cmax =   dp
 ε cu 3 + ε s min 
where,
εcu3 = 0.0035
Therefore, the limit x ≤ xmax is set for tension-controlled sections.
The maximum allowable depth of the compression block is given by:
10 - 16 Beam Design
amax = λ xmax (EC2 3.1.7(3))
where,
λ = 0.8 if fck < 50 MPa (EC2 3.1.7)
 f − 50 
λ 0.8 −  ck
=  if fck > 50 MPa (EC2 3.1.7)
 400 
stress in the post-tensioning steel, fpk is computed based on strain compatibility
Based on the calculated fpk, the depth of the neutral axis is recalculated, and fpk
a = λx
 If a ≤ amax (EC2 3.1.7(3)), the moment capacity of the section, provided by

0  a
M ED
= f pk Ap  d p − 
 2
 If a > amax (EC2 3.1.7(3)), a failure condition is declared.
0
 If M > M ED , SAFE calculates the moment capacity and the As required at the
balanced condition. The balanced condition is taken as the marginal tension-
controlled case. In that case, it is assumed that the depth of the neutral axis x
is equal to xmax. The stress in the post-tensioning steel, fpk, is then calculated
C = η fcd amax b
=T Ap f pkbal + Asbal fsbal
Beam Design 10 - 17
η fcd amax b − Ap f pkbal

Asbal =
fsbal
bal  a   a 
M=
ED Ap f pkbal  d p − max  + Asbal fsbal  ds − max 
 2   2 
ing the depth of the neutral axis, x.

0
When M < M ED , the amount of post-tensioning steel is adequate to resist the
design moment M. A minimum reinforcement is provided to satisfy the flexural
cracking requirements (EC2 7.3.2).

(
0
When M ED bal
< M < M ED )
, SAFE determines the required area of tension rein-
forcement, As, iteratively to satisfy the design moment M and reports this
0
required area of tension reinforcement. Since M is bound by M ED at the low-
bal 0
er end and M ED at the upper end, and M ED is associated with As = 0 and
bal
M ED is associated with As = Asbal , the required area will fall within the range
of 0 to Asbal.
10 - 18 Beam Design

10.7.1.2.1.3 Case 3: Post-tensioning steel and tension reinforcement is not

adequate
( bal
When M > M ED )
, compression reinforcement is required (EC2 5.5 (4)). In
that case, SAFE assumes that the depth of the neutral axis, x, is equal to xmax .
The values of fpk and fs reach their respective balanced condition values, f pkbal
and f sbal . Then the area of compression reinforcement, A′s , is determined as
follows:
 The moment required to be resisted by compression reinforcement and ten-

sion reinforcement is:
bal
M ED=
,s M − M ED
M ED,s
A′s = , where
( 0.87f ′s - ηfcd )( d - d' )
a − d'
f ′s = εcu3Es  max  ≤ 0.87fy.
 amax 

en by:
M ED , s
Ascom =
0.87 f y ( d s − d ')
Beam Design 10 - 19


0
ε cu 3 η f cd η f cd
bf hf
d′ f ′s Cs Cf
A′s a = λx
x
dp
ds
Cw
Aps
ε ps
Tw Tf
εs Ts
bw
BEAM STRAIN STRESS
 ε cu3 
cmax =   dp
 ε cu3 + ε s min 
where,
εcu3 = 0.0035
10 - 20 Beam Design
Therefore, the program limit for the depth of the neutral axis is x ≤ xmax for ten-
sion-controlled sections.

amax = λ xmax (EC2 3.1.7(3))
where,
λ = 0.8 if fck < 50 MPa (EC2 3.1.7)
 f − 50 
λ 0.8 −  ck
=  if f ck > 50 MPa (EC2 3.1.7)
 400 
stress in the post-tensioning steel, fpk, is computed based on strain compatibility
compute the stress, fps, in the post-tensioning steel. Based on the calculated fpk,
the depth of the neutral axis is recalculated, and fpk is further updated. After this
a = λx
0  a
M ED
= f pk Ap  d p − 
 2

0
controlled case. In that case it is assumed that the depth of the neutral axis x
based on strain compatibility, and the area of required tension reinforcement,
defined for the rectangular beam design. However, in this case, the width of
Beam Design 10 - 21

amax.

C = η fcd amax Accom
η fcd amax Accom − Ap f pkbal

Asbal =
fsbal
bal  a   a 
M=
 2   2 
10.7.1.2.2.2.1 Case 1: Post-tensioning steel is adequate

0
design moment M. Minimum reinforcement is provided to satisfy the flexural
10.7.1.2.2.2.2 Case 2: Post-tensioning steel plus tension reinforcement

10 - 22 Beam Design
0
(
When M ED bal
< M < M ED )
0
required area of tension reinforcement. Since M is bounded by M ED at the
bal 0
lower end and M ED at the upper end, and M ED is associated with As = 0 and
bal
M ED is associated with As = Asbal , the required area will be within the range of
0 to As .

10.7.1.2.2.2.3 Case 3: Post-tensioning steel and tension reinforcement is not adequate
( bal
When M > M ED )
that case SAFE assumes that the depth of the neutral axis, x, is equal to xmax .
follows:

bal
M ED=
,s M − M ED

M ED,s
A′s = , where
( 0.87 f 's − η fcd )( d − d ' )
a − d'
f ′s = εcu3Es  max  ≤ 0.87fy.
 amax 
en by:
M ED,s
Ascom =
0.87 f y ( ds − d ' )
Beam Design 10 - 23

Reinforcement in prestressed concrete beams is computed to increase the
strength of sections as required in the flexural design of prestressed beam or to
comply with shear link requirements. The minimum flexural tension rein-
forcement required for a beam section to comply with the cracking require-
ments must be separately investigated by the user.
For bonded tendons, there is no minimum un-tensioned reinforcement require-

ments.
For unbonded tendons, the minimum flexural reinforcement provided in a rec-

tangular or flanged beam section is given as [NDP]:
fctm
As ,min 0.26
= bd ≥ 0.0013bd (EC2 9.2.1.1)
f yk
where fctm is the mean value of axial tensile strength of the concrete and is
computed as:
(2 3)
f ctm = 0.30 f ck for fck ≤ 50 MPa (EC2 3.12, Table 3.1)
=fctm 2.12ln (1 + fcm 10 ) for fck > 50 MPa (EC2 3.12, Table 3.1)
= fck + 8 MPa
fcm (EC2 3.12, Table 3.1)
The minimum flexural tension reinforcement required for control of cracking

should be investigated independently by the user.

(EC2 9.2.1.1(3)).
10 - 24 Beam Design

The shear reinforcement is designed for each loading combination at each
station along the length of the beam. In designing the shear reinforcement for a
particular beam, for a particular loading combination, at a particular station due
to the beam major shear, the following steps are involved (EC2 6.2):
 Determine the factored shear force, V
 Determine the shear force, VRd,c, that can be resisted by the concrete
 Determine the shear reinforcement required to carry the balance
these steps.

combination at a particular beam station are obtained by factoring the cor-
responding shear forces for different load cases with the corresponding load

The design shear resistance of the beam without shear reinforcement, VRd,c is
calculated as:
VRd,c = [CRd,c k(100 ρ1fck)1/3 + k1 σcp ] (bwd) (EC2 6.2.2(1))
VRd,c ≥ [vmin + k1 σcp ] (bwd), (EC2 6.2.2(1))
where fck is in MPa
200
1+
k= ≤ 2.0 with d in mm (EC2 6.2.2(1))
d
ρ1 = tension reinforcement ratio =

(A s1 + Aps )
≤ 0.02 (EC2 6.2.2(1))
bw d
Beam Design 10 - 25
As1 = area of mild-tension reinforcement (EC2 6.2.2(1))
Aps = area of prestress-tension reinforcement (EC2 6.2.2(1))
σcp = average stress in concrete due to axial

force N Ed Ac (EC2 6.2.2(1))
σcp N Ed Ac < 0.2 fcd z MPa

= (EC2 6.2.2(1))
Ac = the total gross area of concrete section
The value of CRd,c, vmin, and k1 for use in a country may be found in its National
Annex. The program default values for CRd,c [NDP], vmin [NDP], and k1 [NDP]
are given as follows (EC2 6.2.2(1)):
CRd,c = 0.18/γc,
vmin = 0.035 k3/2 fck1/2
k1 = 0.15.
If light-weight concrete:
CRd,c= 0.18/γc (EC2 11.6.1(1))
vmin = 0.03 k3/2 fck1/2 (EC2 11.6.1(1))
k1 = 0.15. (EC2 11.6.1(1))

along the length of the beam. The assumptions in designing the shear rein-
forcement are as follows:
 The beam sections are assumed to be prismatic. The effect of any variation of
width in the beam section on the concrete shear capacity is neglected.
 The effect on the concrete shear capacity of any concentrated or distributed

load in the span of the beam between two columns is ignored. Also, the
effect of the direct support on the beams provided by the columns is ignored.
10 - 26 Beam Design
 All shear reinforcement is assumed to be perpendicular to the longitudinal

reinforcement.
In designing the shear reinforcement for a particular beam, for a particular load
combination, the following steps of the standard method are involved (EC2
6.2).
 Obtain the design value of the applied shear force V from the SAFE analysis
results (EC2 6.2.3(3)).
α cw bw zν 1 fcd
VRd ,max = , where (EC2 6.2.3(3))
cot θ + tan θ
αcw [NDP] is conservatively taken as 1 (EC2 6.2.3(3))
The strength reduction factor for concrete cracked in shear, v1 [NDP] is de-
fined as:
 f ck 
ν 1 = 0.61 −  (EC2 6.2.2(6))
 250 
z = 0.9d (EC2 6.2.3(1))
θ is optimized by program and is set to 45° for combinations including

seismic loading (EC2 6.2.3(2)).
 Given VEd, VRdc, VRd,max, the required shear reinforcement in area/unit length
is calculated as follows:
 If VEd ≤ VRdc,
Asw Asw,min
=
sv s
 If VR,dc < VEd ≤ VRd,max
Asw VEd A
= ≥ sw,min (EC2 6.2.3(3))
s zf ywd cot θ s
Beam Design 10 - 27
 If VEd > VRd,max
a failure condition is declared. (EC2 6.2.3(3))
The maximum of all the calculated Asw /sv values, obtained from each load
load combination number.
The minimum shear reinforcement is defined as:
Asw,min 0.08 fck

= bw (EC2 9.2.2(5))
s f yk


 Determine the factored torsion, TEd

tors.
10 - 28 Beam Design

design TEd is permitted to be reduced in accordance with the code (EC2
6.3.1(2)). However, the program does not automatically redistribute the inter-
nal forces and reduce TEd. If redistribution is desired, the user should release
the torsional degree of freedom (DOF) in the structural model.

For torsion design, special section properties, such as Ak, tef, u, uk, and zi are
calculated. These properties are described in the following (EC2 6.3.2).
A = Area enclosed by the outside perimeter of the cross-section
Ak = Area enclosed by centerlines of the connecting walls, where the

centerline is located a distance of tef /2 from the outer surface
tef = Effective wall thickness, A/u. It is taken as at least twice the

distance between the edge and center of the longitudinal rebar.
u = Outer perimeter of the cross-section
uk = Perimeter of the area Ak
zi = Side length of wall i, defined as the distance between the inter-

section points of the wall centerlines
In calculating the section properties involving reinforcement, such as Ak, and

uk, it is assumed that the distance between the centerline of the outermost
to 38-mm clear cover and a 12-mm stirrup. For torsion design of flanged beam
sections, it is assumed that placing torsion reinforcement in the flange area is
inefficient. With this assumption, the flange is ignored for torsion reinforce-
ment calculation. However, the flange is considered during calculation of tor-
sion section properties. With this assumption, the special properties for a rec-
tangular beam section are given as:
A = bh (EC2 6.3.2(1))
Beam Design 10 - 29
Ak = (b − tef)(h − tef) (EC2 6.3.2(1))
u = 2b + 2h (EC2 6.3.2(1))
uk = 2(b − tef) + 2(h − tef) (EC2 6.3.2(3))
A = bwh (EC2 6.3.2(1))
Ak = (bw – tef)(h – tef) (EC2 6.3.2(1))
u = 2bw + 2h (EC2 6.3.2(1))
uk = 2(h – tef) + 2(bw – tef) (EC2 6.3.2(3))
in Figure 10-3.
c bb − 22c
c c bef
c c
hdfs
c c
b bw − 2c
bbww

10 - 30 Beam Design

The torsion in the section can be ignored with only minimum shear reinforce-
ment (EC2 9.2.1.1) required if the following condition is satisfied:
TEd V
+ Ed ≤ 1.0 (EC2 6.3.2(5))
TRd ,c VRd ,c
where VRd,c is as defined in the previous section and TRd,c is the torsional crack-
ing moment, calculated as:
TRd ,c = f ctd t ef 2 Ak (EC2 6.3.2(1), 6.3.2(5))
where tef, and fctd, the design tensile strength, are defined as:
tef = A u (EC2 6.3.2(1))
fctd = α ct fctk 0.05 γ c (EC2 Eq. 3.16)
where A is the gross cross-section area, u is the outer circumference of the

cross-section, αct [NDP] is a coefficient, taken as 1.0, taking account of long-
term effects on the tensile strength, and fctk0.05 is defined as:
fctk0.05 = 0.7fctm (EC2 Table 3.1)

If the expression in the previous subsection is satisfied, torsion can be safely
ignored (EC2 6.3.2(5)) with only minimum shear reinforcement required. In
that case, the program reports that no torsion reinforcement is required. How-
ever, if the equation is not satisfied, it is assumed that the torsional resistance is
provided by closed stirrups, longitudinal bars, and compression diagonals.
If torsion reinforcement in the form of closed stirrups is required, the shear due
to this torsion, Vt, is first calculated, followed by the required stirrup area, as:
At Vt
= (EC2 6.2.3(3))
s zf ywd cot θ
Beam Design 10 - 31
V=
t (h − t ) Tef
Ed− Tcon
2 Ak
(EC2 6.3.2(1))
The required longitudinal reinforcement for torsion is defined as:
 V 
Tcon= 1 − Ed  TRd ,c (EC2 6.3.2(5))
 V
 Rd ,c 
TEd u
Asl = cot θ k (EC2 6.3.2(3))
2 Ak f yd
where θ is the angle of the compression struts, as previously defined for beam
shear. In the preceding expressions, θ is taken as 45 degrees. The code allows
any value between 21.8 and 45 degrees (EC2 6.2.3(2)), while the program
assumes the conservative value of 45 degrees.
When torsional reinforcement is required, an upper limit on the combination of

VEd and TEd that can be carried by the section without exceeding the capacity of
the concrete struts also is checked using:
TEd VEd
+ ≤ 1.0 (EC2 6.3.2(4))
TRd ,max VRd ,max
where TRd,max, the design torsional resistance moment is defined as:
TRd ,max = 2να cw fcd Ak tef sin θ cosθ (EC2 6.3.2(4))
If this equation is not satisfied, a failure condition is declared. In that case, the
concrete section should be increased in size.
The maximum of all of the calculated Asl and At /s values obtained from each
load combination is reported, along with the controlling combination.

10 - 32 Beam Design
10.8 Slab Design

of the strips usually are governed by the locations of the slab supports. The
design is carried out based on the ultimate strength design method for pre-
stressed reinforced concrete (EC2-2004) as described in the following sections.
To learn more about the design strips, refer to the section entitled "SAFE De-
sign Techniques" in the Key Features and Terminology manual.

The design of the slab reinforcement for a particular strip is carried out at
specific locations along the length of the strip. These locations correspond to
the element boundaries. Controlling reinforcement is computed on either side
of those element boundaries. The slab flexural design procedure for each load
These two steps are described in the subsection that follows and are repeated

Slab Design 10 - 33

cordingly.

slab is given by the following limits (EC2 9.3.1.1, 9.2.1.1, UK, NA Table
NA.1) [NDP]:
f ctm
As ,min = 0.26 bd (EC2 9.2.1.1(1))
f yk
As ,min = 0.0013bd (EC2 9.2.1.1(1))
computed as:
(2 3)
f ctm = 0.30 f ck for fck ≤ 50 MPa (EC2 Table 3.1)
=fctm 2.12ln (1 + fcm 10 ) for fck > 50 MPa (EC2 Table 3.1)
= fck + 8 MPa
fcm (EC2 Table 3.1)

10 - 34 Slab Design
An upper limit on the tension reinforcement and compression reinforcement

has been imposed to be 0.04 times the gross cross-sectional area (EC2
9.2.1.1(3)).

Only the code specific items are described in the following.

The punching shear is checked at the face of the column (EC2 6.4.1(4)) and at
a critical section at a distance of 2.0d from the face of the support (EC2
6.4.2(1)). The perimeter of the critical section should be constructed such that
its length is minimized. Figure 10-4 shows the auto punching perimeters con-
sidered by SAFE for the various column shapes. The column location (i.e., in-
terior, edge, corner) and the punching perimeter may be overwritten using the
Punching Check Overwrites.
2d
2d 2d
2d 2d 2d
Slab Design 10 - 35

The concrete punching shear stress capacity is taken as:
VRd ,c C Rd ,c k (100 ρ1 fck ) + k1σ cp 

13
= (EC2 6.4.4(1))
with a minimum of:
VRd ,c = (vmin + k1σ cp ) (EC2 6.4.4(1))
where fck is in MPa and
200
1+
k= ≤ 2.0 with d in mm (EC2 6.4.4(1))
d
ρ1 = ρ1 x ρ1 y ≤ 0.02 (EC2 6.4.4(1))
where ρ1x and ρ1y are the reinforcement ratios in the x and y directions respec-
tively, conservatively taken as zeros, and
σcp = (σcx + σcy)/2 (EC2 6.4.4(1))
where σcx and σcy are the normal concrete stresses in the critical section in the x
and y directions respectively, conservatively taken as zeros.
C Rd ,c = 0.18 γ c [NDP] (EC2 6.4.4(1))
ν min = 0.035k 3 2 f ck 1 2 [NDP] (EC2 6.4.4(1))
k1 = 0.15 [NDP] (EC2 6.4.4(1))
10.8.2.3 Determine Maximum Shear Stress

centricity of shear, the nominal design shear stress, vEd, is calculated as:
VEd  M Ed ,2u1 M u 
vEd = 1 + k + k Ed ,3 1  , where (EC2 6.4.4(2))
ud  VEdW1,2 VEdW1,3 
10 - 36 Slab Design
k is the function of the aspect ratio of the loaded area in Table 6.1 of EN
1992-1-1
u1 is the effective perimeter of the critical section
d is the mean effective depth of the slab
MEd is the design moment transmitted from the slab to the column at the
connection along bending axis 2 and 3
VEd is the total punching shear force
W1 accounts for the distribution of shear based on the control perimeter

along bending axis 2 and 3.

capacity is reported as the punching shear capacity ratio by SAFE. If this ratio
exceeds 1.0, punching shear reinforcement is designed as described in the fol-
lowing section.

The use of shear studs as shear reinforcement in slabs is permitted provided
that the effective depth of the slab is greater than or equal to 200 mm.
Punching Shear as described in the earlier section remain unchanged. The de-
sign of punching shear reinforcement is as described in the following subsec-
tions.

α cw v1 fcd
VRd,max = b z where (EC2 6.2.3(3))
( cot θ + tan θ ) w
Slab Design 10 - 37
αcw is conservatively taken as 1
 f 
v1 = 0.6  1 − ck 
 250 
z = 0.9d (EC2 6.2.3(1))
1 ≤ cot θ ≤ 2.5, program default value is 1, which can

be overwritten by the user (EC2 6.2.3(2))
Given νEd, vRd,c and vRd,max, the required shear reinforcement is calculated as fol-
lows (EC2 6.4.5):
 If νEd < vRd,max,
Aw =
( vEd − 0.75vRd ,c ) u
sr (EC2 6.4.5)
1.5 f ywd
 If νEd > vRd,max, a failure condition is declared. (EC2 6.4.3)
 If νEd exceeds the maximum permitted value of vRD,max, the concrete section

Punching shear reinforcement in the vicinity of a rectangular columns should
be arranged on peripheral lines, i.e., a line running parallel to and at constant
distances from the sides of the column. Figure 10-5 shows a typical arrange-
ment of shear reinforcement in the vicinity of a rectangular interior, edge, and
corner column.
shall not exceed 2d. The spacing between adjacent shear reinforcement in the
parallel to the column face (EC2 6.4.5(4)).

umns respectively.
10 - 38 Slab Design

edge
d 2 d 2 Iy
gy
gx
s0 s0 s0
Iy x x gx
Iy
Critical d 2
section
centroid Free
edge y x
y
centroid
Ix
Ix


not be less than the minimum cover specified in EC2 4.4.1 plus half of the di-
ameter of the flexural reinforcement.

ceed 1.5d and should not exceed 2d at additional perimeters. The limits of so
and the spacing, s, between the peripheral lines are specified as:
0.3d ≤ so ≤ 2d (EC2 9.4.3(1))
s ≤ 0.75d (EC2 9.4.3(1))
g ≤ 1.5d (first perimeter) (EC2 9.4.3(1))
g ≤ 2d (additional perimeters) (EC2 9.4.3(1))
Slab Design 10 - 39
10.9 Nationally Determined Parameters (NDPs)

The Comité Européen de Normalisation (CEN) version of Eurocode 2-2004
specifies a set of clauses in the design code, for which Nationally Determined
Parameters (NDPs) are permitted to be adjusted by each member country with-
in their National Annex. Variations in these parameters between countries are
considered in the program by choosing the desired country from the Options
menu > Preferences > Concrete Frame Design command. This appendix lists
the NDPs as adopted in the program for the CEN Default version of the design
code. Additional tables are provided that list the NDPs that differ from the
CEN Default values for each country supported in the program.
Table 10-2 CEN Default NDPs
NDP Clause Value
γc 2.4.2.4(1) 1.5
γs 2.4.2.4(1) 1.15
αcc 3.1.6(1) 1.0
αct 3.1.6(2) 1.0
max fyk 3.2.2(3) 600MPa
Load Combinations 5.1.3(1) Combinations from Eq. 6.10
θ0 5.2(5) 0.005
k1 5.5(4) 0.44
k2 5.5(4) 1.25(0.6 + 0.0014/εcu2)
k3 5.5(4) 0.54
k4 5.5(4) 1.25(0.6 + 0.0014/εcu2)
10 - 40 Nationally Determined Parameters (NDPs)

Table 10-2 CEN Default NDPs
NDP Clause Value
λlim 5.8.3.1(1) 20 ⋅ A ⋅ B ⋅ C / n
CRd,c 6.2.2(1) 0.18/γc
vmin 6.2.2(1) 0.035k3/2fck1/2
k1 6.2.2(1) 0.15
θ 6.2.3(2) 45 degrees
 f 
ν1 6.2.3(3) 0.6 1 − ck 
 250 
αcw 6.2.3(3) 1.0
f ctm
Beam As,min 9.2.1.1(1) 0.26 bt d ≥ 0.0013bt d
f yk
Beam As,max 9.2.1.1(3) 0.04Ac
Beam ρw,min 9.2.2(5) ( 0.08 )

f ck / f yk
αlcc 11.3.5(1) 0.85
αlct 11.3.5(2) 0.85
ClRd,c 11.6.1(1) 0.15/γc
vl,min 11.6.1(1) 0.30k3/2flck1/2
k1 11.6.1(1) 0.15
ν1 11.6.2(1) 0.5η1(1 – flck/250)
Nationally Determined Parameters (NDPs) 10 - 41

Table 10-3 Denmark NDPs
NDP Clause Value
γc 2.4.2.4(1) 1.45
γs 2.4.2.4(1) 1.20
Max fyk 3.2.2(3) 650MPa
Load Combinations 5.1.3(1) Combinations from Eq. 6.10a/b
Ac f cd
λlim 5.8.3.1(1) 20 ⋅
N Ed
Beam ρw,min 9.2.2(5) ( 0.063 )

f ck / f yk
αlcc 11.3.5(1) 1.0
αlct 11.3.5(2) 1.0
vl,min 11.6.1(1) 0.03k2/3flck1/2
Table10-4 Finland NDPs
NDP Clause Value
αcc 3.1.6(1) 0.85
Max fyk 3.2.2(3) 700MPa
Load Combinations 5.1.3(1) Combinations from Eq. 6.10a/b
k2 5.5(4) 1.10
Beam As,max 9.2.1.1(3) Unlimited

Table 10-5 Norway NDPs
NDP Clause Value
cc 3.1.6(1) 0.85
ct 3.1.6(2) 0.85
lim 5.8.3.1(1) 13(2  rm)Af
0.15 for compression

k1 6.2.2(1)
0.3 for tension
vmin 6.2.2(1) 0.035k3/2fck1/2
Beam w,min 9.2.2(5)  0. 1 f  / f

ck yk
vl,min 11.6.1(1) 0.03k2/3flck1/2
0.15 for compression

k1 11.6.1(1)
0.3 for tension
1 11.6.2(1) 0.5(1 – flck/250)
Table 10-6 Singapore NDPs
NDP Clause Value
cc 3.1.6(1) 0.85
k1 5.5(4) 0.4
k2 5.5(4) 0.6 + 0.0014/cu2
k3 5.5(4) 0.54
k4 5.5(4) 0.6 + 0.0014/cu2

Table 10-6 Singapore NDPs
NDP Clause Value
vlim 5.8.3.1(1) 0.30k3/2flck1/2
Table 10-7 Slovenia NDPs

NDP Clause Value
Same As CEN Default
Table 10-8 Sweden NDPs
NDP Clause Value
Beam As,max 9.2.1.1(3) Unlimited
αlcc 11.3.5(1) 1.0
αlct 11.3.5(2) 1.0
Table 10-9 United Kingdom NDPs
NDP Clause Value
ψ0,i (wind load) EC0 Combos 0.5
αcc 3.1.6(1) 0.85
k1 5.5(4) 0.4
k2 5.5(4) 0.6 + 0.0014/εcu2
k3 5.5(4) 0.4

Table 10-9 United Kingdom NDPs
NDP Clause Value
k4 5.5(4) 0.6 + 0.0014/εcu2
vl,min 11.6.1(1) 0.30k3/2flck1/2

Chapter 11
Design for Hong Kong CP 04
crete design procedure that is used by SAFE when the user selects the Hong
Kong limit state code CP-04 [CP 04], which also incorporates Amendment 1
published in June 2007. Various notations used in this chapter are listed in
Table 11-1. For referencing to the pertinent sections of the Hong Kong CP
code in this chapter, a prefix “CP” followed by the section number is used.
The design is based on user-specified load combinations. The program

provides a set of default load combinations that should satisfy the requirements
for the design of most building type structures.
11.1 Notations
Table 11-1 List of Symbols Used in the Hong Kong CP 04 Code

Notations 11 - 1

mm2/mm
zone, mm
MPa
fcu Characteristic cube strength, MPa
f ′s Compressive stress in a beam compression steel, MPa
fyv Characteristic strength of link reinforcement, MPa
11 - 2 Notations
Chapter 11 - Design for Hong Kong CP 04

1

3
k2
M Design moment at a section, MPa

Mu Design moment resistance of a section, MPa
mm
tion, N-mm
T Tension force, N
ical section, MPa
MPa
section, MPa
MPa
z Lever arm, mm
Notations 11 - 3

εc Maximum concrete strain
'

of safety, γf (CP 2.3.2.1, Table 2.1). For Hong Kong CP 04, if a structure is sub-
jected to dead (D), live (L), pattern live (PL), and wind (W) loads, and consid-
ering that wind forces are reversible, the load combinations in the following
sections may need to be considered (CP 2.3.2.1, 12.3.4.2, 12.3.4.3 and
12.3.5.1).

fer of prestress forces in accordance with Hong Kong CP 04 clause 12.3.5. The
prestressing forces are considered without any long-term loses for the initial
service load combination check.
1.0D + 1.0PT


prestress for serviceability in accordance with CP 12.3.4. It is assumed that all
long-term losses have occurred already at the service stage.
1.0D + 1.0PT
1.0D + 1.0L + 1.0PT

prestress in accordance with CP 2.3.2.1, Table 2.1.
The combinations required for shear design of beams and punching shear
require the full PT forces (primary and secondary). Flexural design requires on-
ly the hyperstatic (secondary) forces. The hyperstatic (secondary) forces are de-
termined automatically by SAFE by subtracting the primary PT moments when
the flexural design is completed.
1.4D + 1.0PT*
1.4D + 1.6L + 1.0PT*
1.4D + 1.6(0.75PL) + 1.0PT*
1.0D ± 1.4W +1.0PT*
1.4D ± 1.4W + 1.0PT*
1.2D + 1.2L ± 1.2W + 1.0PT*
*

at transfer should not be less than 25 MPa (CP 12.1.8.1).

The specified characteristic strength of un-tensioned reinforcement is given as

follows (CP 3.2.3, Table 3.3):
Hot rolled mild reinforcement - 250 MPa (CP 3.2.3, Table 3.3)
High yield reinforcement - 460 MPa (CP 3.2.3, Table 3.3)
The specified characteristic strength of prestressing steel should conform to CP

04 clause 3.3.
SAFE also checks the tensile strength in the prestressing steel (CP 12.7.1). The

CP Table 2.2 (CP 2.4.3.2):
the equations.


tures
be based on assumptions given in CP 12.3.7.1.

assumption that a plane section remains plane (CP 12.3.7.1).
equal to 0.0035 (CP 12.3.7.1).
 Tensile strength of the concrete is ignored (CP 12.3.7.1).

ment (compression or tension) is derived from the assumption that plane
section remains plane (CP 12.3.7.1).
sumptions given in CP 12.3.4.1.
entire load range (CP 12.3.4.1).
CP 12.3.4.2, 12.3.4.3 and 12.3.5 (CP 12.3.4.1).

loads on the strain and force in the tendons may be ignored (CP 12.3.4.1).

(CP 12.3.4.2 and 12.3.4.3):

The prestressed flexural members are classified as Group a (uncracked), Group

b (cracked but no visible cracking), and Group c (cracked) based on tensile
tensile zone at service loads (CP 12.1.3).

compression into this zone, thus effectively reducing the magnitude of the
tensile stress.
Group a: No flexural tensile stresses
Group b: Flexural tensile stresses with no visible cracking
Group c: Flexural tensile stresses with surface crack widths as follows:
 ≤ 0.1 mm for members in exposure conditions 3 and 4 (Table 4.1

of CP 04)
 ≤ 0.2 mm for all other members

time dependent prestress losses) are checked against the following limits (CP
12.3.5.1 and 12.3.5.2):
 Extreme fiber stress in tension for Group a: ≤ 1.0 MPa
 Extreme fiber stress in tension for Group b:

The extreme fiber stress in tension for Group c should not exceed the appropri-
ate value for a Group b member; otherwise the section should be designed as a
cracked section.

The stresses in the concrete for Group a and Group b prestressed flexural
members at service loads, and after all prestress losses have occurred, are
checked against the following limits (CP 12.3.4.2 an 12.3.4.3):



– Extreme fiber stresses in tension for Group a: No tensile stress
– Extreme fiber stresses in tension for Group b:
Although cracking is allowed for Group c, it is assumed that the concrete

section is uncracked and the user is limiting the tensile stress at the service
stage as presented in Table 12.2, modified by the coefficients in Table 12.3 of
CP 04. The user needs to provide the tension limits for Group c elements at
service loads in the design preferences (CP 12.3.4.3).

11.7 Beam Design



11 - 10 Beam Design


the concrete.
in Figure 12-1 (CP 6.1.2.4(a)), where εc,max is defined as:
0.0035 if fcu ≤ 60 MPA

ε c,max =  1
0.0035 − 0.00006 ( fcu − 60 ) 2 if fcu > 60 MPA
Furthermore, it is assumed that moment redistribution in the member does not

exceed 10% (i.e., βb ≥ 0.9) (CP 6.1.2.4(b)). The code also places a limitation on
the neutral axis depth,
0.5 for fcu ≤ 45 N mm 2

x 
≤ 0.4 for 45 < fcu ≤ 70 N mm 2
d 
0.33 for 70 < fcu ≤ 100 N mm 2
to safeguard against non-ductile failures (CP 6.1.2.4(b)). In addition, the area

of compression reinforcement is calculated assuming that the neutral axis depth
remains at the maximum permitted value.
that the design ultimate axial force does not exceed 0.1 fcu Ag (CP 6.1.2.4(a));
ly.
Beam Design 11 - 11
ε 0.67 f cu γ m
b
A′s f ′s Cs
a
d′ x
ds dp
Aps
ε ps Tcps
Ts Tcs
As εs
BEAM STRAIN STRESS

requirements (CP 19.2.1).
The ductility of a section is controlled by limiting the x/d ratio (CP 6.1.2.4(b)):
0.5, for f cu ≤ 45 N mm 2
x 
= 0.4, for 45 < f cu ≤ 70 N mm 2 (CP 6.1.2.4(b))
d  2
0.33, for 70 < f cu ≤ 100 N mm
11 - 12 Beam Design
0.9x for f cu ≤ 45 N/mm 2


=a 0.8x for 45 < f cu ≤ 70 N/mm 2 (CP 6.1.2.4(a))

0.72x for 70 < f cu ≤ 100 N/mm 2
depth (CP 6.1.2.4(c)).
 K 
z = d 0.5 + 0.25 −  ≤ 0.95d, (CP 6.1.2.4(c))
 0.9 
 If a ≤ amax (CP 6.1.2.4), the moment capacity of the section, provided by

 a
=M u0 Aps f pb  d p − 
 2
 If a > amax (CP 6.1.2.4), a failure condition is declared.
0.67 f cu
C= amax b
γm
0.67 f cu
γm
Asbal =
f sbal
Beam Design 11 - 13

M=
u Aps f pb  d p − 2  + As fs  ds − 2 
   


associated with As = Asbal , the required area will be between the range of 0 to
Asbal.

11 - 14 Beam Design
equate
When M > M ubal , compression reinforcement is required (CP 6.1.2.4). In that
bal
f sbal . The area of compression reinforcement, A′s , is determined as follows:

reinforcement is:
= M − M ubal
M us
Mus
A' s = , where (CP 6.1.2.4(c))
 0.67 fcu 
 f 's −  ( d − d' )
 γc 
 d′ 
′s Es ε c  1 −  ≤ 0.87 f y ,
f= (CP 6.1.2.4(c), 3.2.6, Fig. 3.9)
 x

en by:
M us
Ascom =
0.87 f y ( d s − d ')

Beam Design 11 - 15

0.5, for f cu ≤ 45 N mm 2
x 
= 0.4, for 45 < f cu ≤ 70 N mm 2 (CP 6.1.2.4(b))
d 
0.33, for 70 < f cu ≤ 100 N mm 2
0.9x for f cu ≤ 45 N/mm 2


=a 0.8x for 45 < f cu ≤ 70 N/mm 2 (CP 6.1.2.4(a))
 2
0.72x for 70 < f cu ≤ 100 N/mm
depth (CP 6.1.2.4(c)).
 K 
z = d 0.5 + 0.25 −  ≤ 0.95d, (CP 6.1.2.4(c))
 0.9 

 a
 2
11 - 16 Beam Design
 If a ≤ hf, the subsequent calculations for As are exactly the same as previous-
of the beam is taken as bf. Compression reinforcement is required when K >
K'.
0.67 f cu
C= amax Accom
γc
Accom = (
bal
0.67 f cu
γm
Asbal =
f sbal
Beam Design 11 - 17
ε 0.67 f cu γ m 0.67 f cu γ m
bf hf
d′ f ′s Cs
A′s Cf
x
d
Cw
Aps
ε ps
Tw Tf
As εs Ts
bw

requirements.

Asbal.
11 - 18 Beam Design

equate
bal
lows:

reinforcement is:
= M − M ubal
M us
Mus
A 's = , where (CP 6.1.2.4(c))
 0.67 fcu 
 f 's −
γ c 
( d − d ')

 d'
′s Esε c  1 −  ≤ 0.87 f y
f= (CP 6.1.2.4(c))
 x

en by:
Mus
Ascom =
0.87 f y ( ds − d ' )
compression reinforcement is A's. As is to be placed at the bottom, and A's is
to be placed at the top if M is positive and vice versa if M is negative.
Beam Design 11 - 19

For bonded tendons, there is no minimum untensioned reinforcement required.

from CP Table 9.1(CP 9.2.1.1) with interpolation for reinforcement of interme-
diate strength:
Minimum percentage
As
bh
bw A
< 0.4 100 s 0.32 0.18
≥ 0.4 100 0.24 0.13
bf bw h
 100 0.48 0.26
compression bw h
 100 0.36 0.20
compression bw h

given by the following table, which is taken from CP Table 9.1(CP 9.2.1.1)
11 - 20 Beam Design
A′
bh
A′s
bf hf
T- or L-Beam
A′s
bw h

reinforcement is imposed to be 0.04 times the gross cross-sectional area (CP
3.12.6.1).

beam for a particular load combination, the following steps are involved (CP
6.1.2.5):

with these steps.

associated shear forces for different load cases, with the corresponding load
V
v= (CP 6.1.2.5(a))
bw d
Beam Design 11 - 21
vmax = min(0.8 fcu , 7 MPa) (CP 6.1.2.5(a), 12.3.8.2)
vmax = min(0.63 fcu , 5.6 MPa) (BS 8110-2:1985 5.4)

Uncracked sections in flexure (M < Mo) (CP 12.3.8.3)
Cracked sections in flexural (M ≥ Mo) (CP 12.3.8.3)
where,


Vco =0.67bv h (f t
2
)
+ 0.8 f cp f t , (CP 12.3.8.4)
where,
ft is the maximum design principal stress (CP 12.3.8.4)
ft =0.24 f cu (CP 12.3.8.4)

post-tensioning, taken as positive. (CP 12.3.8.4)
11 - 22 Beam Design
Vc = Vco + P sin β (CP 12.3.8.4)

 f pe  V
 1 − 0.55
Vcr =  vc bv d + M o , and (CP 12.3.8.5)
 
f pu  M

Vcr ≥ 0.1bv d f cu (CP 12.3.8.5)
Vc = min (Vco , Vcr ) + P sin β (CP 12.3.8.5)

Given v, vc, and vmax, the required shear reinforcement is calculated as follows
(CP 12.3.8.6):
 Calculate the design average shear stress that can be carried by minimum
shear reinforcement, vr, as:

0.4 fcu if fcu ≤ 40 N mm2
 2
 f
vr 0.4  cu 
3
= if 40 < fcu ≤ 80 N mm2 (CP 12.3.8.7)

40 
 

( )
2
 0.4 80 3
if fcu > 80 N mm2
40
fcu ≤ 80 N 2 (for calculation purpose only) (CP 6.1.2.5(c))

mm
 If v ≤ vc + vr , minimum reinforcement is required:
As vr b
= , (CP 12.3.8.7)
sv 0.87 f yv
 If v > vc + vr ,
Beam Design 11 - 23
Asv ( v − vc ) b
= (CP 12.3.8.8)
sv 0.87 f yv
 If v > vmax, a failure condition is declared.
fyv ≤ 460 MPa.
load combination.



tors.
11 - 24 Beam Design

eration should be given using the following algorithms (CP 6.3.1).
2T
vt = (CP 6.3.3(a))
2
h
 hmin
3
hmax 
Tseg = T   (CP 6.3.3(b))
 ∑ h3 h
 (
min max ) 

hmax = Larger dimension of a rectangular section
fy:
y1
vt ≤ min(0.8 f cu , 7 N/mm 2 ) × (CP 6.3.4, Table 17)
550

(
vt ,min = min 0.067 fcu ,0.6 N/mm 2 ) (CP 6.3.4, Table 17)
Beam Design 11 - 25
(

If the factored torsional shear stress, vt is less than the threshold limit, vt,min, tor-
sion can be safely ignored (CP 6.3.5). In that case, the program reports that no
torsion reinforcement is required. However, if vt exceeds the threshold limit,
vt,min, it is assumed that the torsional resistance is provided by closed stirrups
and longitudinal bars (CP 6.3.5).
 If vt > vt,min, the required closed stirrup area per unit spacing, Asv,t /sv, is cal-
culated as:
Asv ,t T
= (CP 6.3.6)
sv 0.8 x1 y1 (0.87 f yv )
Asv ,t f yv ( x1 + y1 )
Al = (CP 6.3.6)
sv f y

the closed link, and y1 is the larger center-to-center dimension of the closed
link.
v + vt ≤ vmax (CP 6.3.4)
(
vmax ≤ min 0.8 fcu , 7 N/mm 2 ) (CP 6.3.4)
11 - 26 Beam Design
If the combination of shear stress, v, and torsional shear stress, vt, exceeds this
increased in size.

c b − 2c c bf
c c
ds
h − 2c h h h − 2c
c c
b bw − 2c
bw

11.8 Slab Design

design is carried out based on the ultimate strength design method (Hong Kong
Slab Design 11 - 27
CP 04) for prestressed reinforced concrete as described in the following sub-

sections. To learn more about the design strips, refer to the section entitled
"SAFE Design Techniques" in the Key Features and Terminology manual.

specific locations along the length of the strip. Those locations correspond to


11 - 28 Slab Design

cordingly.

minimum reinforcement requirements in accordance with CP Table 3.25 (CP
3.12.5.3)

tensioned reinforcement shall be designed for the full tension force generated
by assumed flexural tensile stresses in the concrete for the following situations
(Concrete Society, Technical Report 43):
0.36 f ci
exceeds 0.15 f cu .
Slab Design 11 - 29
Ft
As =
( 5/8 ) f y
where
fct (h − x )b
Ft =−
2

(CP9.2.1.3).


The punching shear is checked at a critical section at a distance of 1.5d from
the face of the support (CP 6.1.5.7(f)). For rectangular columns and concentrat-
ed loads, the critical area is taken as a rectangular area with the sides parallel to
the sides of the columns or the point loads. Figure 11-4 shows the auto punch-
ing perimeters considered by SAFE for the various column shapes. The column
location (i.e., interior, edge, corner) and the punching perimeter may be over-
written using the Punching Check Overwrites.
11 - 30 Slab Design
1.5d
1.5d 1.5d
1.5d
1.5d 1.5d

The design ultimate shear resistance of the concrete alone, Vc, should be con-
where,


Slab Design 11 - 31
Vco =0.67bv h (f t
2
)
+ 0.8 f cp f t , (CP 12.3.8.4)
where,
ft =0.24 f cu (CP 12.3.8.4)

due to prestress, taken as positive. (CP 12.3.8.4)
Vc = Vco + P sin β (CP 12.3.8.4)

 f pe  V
 1 − 0.55
 f pu  M

Vcr ≥ 0.1bv d f cu (CP 12.3.8.5)

centricity of shear about the bending axis, the nominal design shear stress, vmax,
is calculated as:
 1.5 M 
V = V f + x  (CP 6.1.5.6(b), 6.1.5.6(c))
eff , x  Vy 
 
 1.5 M 
y
V = V f +  (CP 6.1.5.6(b), 6.1.5.6(c))
eff , y  Vx 
 
11 - 32 Slab Design
Veff , x

 ud
vmax = max  (CP 6.1.5.7)
Veff , y
 u d
where,
u is the perimeter of the critical section,
x and y are the lengths of the sides of the critical section parallel to the
axis of bending,
umn at the connection,
V is the total punching shear force, and

taken as


f = 1.25 for edge columns (CP 6.1.5.6(b), 6.1.5.6(c))


lowing section.

that the effective depth of the slab is greater than or equal to 200 mm (CP
6.1.5.7(e)). If the slab thickness does not meet these requirements, the punch-
ing shear reinforcement is not designed and the slab thickness should be in-
creased by the user.
Slab Design 11 - 33


vmax = min(0.8 fcu , 7 MPa) (CP 6.1.2.5(a))

 2
 f
vr 0.4  cu 
3
= if 40 < fcu ≤ 80 N mm2 (CP 12.3.8.7)

40 
 

( )
2
 0.4 80 3
if fcu > 80 N mm2
40
f cu ≤ 80 N 2 (for calculation purpose only) (CP 6.1.2.5(c))

mm
As vr b
= , (CP 12.3.8.7)
sv 0.87 f yv
 If v > vc + vr ,
Asv ( v − vc ) b
= (CP 12.3.8.8)
sv 0.87 f yv
11 - 34 Slab Design

tances from the sides of the column. Figure 11-5 shows a typical arrangement
of shear reinforcement in the vicinity of a rectangular interior, edge, and corner
columns.

edge
d 2 d 2 Iy
gy
gx
s0 s0 s0
Iy x x gx
Iy
Critical d 2
section
centroid Free
edge y x
y
centroid
Ix
Ix

critical sections outside the shear-reinforced zone
parallel to the column face (CP12.3.8.10). When V > 1.8Vc, the maximum
spacing is reduced to 0.5 d.

umns respectively.
Slab Design 11 - 35
11.8.3.4 Determine Reinforcement Diameter, Height, and

Spacing
not be less than the minimum cover specified in CP 4.2.4 plus half of the diam-
eter of the flexural reinforcement.

The following information is taken from the BS 8110-1997 code. When speci-
fying shear studs, the distance, so, between the column face and the first pe-
ripheral line of shear studs should not be smaller than 0.5d. The spacing be-
tween adjacent shear studs, g, at the first peripheral line of studs shall not
specified as:
so ≤ 0.5d (CP 6.1.5.7(f))
s ≤ 0.75d (CP 6.1.5.7(f))
g ≤ 1.5d (CP 6.1.5.7(f))
Stirrups are permitted only when slab thickness is greater than 200 mm (CP
6.1.5.7(e)).
11 - 36 Slab Design
Chapter 12
Design for IS 1343-1980
crete design procedure that is used by SAFE when the user selects the Indian
code IS:1343-1980 [IS:1980]. Various notations used in this chapter are listed
in Table 12-1. For referencing to the pertinent sections of the IS:1343 Code of
Practice for Prestressed Concrete in this chapter, a prefix “IS” followed by the
section number is used. Additionally, the latter portion of the chapter refer-
ences Indian Code IS:456-2000, Plain and Reinforced Concrete-Code of Prac-
tice. For referencing the pertinent sections of that code, a prefix “IS:456 ” fol-
lowed by the section number is used to distinguish it from IS:1343.

12.1 Notations
Notations 12 - 1
Table 12-1 List of Symbols Used in the IS 1343-1980 Code


mm2/mm

zone, mm
dv Effective depth of beam in shear, mm

MPa
fck Characteristic cube strength at 28 days, MPa
fp Characteristic strength of a prestressing tendon, MPa
fpe Maximum prestress in tendon after losses, MPa
12 - 2 Notations
Chapter 12 - Design for IS 1343-1980

fpi Maximum initial prestress in tendon, MPa
f s' Compressive stress in a beam compression steel, MPa
fy Characteristic strength of non-prestressed reinforcement, MPa
fyv Characteristic strength of non-prestressed shear stirrup rein-

forcement, MPa (< 500 MPa)
D Overall depth of a section in the plane of bending, mm
Df Flange thickness, mm
M u0 Design moment resistance of a section with tendons only, N-

mm

N-mm
sv Spacing of the shear stirrups along the length of the beam, mm
T Tension force, N
v Design shear stress at a beam cross-section or at a punch criti-

cal section, MPa
vc Design ultimate shear stress resistance of a concrete beam, MPa
Notations 12 - 3

section, MPa

MPa

xu Neutral axis depth, mm
amax Depth of neutral axis in a balanced section, mm
z Lever arm, mm
εsp Strain in prestressing steel
ε's Strain in compression steel

for which the structure needs to be designed. For IS 1343-1980, if a structure is
subjected to dead (D), live (L), pattern live (PL), snow (S), wind (W), and
reversible, the load combinations in the following sections may need to be
defined (IS 20.4.2 and IS Table 5).
For post-tensioned concrete design, the user can specify prestressing load (PT)
by providing the tendon profile or by using the load balancing options in the

program. The default load combinations for post-tensioning are defined in the
following subsections.

fer of prestress force in accordance with IS 19.3 and IS 20.4. The prestressing
forces are considered without any long-term losses for the initial service load
combination check.
1.0D + 1.0PT

prestress for serviceability in accordance with IS 19.3. It is assumed that all
1.0D + 1.0PT
1.0D + 1.0L + 1.0PT

prestress in accordance with IS 20.4.2, Table 5.
1.5D + 1.0PT*
1.5D + 1.5L + 1.0PT*
1.5D + 1.5(0.75 PL) + 1.0PT*

1.5D ± 1.5W +1.0PT*

0.9D ± 1.5W + 1.0PT*
1.2D + 1.2L ± 1.2W + 1.0
1.5D ± 1.5E + 1.0PT*

0.9D ± 1.5E + 1.0PT*
1.2D + 1.2L ± 1.2E + 1.0
*
Other appropriate loading combinations should be used if roof live load is

treated separately, or if other types of loads are present.

Grade M30 and M40 are the minimum recommended for post-tensioning and
pre-tensioning respectively. In both cases the concrete strength at transfer
should not be less than that specified in IS 15.1.
The specified characteristic strength of nonprestressed reinforcement is given

as follows:
 Hot rolled mild steel 250 MPa (IS:432)
 Hot rolled deformed steel bars 415 MPa (IS:1139)
 High yield strength deformed steel 415 MPa (IS:1786)
The specified characteristic strength of prestressing steel should conform to IS

1785 for plain cold drawn wires and to IS 2090 or IS 6006 for high tensile steel
bars and strands respectively.
SAFE also checks the following tensile strength in prestressing steel (IS
18.5.1). The permissible tensile stresses in all types of prestressing steel, in
terms of the specified minimum tensile strength fpu, are summarized as follows:
a. Initial prestress behind anchorages at transfer: Not more than 0.80 fpu
b. Residual prestress in tendon after losses: Not less than 0.45fpu
12 - 6 Limits on Material Strength


The design strength for concrete and reinforcement is obtained by dividing the
characteristic strength of the material by a partial factor of safety, γm. The val-
ues of γm used in the program and listed in the following table are taken from
IS 20.4.1.1:
Values of γm for the Ultimate Limit State

Nonprestressed reinforcement, γms 1.15
code. The user is allowed to overwrite these values. However, caution is
advised.
The design load combinations are obtained by multiplying the characteristic

loads by the appropriate partial factor of safety, γf (IS 20.4.2).
12.5 Design Requirements of Prestressed Concrete Struc-

tures
The structural design is based on “Limit State Concepts” (IS 19.1). The limit
state of collapse and limit states of serviceability are considered in design (IS
19.1.1), (IS 19.2) and (IS 19.3).
12.5.1 Limit State of Collapse

The resistance of prestressed structural elements to flexure and shear at every
section will be designed such that the resistance is always greater than the
demand imposed by all types of loads, with the most unfavorable combination
using appropriate partial safety factors (IS 19.2). This will include the design
for the following limit states:
 Limit state of collapse in flexure
 Limit state of collapse in shear
Partial Safety Factors 12 - 7

Limit State of Collapse: Flexure
Limit state of collapse of prestressed members for flexure is based on the

following assumptions given in IS 1343 clause 22.1.

assumption that plane sections normal to the axis remain plane after bending
(IS 22.1.1(a)).
 The design stresses in the concrete in compression are taken as 0.67fcu. Max-
imum strain at the extreme concrete compression fiber shall be assumed
equal to 0.0035 (IS 22.1.1(b)) and (IS 22.1.1(c)).
 Tensile strength of the concrete is ignored (IS 22.1.1(d)).
 The stresses in bonded post-tensioning tendons and in any additional rein-

forcement (compression or tension) are derived from the representative
stress-strain curve for the type of steel used given by the manufacturer or
typical curves given in Figure 5 of IS:1343 or in Figure 23 of IS:456 for non-
prestressed reinforcement. For design purposes, the partial safety factor shall
be applied as indicated earlier in this chapter.
 The stress in unbonded post-tensioning tendons will be obtained from a

rigorous analysis (IS 22.1.1(f)).
12.5.2 Limit State of Serviceability

The check for limit state of serviceability involves checking for deflection,
cracking, and maximum compressive stresses at prestress transfer and under
service conditions. For checking limit states of serviceability, prestressed struc-
tural elements are classified into the following groups:
 Class 1: No flexural tensile stresses permitted (IS 19.3.2 (a))
 Class 2: Flexural tensile stresses are allowed, but no visible cracking (IS
19.3.2 (b))
 Class 3: Flexural tensile stresses are allowed, but the surface width of cracks
should be limited to 0.1 mm for members in aggressive environments and 0.2
mm for other members
12 - 8 Design Requirements of Prestressed Concrete Structures

By default all prestressed concrete elements are assumed to be of type Class-1.

This setting can be overwritten in the Design Preferences.
SAFE checks the following limit states of serviceability (IS 19.3.1):
12.6 Maximum Compression Check

SAFE checks the maximum compressive stress in flexure as defined in the sub-
12.6.1 Maximum Compressive Stress at Transfer

Maximum compressive stress due to bending and direct force at the time of
transfer of prestress shall not be more than 0.54fci for concrete grade M30 and
0.37fci for concrete grade M60, where fci is the cube strength of the concrete at
transfer, which will not be less than 0.5fck. For all other grades of concrete, the
limiting stress can be linearly interpolated between these values.
12.6.2 Maximum Compressive Stress Under Service Conditions

Maximum compressive stress due to bending under service conditions for
applied prestress and service loads after deduction of the full losses in prestress
will be limited to the following values.
12.6.2.1 Case I
When compressive stress is not likely to increase during service, maximum
compressive stress shall not be more than 0.41fck for concrete grade M30 and
0.35fck for concrete grade M60, where fck is the cube strength of the concrete at
28 days. For all other grades of concrete, the limiting stress can be linearly in-
terpolated between these values.
12.6.2.2 Case II
When compressive stress is likely to increase during service, maximum com-
pressive stress shall not be more than 0.34fck for concrete grade M30 and 0.27fck
for concrete grade M60, where fck is the cube strength of the concrete at 28
days. For all other grades of concrete, the limiting stress can be linearly inter-
polated between these values.
Maximum Compression Check 12 - 9

12.7 Beam Design

required areas of reinforcement for flexure and shear based on the beam
moments, shear forces, load combination factors, and other criteria described in
the following subsections. The reinforcement requirements are calculated at
each station along the length of the beam.
Beams are designed for major direction flexure and shear only. Effects of
minor direction bending that may exist in the beams must be investigated inde-
pendently by the user.

 Determine design bending moments, shears, and torsion
12.7.1.1 Effects of Torsion

IS 1343 clause 22.5.1 states that wherever torsional stiffness of the member is
taken into account in the analysis of the structure, the member will be designed
for torsion. However, if torsional stiffness of the member has been ignored in
the analysis, no specific calculations for torsion will be required. It should be
noted that the program will not automatically ignore or redistribute torsion. If
redistribution is desired, the user should release the torsional degree of freedom
(DOF) in the structural model.
12.7.1.2 Determine Factored Moments, Shears, and Torsional Moments

In the design of flexural reinforcement of post-tensioned concrete beams, the
factored moments, shears, and torsional moments for each load combination at
a particular beam station are obtained by factoring the corresponding design
forces for different load cases with the corresponding load factors.
IS 1343 uses a simplified approach based on skew bending theory, for design
of post-tensioned concrete members subjected to bending moment, shear, and
12 - 10 Beam Design
torsion. In this method, torsion and bending moment are combined as an equiv-
alent bending moment and the beam is designed for the equivalent moment.
Positive equivalent moments produce bottom reinforcement. In such cases, the
beam may be designed as a rectangular or a flanged beam. Negative equivalent
moments produce top reinforcement. In such cases, the beam may be designed
as a rectangular or an inverted flanged beam. Torsion and shear are considered
together as detailed in subsequent sections.
12.7.1.2.1 Determine Design Moments when Torsion is Excluded

factored moments for each load combination at a particular beam section are
obtained by factoring the corresponding moments for different load cases with
beam moments produce bottom steel. In such cases, the beam may be designed
as a rectangular or a flanged beam. Negative beam moments produce top steel.
In such cases, the beam may be designed as a rectangular or an inverted
flanged beam.
12.7.1.2.2 Determine Design Moments when Torsion is Included

factored moments and torsion for each load combination at a particular beam
section are obtained by factoring the corresponding moments and torsion for
different load cases with the corresponding load factors.
The equivalent moment at a particular design station is computed as described

in the following text. The beam section is then designed for the maximum posi-
tive and maximum negative factored moments obtained from all the of the load
combinations. Positive beam moments produce bottom steel. In such cases, the
moments produce top steel. In such cases, the beam may be designed as a rec-
tangular or an inverted flanged beam.
The equivalent moment is calculated from the following equation:
Me1 =Mu+ Mt , where (IS 22.5.3.1)
Beam Design 12 - 11
2D
M t = Tu 1+
b
and D and b are the overall depth and width of the beam, respectively.
If Mt exceeds Mu, additional reinforcement will be computed for the moment

Me2 applied in the opposite sense of Mu. Effectively, this will result in addition-
al longitudinal reinforcement on the compression face of the beam due to re-
versal of the moment sign. The additional moment Me2 is computed using the
following equation:
Me2 = Mt − Mu (IS 22.5.3.2)
In addition to the preceding equation, when Mt exceeds Mu the beam shall be

designed to withstand an equivalent transverse moment Me3 not acting simulta-
neously with Me1, given by the following equation:
 2b 
2 1+ 
 x1  D
M e3 = M t 1 +   
 2e   1 + 2 D  (IS 22.5.3.3)
 
 b 
where x1 is the smaller dimension of the closed hoop used as a torsional shear
reinforcement and e = T / V.
After the design moments have been worked out, the design proceeds with
equivalent moments for their respective axes of application, as previously out-
lined.

the concrete.
The design procedure is based on the parabolic stress block, as shown in Figure
12-1. (IS 22.1.1(c))
12 - 12 Beam Design
ε = 0.0035 0.67 fck γ m

b
ε ′s Cs 0.42 xu
A′s d′ xu
C
de
dp
ε sp Tps Tcps
Ts Tcs
As Aps εs
BEAM STRAIN STRESS

(L- and T-beams) is summarized in the subsections that follow. All beams are
designed for major direction flexure and shear only.

In that case, the moment capacity M u0 is determined as follows:
The maximum depth of the compression zone, xu,max, is calculated based on the
limitation that the tension reinforcement strain shall not be less than εsmin.
 ε c max 
xu ,max =  d
where,
εcmax = 0.0035
Beam Design 12 - 13
Therefore, the limit xu ≤ xu ,max is set for tension-controlled sections. The duc-
tility of a section is controlled by limiting the xu/d ratio (IS 21.1.1(d)):
xu/d ≤ 0.5 (IS 21.1.1(d))
SAFE determines the depth of the neutral axis, xu, by imposing force equilibri-
stress in the post-tensioning steel, fpb is computed based on strain compatibility
compute the stress, fps in the post-tensioning steel. Based on the calculated fpb,
the depth of the neutral axis is recalculated, and fpb is further updated. After this
iteration process has converged, the depth of compression block, xu is deter-
mined:
 If xu ≤ xu,max (IS 21.1.1(d)), the moment capacity of the section, provided by

= (
Mu0 Aps f pb d p − 0.42 xu )
 If xu > xu,max (IS 21.1.1(d)), a failure condition is declared.
controlled case. In that case, it is assumed that the depth of the neutral axis xu
is equal to xu,max . The stress in the post-tensioning steel, fpb, is then calculated
C = 0.36 fck xu b
bal
=T Aps f pb + Asbal fsbal
bal
0.36 fck xu b − Aps f pb
Asbal =
fsbal
12 - 14 Beam Design
Mubal= Aps f pb
bal
( )
d p − 0.42 xu + Asbal fsbal ( ds − 0.42 xu )
relationship. This case does not involve any iteration in determining the depth
of neutral axis, xu .

When M < Mu0 , the amount of post-tensioning steel is adequate to resist the
design moment Mu. Minimum reinforcement is provided to satisfy the flexural
cracking requirements (IS 18.6.3.3(a)).

steel and tension reinforcement should result in xu < xu,max .
When Mu0 < M < Mubal , SAFE determines the required area of tension rein-
quired area of tension reinforcement. Since M is bounded by Mu0 at the lower
end and Mubal at the upper end and Mu0 is associated with As = 0 and Mubal is
associated with As = Asbal , the required area will be within the range of 0 to Asbal.

12.7.1.3.1.3 Case 3: Post-tensioning steel and tension reinforcement are

not adequate
assumes that the depth of the neutral axis, xu , is equal to xu,max . The values of
bal
fpb and fs reach their respective balanced condition values, f pb and fsbal . Then
the area of compression reinforcement, A′s , is determined as follows:
Beam Design 12 - 15

Mus= M − Mubal
Mus
A 's = , where
( 0.87 f 's − f 'c )( ds − d ' )
x − d'
=f 's Es ε c max  u,max  ≤ 0.87 f y
 xu,max 

en by:
Mus
Ascom =
0.87 f y ( ds − d ' )

ment), the calculation of the reinforcement area is exactly the same
as described previously, i.e., no flanged beam data is used.

In that case, the moment capacity Mu0 is determined as follows:
12 - 16 Beam Design
0.67 f cu γ m 0.67 fcu γ m

ε = 0.0035
bf Df
0.42 xu
d′ ε ′s Cs
A′s xu Cf
dp
de Cw
Aps ε ps Tps
As Ts Tw Tf
εs
bw
BEAM STRAIN STRESS
The maximum depth of the compression zone, xu,max, is calculated based on the
limitation that the tension reinforcement strain shall not be less than εsmin.
 εcmax 
xu,max =  dp
 εcmax + εsmin 
where,
εcmax = 0.0035
Therefore, the limit xu ≤ xu,max is set for tension-controlled sections. The ductil-
ity of a section is controlled by limiting the xu / d ratio (IS 21.1.1(d)):
xu / d ≤ 0.5 (IS 21.1.1(d))
SAFE determines the depth of the neutral axis, xu, by imposing force equilibri-
stress in the post-tensioning steel, fpb, is computed based on strain compatibility
compute the stress, fps, in the post-tensioning steel. Based on the calculated fpb,
the depth of the neutral axis is recalculated, and fpb is further updated. After the
Beam Design 12 - 17
iteration process has converged, the depth of the compression block, xu, is de-
termined as follows:
 If xu ≤ xu,max (IS 21.1.1(d)), the moment capacity of the section provided by

post-tensioning steel only is computed as:
= (
Mu0 Aps f pb d p − 0.42 xu )
 If xu > xu,max (IS 21.1.1(d)), a failure condition is declared.
If M > Mu0 , SAFE calculates the moment capacity and the As required at the
controlled case. In that case, it is assumed that the depth of neutral axis xu is
equal to xu,max . The stress in the post-tensioning steel, fpb, is then calculated
 If xu ≤ Df, the subsequent calculations for As are exactly the same as previ-
ously defined for the rectangular beam design. However, in this case, the
width of the beam is taken as bf. Compression reinforcement is required
when xu > xu,max .
 If xu > Df, the calculation for As is given by:
C = 0.36 fck xu Accom
Accom = (
b f D f + bw xu,max − D f )
bal
=T Aps f pb + Asbal fsbal
0.36 fck xu Accom − Aps f pb

bal
Asbal =
fsbal
12 - 18 Beam Design
Mubal= Aps f pb
bal
( )
d p − 0.42 xu + Asbal fsbal ( ds − 0.42 xu )
of the neutral axis, xu .

When M < Mu0 , the amount of post-tensioning steel is adequate to resist the
cracking requirements (IS 18.6.3.3(a)).

steel and tension reinforcement should result in xu < xu,max .
When Mu0 < M < Mubal , SAFE determines the required area of tension rein-
quired area of tension reinforcement. Since M is bounded by Mu0 at the lower
end and Mubal at the upper end and Mu0 is associated with As = 0 and Mubal is as-
sociated with As = Asbal , the required area will fall within the range of 0 to As .

12.7.1.3.2.2.3 Case 3: Post-tensioning steel and tension reinforcement are not

adequate
When M > Mubal , compression reinforcement is required. In that case, SAFE
assumes that the depth of the neutral axis, xu , is equal to xu,max . The values of
bal
fpb and fs reach their respective balanced condition values, f pb and fsbal . Then
the area of compression reinforcement, A′s , is determined as follows:
Beam Design 12 - 19

Mus= M − Mubal

Mus
A 's = , where
( 0.87 f 's − f 'c )( ds − d ' )
x − d'
=f 's Es ε c max  u,max  ≤ 0.87 f y
 xu,max 
en by:
Mus
Ascom =
0.87 f y ( ds − d ' )

flexural strength of sections or to comply with the shear link requirements. The
minimum flexural tension reinforcement required for a beam section to comply
with the cracking requirements must be separately investigated by the user.
For bonded tendons, there are no minimum untensioned reinforcement

requirements.

(IS:456 26.5.1.1, 26.5.1.2).
12.7.2 Design Beam Shear Reinforcement (Torsion Excluded)

12 - 20 Beam Design
ular beam, for a particular load combination, at a particular station due to the
beam major shear, the following steps are involved (IS 22.4):
 Determine the factored shear force, V.
 Determine the shear force, vc, that can be resisted by the concrete.

with these steps.

sponding shear forces and moments for different load cases with the corre-
sponding load combination factors.

The design ultimate shear resistance of the concrete alone, Vco, should be con-
sidered at sections as follows:
 Uncracked sections in flexure (M < Mo)
 Cracked sections in flexural (M ≥ Mo)
where,
M is the design bending moment at the section due to the load combination,

extreme tension fiber; in this calculation only 0.8 times the stress due to post-
tensioning should be taken into account.
Case 1: Uncracked section in flexure
=Vco 0.67bw D (f t
2
+ 0.8 fcp ft ) (IS 22.4.1)
Beam Design 12 - 21
where,
ft is the maximum design principal stress, (IS 22.4.1)
ft = 0.24 fck , and (IS 22.4.1)
fcp = design compressive stress at the centoidal axis due to

prestress, taken as positive. (IS 22.4.1)
Vc = Vco + P sin β (IS 22.4.1)
Case 2: Cracked section in flexure
 f pe  V
 1 − 0.55
Vcr =  vc bv d + M o (IS 22.4.2)
 f  M
 pu 
In the preceding, the shear stress capacity of the concrete, νc is taken from IS
Table 6 for a provided percentage of post-tensioning steel in the section.
Vcr ≥ 0.1bw d fck (IS 22.4.2)
Vc = min (Vco ,Vcr ) + P sin β (IS 22.4.2)

For the section under consideration, compute the following:
V
v= , Acv =bwd, where
Acv
v ≤ vmax, and (IS 22.4.4)
vmax will not exceed the values defined in IS Table 7

(IS 22.4.3.1):
 If v ≤ 0.5vc then no shear reinforcement is to be provided
12 - 22 Beam Design
 If 0.5 vc < v ≤ vc,
Asv 0.4 bw
= (IS 22.4.3.1)
sv 0.87 f yv
 If vc < v ≤ vmax,
Asv
=
( v − vc ) bv (IS 22.4.3.2)
sv 0.87 f yv
 If v > vmax, a failure condition is declared. (IS 22.4.4)
In the preceding expressions, a limit is imposed on fyv as
fyv ≤ 415 MPa (IS 40.4)
The maximum of all of the calculated Asv / sv values, obtained from each load
load combination.

12.7.3 Design Beam Shear Reinforcement (Torsion Included)

The transverse reinforcement to resist shear and torsion is designed for each
load combination at each station along the length of the beam. In designing the
transverse reinforcement for a particular beam, for a particular load combina-
tion, at a particular station due to the beam major shear and torsion, the follow-
ing steps are involved (IS 22.5.4):
 Determine the factored shear force, V, and factored torsion T.
 Determine the shear force, Vc1, that can be resisted by the concrete.
 Determine the torsional moment, Tc1, that is carried by concrete.
 Determine the shear reinforcement required to carry the balance shear and
torsion.
Beam Design 12 - 23
these steps.
12.7.3.1 Determine Shear Force and Torsional Moment

In the design of the beam transverse reinforcement, the shear force and
torsional moment for each load combination at a particular beam station are
obtained by factoring the corresponding shear force and torsional moment for
different load cases with the corresponding load combination factors.
12.7.3.2 Determine Torsional Moment Carried by Concrete

The torsional moment carried by the concrete is computed using the following
equation:
 e 
Tc1 = Tc  
 e + ec  , where (IS 22.5.4.1)
 b 
Tc = ∑1.5b 2 D1 − λ p f ck
 30 
e = T /V
ec= Tc / Vc
 12 f 
cp
λ p = 1 + 
 f ck 
Vc = min (Vco,Vcr)
Please refer to the previous section for the relevant equations for Vco and Vcr.
12.7.3.3 Determine Shear Force Carried by Concrete

The shear force carried by the concrete is computed using the following equa-
tion:
 e 
Vc1 = Vc   , where (IS 22.5.4.2)
 e + ec 
12 - 24 Beam Design
Vc = min (Vco,Vcr)
e = T /V
ec= Tc / Vc

For the section under consideration, compute the area of transverse reinforce-
ment using the following two equations and provide the larger area:
Asv Mt
= 2 (IS22.5.4.3)
sv 1.5b1d1 f yv
Asv  (V − Vc )   (T − Tc1 ) 
=   2 +   (IS22.5.4.3)
sv  0.87 f yv d1   0.87b1d1 f yv 
In the preceding expressions, a limit is imposed on fyv as
fyv ≤ 415 MPa. (IS 40.4)
The maximum of all of the calculated Asv /sv values obtained from each load
load combination.
The beam transverse shear and torsional reinforcement requirements consid-

ered by the program are based purely on shear and torsional strength considera-
tions. Any minimum stirrup requirements to satisfy spacing and volumetric
considerations must be investigated independently of the program by the user.
12.8 Slab Design

design is carried out based on the limit state of collapse for prestressed con-
crete, as described in IS 1343. In general, provisions of IS:456 will also apply
to the design of post-tensioned concrete slabs, as described in the following
Slab Design 12 - 25

the element boundaries. The slab flexural design procedure for each load com-
bination involves the following:
These two steps are described in the text that follows and are repeated for every
load combination. The maximum reinforcement calculated for the top and bot-
tom of the slab within each design strip, along with the corresponding control-
ling load combination, is obtained and reported.


12 - 26 Slab Design
cordingly.

There are no minimum requirements for un-tensioned reinforcement in one-
way bonded slabs.

slab depth on each side of the column. The length of reinforcement is at least
0.2L where L is the span of the slab.
There are no minimum requirements for span zones. However, additional un-
(Concrete Society, Technical report 43):
0.36 f ci
exceeds 0.15 f cu .

(IS 26.5.1.1).

Slab Design 12 - 27

The punching shear is checked on a critical section at a distance of d / 2 from
the face of the support (IS:456 30.6.1). For rectangular columns and concen-
trated loads, the critical area is taken as a rectangular area with the sides paral-
lel to the sides of the columns or the point loads (IS:456 30.6.1). Figure 12-3
shows the auto punching perimeters considered by SAFE for the various col-
umn shapes. The column location (i.e., interior, edge, corner) and the punching
d 2
d 2 d 2
d 2
d 2 d 2

The fraction of unbalanced moment transferred by flexure is taken to be αMu
taken to be (1 − α) Mu (IS:456 30.6.2.2), where
1
α= (IS:456 30.3.3)
1 + ( 2 3 ) a1 a2
a1 is the width of the critical section measured in the direction of the span
12 - 28 Slab Design
a2 is the width of the critical section measured in the direction perpen-

dicular to the span.

The concrete punching shear factored strength is taken as:
vc = ks τc, where (IS:456 30.6.3.1)
ks = 0.5 + βc ≤ 1.0, (IS:456 30.6.3.1)
τc = 0.25 fck , and (IS:456 30.6.3.1)
β c = ratio of the minimum to the maximum

dimensions of the support section


The use of shear studs as shear reinforcement in slabs is permitted.

reinforcement is as previously determined, but limited to:
vc ≤ 0.5τ c (IS 31.6.3.2)
Slab Design 12 - 29

Vmax = 1.5 τ c bod (IS 31.6.3.2)
lows (IS:456 31.6.3.2).
Av =
(Vu − 0.5Vc ) (IS 31.6.3.2, 40.4)
0.87 f y
 If Vu > Vmax, a failure condition is declared. (IS 31.6.3.2)
 If Vu exceeds the maximum permitted value of Vmax, the concrete section


column.

edge
d 2 d 2 Iy
gy
gx
s0 s0 s0
Iy x x gx
Iy
Critical d 2
section
centroid Free
edge y x
y
centroid
Ix
Ix

12 - 30 Slab Design
shall not exceed d / 2. The spacing between adjacent shear reinforcement in the
direction parallel to the column face.

umns respectively.

Spacing
not be less than the minimum cover specified in IS:456 26.4 plus half of the
exceed 2d. The limits of so and the spacing, s, between the peripheral lines are
specified as:
so ≤ 0. 5d
s ≤ 0.5d
g ≤ 2d
Slab Design 12 - 31
Chapter 13
Design for NZS 3101:06
This chapter describes in detail the various aspects of the concrete design pro-
cedure that is used by SAFE when the New Zealand code NZS 3101:06 [NZS
06] is selected. Various notations used in this chapter are listed in Table 13-1.
For referencing to the pertinent sections of the New Zealand code in this chap-
ter, a prefix “NZS” followed by the section number is used.

13.1 Notations
Table 13-1 List of Symbols Used in the NZS 3101:06 Code

Aco Area enclosed by perimeter of the section, sq-mm
Acv Area of concrete used to determine shear stress, sq-mm
Notations 13 - 1

Ag Gross area of concrete, sq-mm
Al Area of longitudinal reinforcement for torsion, sq-mm
Aps Area of prestressing steel in flexural tension zone, sq-mm
Ao Gross area enclosed by shear flow path, sq-mm
As Area of tension reinforcement, sq-mm
A's Area of compression reinforcement, sq-mm
As(required) Area of steel required for tension reinforcement, sq-mm
At /s Area of closed shear reinforcement per unit length for
torsion, sq-mm/mm
Av Area of shear reinforcement, sq-mm
Av /s Area of shear reinforcement per unit length, sq-mm/mm
bf Effective width of flange (flanged section), mm
b0 Perimeter of the punching critical section, mm
b1 Width of the punching critical section in the direction of
bending, mm
direction of bending, mm
c Distance from extreme compression fiber to the neutral axis,
mm
cb Distance from extreme compression fiber to neutral axis at
balanced condition, mm
d Distance from extreme compression fiber to tension rein-
forcement, mm
13 - 2 Notations
Chapter 13 - Design for NZS 3101:06

d' Distance from extreme compression fiber to compression
reinforcement, mm
MPa
f' c Specified compressive strength of concrete, MPa
prestress, MPa
fps Stress in prestressing steel at nominal flexural strength, MPa
ft Extreme fiber stress in tension in the precompressed tensile
zone using gross section properties, MPa
f' s Stress in the compression reinforcement, psi
fy Specified yield strength of flexural reinforcement, MPa
fyt Specified yield strength of shear reinforcement, MPa
h Overall depth of sections, mm
hf Thickness of slab or flange, mm
ka Factor accounting for influence of aggregate size on shear
strength
kd Factor accounting for influence of member depth on shear
strength
mm
tion, N-mm
M* Factored design moment at a section, N-mm
Notations 13 - 3

pc Outside perimeter of concrete section, mm
po Perimeter of area Ao, mm
*
T Factored design torsion at a section, N-mm
tc Assumed wall thickness of an equivalent tube for the gross
section, mm
to Assumed wall thickness of an equivalent tube for the area
enclosed by the shear flow path, mm
Vc Shear force resisted by concrete, N
V* Factored shear force at a section, N
v* Average design shear stress at a section, MPa
vc Design shear stress resisted by concrete, MPa
vmax Maximum design shear stress permitted at a section, MPa
vtn Shear stress due to torsion, MPa
αs Punching shear factor accounting for column location
α1 Concrete strength factor to account for sustained loading and
equivalent stress block
εc,max Maximum usable compression strain allowed in the extreme
concrete fiber, (0.003 in/in)
φb Strength reduction factor for bending
φs Strength reduction factor for shear and torsion
shear
13 - 4 Notations

for which the structure needs to be designed. For NZS 3101:06, if a structure is
reversible, the load combinations in the following subsections may need to be
considered (AS/NZS 1170.0, 4.2.2). For post-tensioned concrete design, the
user can specify the prestressing load (PT) by providing the tendon profile or
by using the load balancing options in the program. The default load combina-
tions for post-tensioning also are defined in the subsections that follow.

fer of prestress forces in accordance with NZS 3101:06 clause 19.3.3.5.1(b).
1.0D + 1.0PT

prestress for serviceability in accordance with NZS 19.3.3.5.1. It is assumed
that all long-term losses have occurred already at the service stage.
1.0D + 1.0PT
1.0D + 1.0L + 1.0PT

prestress in accordance with NZS 19.3.3.5.1. The permanent load for this load
combination is taken as 50 percent of the live load (taken from ACI 318-08
clause 18.4.2(a)). It is assumed that all long-term losses have occurred already
at the service stage.

1.0D + 1.0PT
1.0D + 0.5L + 1.0 PT

prestress in accordance with AS/NZS 1170.0, 4.2.2.
The design combinations required for shear design of beams and punching
shear require the full PT forces (primary and secondary). Flexural design re-
quires only the hyperstatic (secondary) forces. The hyperstatic (secondary)
forces are determined automatically by SAFE by subtracting out the primary
PT moments when the flexural design is carried out.
1.35D + 1.0PT* (AS/NZS 1170.0, 4.2.2(a))
1.2D + 1.5L + 1.0PT* (AS/NZS 1170.0, 4.2.2(b))
1.2D + 1.5(0.75 PL) + 1.0PT* (AS/NZS 1170.0, 4.2.2(b))
1.2D + 0.4L + 1.0S + 1.0PT* (AS/NZS 1170.0, 4.2.2(g))
1.2D ± 1.0W + 1.0PT* (AS/NZS 1170.0, 4.2.2(d))

0.9D ± 1.0W + 1.0PT* (AS/NZS 1170.0, 4.2.2(e))
1.2D + 0.4L ± 1.0W + 1.0PT* (AS/NZS 1170.0, 4.2.2(d))
1.0D ± 1.0E + 1.0PT* (AS/NZS 1170.0, 4.2.2(f))

1.0D + 0.4L ± 1.0E + 1.0PT* (AS/NZS 1170.0, 4.2.2(f))
*
for live load representing storage areas. These also are the default design load
combinations in SAFE whenever the NZS 3101 code is used. If roof live load
is treated separately or if other types of loads are present, other appropriate

The upper and lower limits of f' c shall be as follows:

25 ≤ f 'c ≤ 100 MPa (NZS 5.2.1)
The lower characteristic yield strength of longitudinal reinforcement, fy, should

be equal to or less than 500 MPa (NZS 5.3.3). The lower characteristic yield
strength of transverse (stirrup) reinforcement, fyt, should not be greater than
500 MPa for shear or 800 MPa for confinement (NZS 5.3.3).
The code allows use of f' c and fy beyond the given limits, provided special
study is conducted (NZS 5.2.1).
SAFE also checks the tensile strength in the prestressing steel (NZS 19.3.3.6).
The permissible tensile stresses in all types of prestressing steel, in terms of the
specified minimum tensile strength fpy, are summarized as follows:
a. Due to tendon jacking force: 0.94 fpy
b. Immediately after prestress transfer: 0.82 fpy

The strength reduction factors, φ, are applied to the specified strength to obtain
the design strength provided by a member. The φ factors for flexure, shear, and
torsion are as follows:
φb = 0.85 for flexure (NZS 2.3.2.2)

φs = 0.75 for shear and torsion (NZS 2.3.2.2)
Strength Reduction Factors 13 - 7


tures
The utimate limit state of prestressed members for flexure and axial loads shall
be based on assumptions given in NZS 7.4.2.

assumption that a plane section remains plane (NZS 7.4.2.2).
 The design stress in the concrete in compression is taken as 0.45 fcu. The
equal to 0.003 (N ZS 7.4.2.3).
 Tensile strength of the concrete is ignored (NZS 7.4.2.5).

ment (compression or tension) is derived from the assumption that a plane
section remains plane (NZS 7.4.2.2).
sumptions given in NZS 19.3.3.
entire load range (NZS 19.3.3.2).
NZS 19.3.3.5.1.


(NZS 19.3.3.5.2):
13 - 8 Design Assumptions for Prestressed Concrete Structures


stress in tension in the precompressed tensile zone at service loads (NZS
19.3.2).

sile stress.
stresses at service load are calculated based on the cracked section (NZS
19.3.3).
Prestressed
Transition between
Assumed Behavior Uncracked Cracked Cracked
No requirement
calculation at service loads 19.3.3.3 19.3.3.3 19.3.3.3
Allowable stress at transfer 19.3.3.6.1 19.3.3.6.1 19.3.3.6.1 No requirement

19.3.3.6.2 19.3.3.6.2 No requirement No requirement
Tensile stress at service loads 19.3.2 ≤ 0.7 f c′ 0.7 f c′ < ft ≤ f c′ No requirement No requirement

time dependent prestress losses) are checked against the following limits (NZS
19.3.3.5.1 and 19.3.3.5.2):

 Extreme fiber stress in tension: 0.25 f ′ci (NZS 19.3.3.5.2(b))

simply supported members: 0.5 f ′ci


to prestress plus total load: 0.60 f ′c (NZS 19.3.3.5.1)

loads:
 Class U beams and one-way slabs:
ft ≤ 0.7 f ′c (NZS 19.3.2, 19.3.3.5.2(a))
 Class U two-way slabs:
ft ≤ 0.7 f 'c (NZS 19.3.2, 19.3.3.5.2(a))
 Class T beams:
0.7 f 'c < ft ≤ f 'c (NZS 19.3.2, 19.3.3.5.2(a))
 Class C beams:
ft ≥ f 'c (NZS 19.3.2, 19.3.3.5.2(a))
For Class C prestressed flexural members, checks at service loads are not
required by the code. However, for Class C prestressed flexural members not

ment nearest the extreme tension face shall not exceed that given by NZS
19.3.3.5.3. It is assumed that the user has checked the requirements of NZS
19.3.3.5.3 independently, as these sections are not checked by the program.

bers at long-term service loads and after all prestress losses occur are checked
0.45 f ′c (NZS 19.3.3.5.2(a))

steel (NZS 19.3.3.6.1). The permissible tensile stress checks in all types of pre-
stressing steel in terms of the specified minimum tensile stress, fpu, and the min-
imum yield stress, fpy, are summarized as follows:
 Due to tendon jacking force: min(0.94fpy, 0.80fpu) (NZS 19.3.3.6.1 (a))
 Immediately after force transfer: min(0.82fpy, 0.74fpu) (NZS 19.3.3.6.1 (b))
 At anchors and couplers after

force transfer: 0.70fpu (NZS 19.3.3.6.1 (c))
13.7 Beam Design

Beam Design 13 - 11


moments can be used to calculate bottom reinforcement. In such cases, the

13 - 12 Beam Design
the concrete.

shown in Figure 13-1 (NZS 7.4.2.7). Furthermore, it is assumed that the com-
pression carried by the concrete is 0.75 times that which can be carried at the
balanced condition (NZS 9.3.8.1). When the applied moment exceeds the mo-
ment capacity at the balanced condition, the area of compression reinforcement
is calculated assuming that the additional moment will be carried by compres-
sion reinforcement and additional tension reinforcement.
(L- and T-beams) is summarized in the subsections that follow. The beams are
designed for major direction flexure, shear, and torsion only.
ε = 0.003 α1 f ′c
b
A′s f ′s Cs
d′ c a = β1c
ds dp
Ap
εp Tcps
Ts Tcs
As εs
BEAM STRAIN STRESS
Beam Design 13 - 13

requirements (NZS 19.3.6.7).
which is equal to 0.0044 for tension-controlled behavior (NZS 7.4.2.8,
19.3.6.6.2):
εc
cb = d (NZS 7.4.2.8, 19.3.6.6.2)
ε c + ε s,min
The maximum allowed depth of the rectangular compression block, amax, is

given by:
amax = 0.75β1cb (NZS 7.4.2.7, 9.3.8.1)
=β1 0.85 for f ′c ≤ 30, (NZS 7.4.2.7)
β1 = 0.85 − 0.008( f ′c − 30), 0.65 ≤ β1 ≤ 0.85 (NZS 7.4.2.7)
a = β1c
 If a ≤ amax (NZS 9.3.8.1), the moment capacity of the section provided by

post-tensioning steel only is computed as:
 a
=φ M n0 φb Aps f ps  d p − 
 2
13 - 14 Beam Design
 If a > amax (NZS 9.3.8.1), a failure condition is declared.
If M * > φ M n0 , SAFE calculates the moment capacity and the As required at the
equal to cmax. The stress in the post-tensioning steel, fps is then calculated based
on strain compatibility, and the area of required tension reinforcement, As, is
determined by imposing force equilibrium, i.e., C = T.
C = α1 f ′c amax b
=T Aps f psbal + Asbal fsbal
α1 f ′c amax b − Aps f psbal

Asbal =
fsbal

M nbal φb Aps f psbal  d p −
φ=  + φb As fs  ds − 2 
 2   
of the neutral axis, c.

*

requirements.

resist M*, and therefore the required area of tension reinforcement is computed
Beam Design 13 - 15

When M u0 < M * < M ubal , SAFE determines the required area of tension rein-
end and M ubal at the upper end and M u0 is associated with As = 0 and M ubal is
Asbal.
The tension reinforcement is to be placed at the bottom if M* is positive, or at

the top if M* is negative.
13.7.1.2.1.3 Case 3: Post-tensioning steel and tension reinforcement are not

adequate
When M * > M ubal , compression reinforcement is required (NZS 9.3.8.1). In
that case, SAFE assumes that the depth of neutral axis, c, is equal to cmax . The
bal

reinforcement is:
M=
us M * − M ubal
Mus
A′s = , where
( f ′s − α1 f ′c )( ds − d' )φb
 c − d' 
=f ′s ε c ,max Es   ≤ fy (NZS 7.4.2.2, 7.4.2.4)
 c 

en by:
13 - 16 Beam Design
M us
Ascom =
φb f y ( d s − d ')
be placed at the top if M* is positive, and vice versa if M* is negative.

In designing for a factored negative moment, M* (i.e., designing top reinforce-

which is equal to 0.0044 for tension-controlled behavior (NZS 7.4.2.8,
19.3.6.6.2):
εc
cb = d (NZS 7.4.2.8, 19.3.6.6.2)
ε c + ε s,min
The maximum allowed depth of the rectangular compression block, amax, is

given by:
amax = 0.75β1cb (NZS 7.4.2.7, 9.3.8.1)

=β1 0.85 for f ′c ≤ 30, (NZS 7.4.2.7)
β1 = 0.85 − 0.008( f ′c − 30), 0.65 ≤ β1 ≤ 0.85 (NZS 7.4.2.7)
Beam Design 13 - 17
ε = 0.003 α1 f ′c
bf hf
d′ f ′s Cs
A′s
c
d
Ap
ε ps
Tw
As εs Ts
bw
BEAM STRAIN STRESS
compute the stress in the post-tensioning steel. Based on the calculated fps, the
depth of the neutral axis is recalculated, and fps is further updated. After this it-
eration process has converged, the depth of the rectangular compression block
a = β1c
 If a ≤ amax (NZS 9.3.8.1), the moment capacity of the section, provided by

 a
=φ M n0 φb Aps f ps  d p − 
 2
 If a > amax (NZS 9.3.8.1), a failure condition is declared.
If M * > φ M n0 , SAFE calculates the moment capacity and the As required at the
13 - 18 Beam Design
equal to cmax. The stress in the post-tensioning steel, fps is then calculated based
C = α1 f 'c Accomp
Accom = )
bal
α1 f 'c Accom − Aps f psbal
A s =
f sbal
of neutral axis, c.

When M * < M u0 , the amount of post-tensioning steel is adequate to resist the
requirements, i.e., M * < M u0 .
Beam Design 13 - 19

resist M*, and therefore the required area of tension reinforcement is computed
When M u0 < M * < M ubal , SAFE determines the required area of tension rein-
required area of tension reinforcement. Since M* is bounded by M u0 at the
lower end and M ubal at the upper end, and M u0 is associated with As = 0 and
M ubal is associated with As = Asbal , the required area will be within the range of
0 to As .
The tension reinforcement is to be placed at the bottom if M* is positive, or at

the top if M* is negative.

adequate
When M * > M ubal , compression reinforcement is required (BS 3.4.4.4). In that
case SAFE assumes that the depth of the neutral axis, c, is equal to cmax . The
bal
lows:

reinforcement is:
M=
us M * − φb M ubal

Mus
A′s = , where
( f 's − α1 f 'c )( ds − d ' )φb
c − d '
f ' s = Es ε c max  max  ≤ fy
 cmax 
13 - 20 Beam Design

en by:
M us
Ascom =
φb f y ( d s − d ')

φ M n ≥ 1.2M cr (NZS 19.3.6.6.3)
quired by AS/NZS 1170 and NZS 1170.5.

The minimum flexural tension reinforcement required in a beam section with
unbonded tendon is given by the following limit:
As ≥ 0.004 A (NZS 19.3.6.7.1)
where A is the area of the cross-section between the flexural tension face and
Beam Design 13 - 21

As ≤ 
A′s ≤ 

beam for a particular load combination, the following steps are involved:
 Determine the factored shear force, V*.
 Determine the shear force, Vc, that can be resisted by the concrete.

with these steps.
13.7.2.1 Determine Shear Force and Moment

combination at a particular beam section are obtained by factoring the corre-

The shear force carried by the concrete, Vc, is calculated using the simplified
procedure given in NZS 19.3.11.2.1. It is assumed that the effective prestress
force is equal to or greater than 40% of the tensile strength of flexural rein-
forcement and the member is not subjected to axial tension or self-strain action
such as temperature, which can induced significant tensile stresses over part of
the element.
The shear strength provided by concrete, Vc, is given by:
13 - 22 Beam Design
 f ′c 5V * d 
=Vc  + c
 bw d (NZS 19.3.11.2.1)
 20 M * 
 
V * dc
≤ 1.0 (NZS 19.3.11.2.1)
M*
where V * and M * are the design moment and shear force acting simultaneous-
ly at the section considered, and dc is the distance from extreme compression
fiber to centroid of the prestressed reinforcement.
The following limit is also enforced:
0.14 f ′c bw d ≤ Vc ≤ 0.4 f ′c bw d (NZS 19.3.11.2.1)

The average shear stress is computed for rectangular and flanged sections as:
*
* V
ν = (NZS 7.5.1)
bw d
The average shear stress is limited to a maximum limit of,
vmax = min {0.2 f ′c , 8 MPa} (NZS 7.5.2, 9.3.9.3.3, 19.3.11.1)
The shear reinforcement is computed as follows:
 If ν* ≤ φs (v c 2 )
Av
=0 (NZS 9.3.9.4.13)
s
 If φs (v c 2 ) < ν* ≤ φsνc,
Av Av ,min
= (NZS 9.3.9.4.15, 19.3.11.3.4(b))
s s
Beam Design 13 - 23
1 bw
16 fc′ f
Av ,min  yt
= min  (NZS 9.3.9.4.15, 19.3.11.3.4(b))
s  Aps f pu d
 80 f d d
 y w
 If φsνc < ν* ≤ φsνmax,
Av
=
(
v * − φ s vc ) (NZS 9.3.9.4.2)
s φ s f yt d
Av Av ,min
≥ (NZS 9.3.9.4.15, 19.3.11.3.4(b))
s s
 If ν* > νmax,
a failure condition is declared. (NZS 7.5.2, 9.3.9.3.3)
If the beam depth h is less than the maximum of 300 mm and 0.5bw, no shear
reinforcement is required (AS 9.3.9.4.13).
load combination.


13 - 24 Beam Design

torsions for different load cases with the corresponding load combination
factors.

member can occur because of redistribution of internal forces upon cracking,
the design T* is permitted to be reduced in accordance with the code (NZS
7.6.1.3). However, the program does not automatically redistribute the internal
forces and reduce T*. If redistribution is desired, the user should release the tor-
sional degree of freedom (DOF) in the structural model.

For torsion design, special section properties, such as Aco, Ao, pc, tc, and to, are
calculated. These properties are described in the following (NZS 7.1).
Aco = Area enclosed by outside perimeter of concrete cross-section
pc = Outside perimeter of concrete cross-section
po = Perimeter of area Ao
tc = Assumed wall thickness of an equivalent tube for the gross

section
to = Assumed wall thickness of an equivalent tube for the area

enclosed by the shear flow path
In calculating the section properties involving reinforcement, such as Ao, po,

and to, it is assumed that the distance between the centerline of the outermost
to a 38 mm clear cover and a 12 mm stirrup. For torsion design of flanged
Beam Design 13 - 25
tion are given as:
Aco = bh (NZS 7.1)
Ao = (b − 2c)(h − 2c) (NZS 7.1)
pc = 2b + 2h (NZS 7.1)
po = 2(b − 2c) + 2(h − 2c) (NZS 7.1)
tc = 0.75 Ao / po (NZS 7.1)
to = 0.75 Aco / pc (NZS 7.1)
where, the section dimensions b, h, and c are shown in Figure 13-3.
Similarly, the special section properties for a flanged beam section are given
as:
Aco = bwh + (bf – bw)hf (NZS 7.1)
Ao = (bw – 2c)(h – 2c) (NZS 7.1)
pc = 2bf + 2h (NZS 7.1)
po = 2(h – 2c) + 2(bw – 2c) (NZS 7.1)
tc = 0.75 Ao / po (NZS 7.1)
to = 0.75 Aco / pc (NZS 7.1)
in Figure 13-3. Note that the flange width on either side of the beam web is
limited to the smaller of 3hf (NZS 7.6.1.7).
13 - 26 Beam Design
c b − 22c
c c bf
c hdfs c
h − 2c h hh h − 2c
c c
b bw − 2c
bbww


The critical torsion capacity, Tcr, for which the torsion in the section can be
Tcr = φ 0.1Aco t c f 'c (NZS 7.6.1.2)
where Aco and tc are as described in the previous section, and f'c is the specified
concrete compressive strength. The stress due to torsion also should be limited
in order to ignore torsion, defined as:
T*
≤ 0.08 f 'c (NZS 7.6.1.3)
φ 2 Ao t o

If the factored torsion, T*, is less than the threshold limit, Tcr, and meets the
torsion stress limit, torsion can be safely ignored (NZS 7.6.1). In that case, the
program reports that no torsion reinforcement is required. However, if T* ex-
Beam Design 13 - 27
ceeds the threshold limit, it is assumed that the torsional resistance is provided
by closed stirrups and longitudinal bars (NZS 7.6.4.1).
 If T* > Tcr or the torsion stress limit is not met, the required closed stirrup ar-
ea per unit spacing, At / s, is calculated as:
At vtn t o
= (NZS 7.6.4.2)
s f yt
vtn t o po
Al = (NZS 7.6.4.3)
fy
where the torsional shear stress vtn is defined as:
T*
vtn = (NZS 7.6.1.6, 7.6.1.5)
φ 2 Ao t o
The minimum closed stirrups and longitudinal reinforcement shall be such that
the following is satisfied, where At / s can be from any closed stirrups for shear
and Al can include flexure reinforcement, provided it is fully developed.
At Al 1.5 Ao t c
= (NZS 7.6.2)
spo f y Ao
The term A t A l / p o shall not be taken greater than 7A t / s (NZS 7.6.2.3).
vn + vtn < min(0.2 f 'c , 8 MPa) (NZS 7.6.1.8, 7.5.2)

The maximum of all of the calculated Al and At / s values obtained from each
13 - 28 Beam Design

longitudinal rebar requirements to satisfy spacing considerations must be in-
vestigated independently of the program by the user.
13.8 Slab Design

design is carried out based on the ultimate strength design method (NZS
3101:06) for prestressed reinforced concrete, as described in the following sub-

of the element boundaries. The slab flexural design procedure for each load
Slab Design 13 - 29



cordingly.

minimum reinforcement requirements in accordance with NZS 19.3.6.7.1.

be at least L / 6 where L is the span of the slab.
13 - 30 Slab Design
There are no minimum requirements for the span zone. However, additional
untensioned reinforcement shall be designed for the full tension force generat-
ed by assumed flexural tensile stresses in the concrete for the following situa-
tions:
0.36 fci
exceeds 0.17 fc'



the face of the support (NZS 12.7.1(b)). For rectangular columns and concen-
trated loads, the critical area is taken as a rectangular area with the sides paral-
lel to the sides of the columns or the point loads (NZS 12.7.1(b)). Figure 13-4
shows the auto punching perimeters considered by SAFE for the various col-
umn shapes. The column location (i.e., interior, edge, corner) and the punching
Slab Design 13 - 31
d 2
d 2 d 2
d 2
d 2 d 2

The fraction of unbalanced moment transferred by flexure is taken to be γf M*
taken to be γv M*, where
1
γf = (NZS 12.7.7.2 )
1 + (2 3) b1 b2
1
γv = 1 − (NZS 12.7.7.1)
1 + (2 3) b1 b2
span, and b2 is the width of the critical section measured in the direction per-
pendicular to the span.

The concrete punching shear factored strength is taken as the minimum of the
13 - 32 Slab Design
vc = β p f 'c + 0.3 f pc + v p (NZS 19.3.11.2.4)
 α d  
=β p min  0.29,  s + 1.5  12  (NZS 19.3.11.2.4)
  bo  
vp = 0
where, βp is the ratio of the maximum to the minimum dimension of the critical
section (NZS 12.1, 12.7.3.2(a)), b0 is the perimeter of the critical section, and
αs is a scale factor based on the location of the critical section.


α s = 30 for edge columns, (NZS 19.3.11.2.4)

A limit is imposed on the value of f ′c as follows:
λ f ′c ≤ 100 (NZS 5.2.1)


that the effective depth of the slab is greater than or equal to 150 mm, and not
ment is not designed, and the slab thickness should be increased by the user.
Slab Design 13 - 33


reinforcement is determined as:
vc = 0.17 f 'c (NZS 19.3.11.2.4)

vmax = 0.5 f ′c (NZS 12.7.3.4)
Given v*, vc, and vmax, the required shear reinforcement is calculated as follows,
where, φ, is the strength reduction factor.
Av ( vn − vc )
= (NZS 12.7.4.2(a))
s φ f yv d
1
Vs ≥ f 'c bo d (NZS 12.7.4.3)
16
 If vn > φvmax, a failure condition is declared. (NZS 12.7.3.4)
 If vn exceeds the maximum permitted value of φvmax, the concrete section


13 - 34 Slab Design

column.

edge
d 2 d 2 Iy
gy
gx
s0 s0 s0
Iy x x gx
Iy
Critical d 2
section
centroid Free
edge y x
y
centroid
Ix
Ix


umns respectively.

Slab Design 13 - 35
so ≤ 0.5d (NZS 12.7.4.4)
s ≤ 0.5d (NZS 12.7.4.4)
g ≤ 2d (NZS 12.7.4.4)
13 - 36 Slab Design
Chapter 14
Design for Singapore CP 65:99
crete design procedure that is used by SAFE when the user selects the Singa-
pore Standard CP 65 : 99 [CP 1999], which also incorporates Erratum Nos. 1
and BC 2:2008 Design Guide of High Strength Concrete to Singapore Standard
CP 65 [BC 2008]. Various notations used in this chapter are listed in Table 14-
1. For referencing to the pertinent sections of the CP code in this chapter, a pre-
fix “CP” followed by the section number is used.

14.1 Notations
Notations 14 - 1
Table 14-1 List of Symbols Used in the CP 65:99 Code

mm2/mm
zone, mm
MPa
fs′ Compressive stress in a beam compression steel, MPa
fyv Characteristic strength of link reinforcement, MPa (< 500
MPa)
14 - 2 Notations
Chapter 14 - Design for Singapore CP 65:99

1
Concrete shear strength factor, [ f cu 30]

3
k2

0
Mu Design moment resistance of a section with tendons only, N-
mm
tion, N-mm
T Tension force, N
ical section, MPa
MPa
section, MPa
MPa
Notations 14 - 3

amax Depth of neutral axis in a balanced section, mm
z Lever arm, mm
ε ps Strain in prestressing steel

ε ′s Strain in compression steel

of safety, γf (CP 2.4.1.3). For CP 65:99, if a structure is subjected to dead (D),
live (L), pattern live (PL), and wind (W) loads, and considering that wind forc-
es are reversible, the load combinations in the following subsections may need
to be considered (CP 2.4.3, 4.1.7.1, 4.3.4 and 4.3.5).

fer of prestress forces in accordance with CP 65:99 clause 4.3.5. The prestress-
ing forces are considered without any long-term loses for the initial service
load combination check.

1.0D + 1.0PT

1.0D + 1.0PT
1.0D + 1.0L + 1.0PT

prestress in accordance with CP 2.4.3.1.1, Table 2.1.
The design combinations required for shear design of beams and punching
shear require the full PT forces (primary and secondary). Flexural design
requires only the hyperstatic (secondary) forces. The hyperstatic (secondary)
forces are determined automatically by SAFE by subtracting the primary PT
moments when the flexural design is performed.
1.4D + 1.0PT*
1.4D + 1.6L + 1.0PT*
1.4D + 1.6(0.75PL) + 1.0PT*
1.0D ± 1.4W +1.0PT*
1.4D ± 1.4W + 1.0PT*
1.2D + 1.2L ± 1.2W + 1.0PT*
*
arately treated, or other types of loads are present. Note that the automatic
combination, including pattern live load, is assumed and should be reviewed
before using for design.


The specified characteristic strength of untensioned reinforcement is given as

follows (CP 4.1.8.2, 3.1.7.4):
Hot rolled mild reinforcement - 250 MPa (CP 3.1.7.4, Table 3.1)
High yield reinforcement - 460 MPa (CP 3.1.7.4, Table 3.1)
The specified characteristic strength of prestressing steel should conform to SS

2: Part 3: 1987, SS 18: Part 2: 1970, and SS 32 : Part 2: 1988.

CP Table 2.2 (CP 2.4.4.1):

the equations.

tures

assumption that a plane section remains plane (CP 4.3.7.1(a)).
equal to 0.0035 (CP 4.3.7.1(b)).
 Tensile strength of the concrete is ignored (CP 4.3.7.1(c)).

ment (compression or tension) is derived from the assumption that a plane
section remains plane (CP 4.3.7.1(d)).
entire load range (CP 4.3.4.1(a)).
CP 4.3.4.2, 4.3.4.3, and 4.3.5 (CP 4.3.4.1(b)).

or prestress has occurred; in both cases the effects of dead and imposed loads
on the strain and force in the tendons may be ignored (CP 4.3.4.1(c)).


(CP 4.3.4.2 and 4.3.4.3):

strength, ft, the computed extreme fiber stress in tension in the precompressed

sile stress.
Class 2: Flexural tensile stresses with no visible cracking
Class 3: Flexural tensile stresses with surface width of cracks as follows:
 Crack width ≤ 0.1 mm for members in very severe environments

as specified in CP Table 3.2
 Crack width ≤ 0.2 mm for all other members

4.3.5.1 and 4.3.5.2):

 Extreme fiber stress in tension for Class 2:
cracked section.

the following limits (CP 4.3.4.2, 4.3.4.3):





section is uncracked and the user is limiting the tensile stress at service stage as
presented in Table 4.2, modified by the coefficients in Table 4.3 of CP 65 :
1999. The user needs to provide the tension limits for Class 3 elements at
service loads in the Design Preferences (CP 4.3.4.3(c)).
14.7 Beam Design


14 - 10 Beam Design


the concrete.
in Figure 14-1 (CP 3.4.4.4), where εc,max is defined as:
0.0035 if fcu ≤ 60 MPA


ε c,max = ( fcu − 60 )
0.0035 − if fcu > 60 MPA
 50000

exceed 10 percent (i.e., βb ≥ 0.9; CP 3.4.4.4). The code also places a limitation
on the neutral axis depth,
0.5 for fcu ≤ 60 N mm 2

x 
≤ 0.4 for 60 < fcu ≤ 75 N mm 2
d 
0.33 for 75 < fcu ≤ 105 N mm 2
Beam Design 14 - 11
ε 0.67 f cu γ m
b
A′s f ′s Cs
a
d′ x
ds dp
Aps
ε ps Tcps
Ts Tcs
As εs
BEAM STRAIN STRESS
to safeguard against non-ductile failures (CP 3.4.4.4). In addition, the area of

compression reinforcement is calculated assuming that the neutral axis depth
that the design ultimate axial force does not exceed 0.1 fcu Ag (CP 3.4.4.1);
ly.

14 - 12 Beam Design
tral axis has been found, the stress in the post-tensioning reinforcement, fpb, is
The ductility of a section is controlled by limiting the x / d ratio (CP 3.4.4.4):
d − z
 0.45 , for fcu ≤ 60 N mm 2

d − z
=x  , for 60 < fcu ≤ 75 N mm 2 (CP 3.4.4.4)
 0.40
d − z
 0.36 , for 75 < fcu ≤ 105N mm 2

0.9x for f cu ≤ 60 N/mm 2


=a 0.8x for 60 < f cu ≤ 75 N/mm 2 (CP 3.4.4.1(b), 4.3.7.3)

0.72x for 75 < f cu ≤ 105 N/mm 2
depth (CP 3.4.4.1).
z = d − 0. 5a ≤ 0.95de (CP 3.4.4.1(e))

 a
=M u0 Aps f pb  d p −  (CP 4.3.7.3)
 2
equal to cmax. The stress in the post-tensioning steel, fpb, is then calculated
based on strain compatibility for bonded tendons. For unbonded tendons, the
code equations are used to compute the stress, fps, in the post-tensioning steel,
Beam Design 14 - 13

0.67 f cu
C= amax b
γm
0.67 f cu
γm
Asbal =
f sbal

M=
u Aps f pb  d p − 2  + As f s  d s − 2 
   
of neutral axis, x.


14 - 14 Beam Design
end and M ubal at the upper end and M u0 is associated with As = 0 and M ubal is
Asbal.

equate
bal

reinforcement is:
= M − M ubal
M us
Mus
A′s = , where (CP 3.4.4.4)
 0.67 fcu 
 f ′s −
γ c 
( d − d′)

 a − d′ 
f ′s = εcEs  max  ≤ 0.87fy
 amax 

en by:
M us
Ascom =
0.87 f y ( d s − d ′ )
Beam Design 14 - 15


unbonded tendons, the code equations are used to compute the stress, fps, in the
the stress in the post-tensioning steel, fpb, is computed based on strain compati-
bility.
The ductility of a section is controlled by limiting the x / d ratio (CP 3.4.4.4):
d − z
 0.45 , for fcu ≤ 60 N mm 2

d − z
=x  , for 60 < fcu ≤ 75 N mm 2 (CP 3.4.4.4)
 0.40
d − z
 0.36 , for 75 < fcu ≤ 105N mm 2

14 - 16 Beam Design
0.67 f cu γ m 0.67 f cu γ m
ε
bf hf
d′ f ′s Cs Cf
A′s
x
ds
Cw
Aps
ε ps
Tw Tf
εs Ts
bw
BEAM STRAIN STRESS
0.9x for f cu ≤ 60 N/mm 2


=a 0.8x for 60 < f cu ≤ 75 N/mm 2 (CP 3.4.4.1(b), 4.3.7.3)
 2
0.72x for 75 < f cu ≤ 105 N/mm
The lever arm of the section must not be greater than 0.95 times its effective
depth (CP 3.4.4.1):
z = d − 0.5a ≤ 0.95de (CP 3.4.4.1(e))

 a
=M u0 Aps f pb  d p −  (CP 4.3.7.3)
 2
Beam Design 14 - 17
equal to cmax. The stress in the post-tensioning steel, fpb, is then calculated
based on strain compatibility for bonded tendons. For unbonded tendons, the
code equations are used to compute the stress, fps, in the post-tensioning steel,
the beam is taken as bf. Compression reinforcement is required when x / d ex-
ceed the limits.
0.67 f cu
C= amax Accom
γc
Accom = (
bal
0.67 f cu
γm
Asbal =
f sbal
of neutral axis, x.

requirements.
14 - 18 Beam Design

er end and M ubal at the upper end and M u0 is associated with As = 0 and M ubal
Asbal.

equate
case, SAFE assumes that the depth of the neutral axis, x, is equal to xmax. The
bal
f sbal . The area of compression reinforcement, As' , is then determined as fol-
lows:

reinforcement is:
= M − M ubal
M us
M us
A' s = , where (CP 3.4.4.4)
 0.67 f cu 
 f ' s − (d − d ')
 γc 
Beam Design 14 - 19
a − d'
f ′s = εcEs  max  ≤ 0.87fy.
 amax 

en by:
M us
Ascom =
0.87 f y ( d s − d ')


from CP Table 3.27 (CP 3.12.5.3) with interpolation for reinforcement of in-
termediate strength:
Minimum percentage
A
Rectangular  100 s 0.24 0.13
bh
bw A
< 0.4 100 s 0.32 0.18
≥ 0.4 100 0.24 0.13
bf bw h
14 - 20 Beam Design
Minimum percentage
T-Beam with web in A
 100 s 0.48 0.26
compression bw h
 100 0.36 0.20
compression bw h

given by the following table, which is taken from CP Table 3.27 (CP 3.12.5.3)
A′
bh
A′s
bf hf
T- or L-Beam
A′s
bw h
For fcu > 40 MPa, the minimum percentage shown in CP Table 3.27 shall be
2/3
 fcu 
multiplied by a factor of  .

 40 

3.12.6.1).

3.4.5):
Beam Design 14 - 21

with these steps.

V
v= (CP 3.4.5.2)
bw d
vmax = min(0.8 fcu , 7 MPa) (CP 3.4.5.2)
vmax = min(0.63 fcu , 5.6 MPa) (CP 65-2 5.4)

where,
14 - 22 Beam Design


=Vco 0.67bv h (f t
2
)
+ 0.8 fcp ft , (CP 4.3.8.4)
where,
ft =0.24 f cu (CP 4.3.8.4)
fcp = design compressive stress at the centoidal axis due to

Vc = Vco + P sin β (CP 4.3.8.4)

 f pe  V
 1 − 0.55
 f pu  M

Vcr ≥ 0.1bv d f cu (CP 4.3.8.5)

(CP 4.3.8.7):
Beam Design 14 - 23
0.4 if f cu ≤ 40 N mm2

vr =   f 2
(CP 3.4.5.3, Table 3.8)
 3
0.4  cu

40 
if 40 < f cu ≤ 80 N mm2
 
f cu ≤ 80 N 2 (for calculation purpose only) (CP 3.4.5.3, Table 3.8)

mm
 If v ≤ vc + vr ,
As vr b
= , (CP 3.4.5.3, Table 3.8)
sv 0.87 f yv
 If v > vc + vr ,
Asv ( v − vc ) b
= (CP 3.4.5.3, Table 3.8)
sv 0.87 f yv
 If v > vmax, a failure condition is declared. (CP 3.4.5.2)
fyv ≤ 460 MPa. (CP 3.4.5.1)
The maximum of all of the calculated Asv / sv values, obtained from each load
load combination.


14 - 24 Beam Design
 Determine the torsional shear stress, vt.
 Determine critical torsion stress.
Note that references in this section refer to CP 65:Part 2.

tors.

eration should be given using the following algorithms (CP 65-2 3.4.5.13).
2T
vt = (CP 65-2 2.4.4.1)
2
h
 hmin
3
hmax 
Tseg = T   (CP 65-2 2.4.4.2)
∑ h h

3
(
min max ) 

hmzx = Larger dimension of a rectangular section
Beam Design 14 - 25
fy:
y1
vt ≤ min(0.8 fcu , 7N/mm 2 ) × (CP 65-2 2.4.5)
550

(
vt ,min = min 0.067 fcu ,0.6N/mm 2 ) (CP 65-2 2.4.6)
(
vt ,min = min 0.067 fcu ,0.4N/mm 2 x 0.8) (CP 65-2 5.5)

If the factored torsional shear stress, vt is less than the threshold limit, vt,min,
torsion can be safely ignored (CP 65-2 2.4.6). In that case, the program reports
that no torsion reinforcement is required. However, if vt exceeds the threshold
limit, vt,min, it is assumed that the torsional resistance is provided by closed stir-
rups and longitudinal bars (CP 65-2 2.4.6).
 If vt > vt,min, the required closed stirrup area per unit spacing, Asv,t / sv, is cal-
culated as:
Asv,t T
= (CP 65-2 2.4.7)
sv 0.8 x1 y1 ( 0.87 f yv )
14 - 26 Beam Design
c b − 2c c bf
c c
ds
h − 2c h h h − 2c
c c
b bw − 2c
bw

Asv ,t f yv ( x1 + y1 )
Al = (CP 65-2 2.4.7)
sv f y

the closed link and y1 is the larger center-to-center dimension of the closed
link.
(
v + vt ≤ min 0.8 fcu , 7N/mm 2 ) (CP 65-2 2.4.5)
vmax = min(0.63 fcu , 5.6 MPa) (CP 65-2 5.4)
increased in size.
Beam Design 14 - 27
The maximum of all of the calculated Al and Asv,t / sv values obtained from each

14.8 Slab Design

design is carried out based on the ultimate strength design method (CP 65:99)
for prestressed reinforced concrete as described in the following subsections.


14 - 28 Slab Design



cordingly.

3.12.5.3)
Slab Design 14 - 29
In flat slabs, reinforcement is added at the top, over supports, to be 0.00075

be at least 0.2L, where L is the span of the slab.
There are no minimum requirements for the span zone. However, additional
untensioned reinforcement shall be designed for the full tension force generat-
ed by assumed flexural tensile stresses in the concrete for the following situa-
tions (Concrete Society, Technical Report 43):

0.36 f ci

exceeds 0.15 f cu .

Ft
As =
( 5/8 ) f y
where
fct (h − x )b
Ft = −
2

(CP 3.12.6.1).

14 - 30 Slab Design

The punching shear is checked at the face of the column (CP 3.7.6.4) and at a
critical section at a distance of 1.5d from the face of the support (CP 3.7.7.6).
For rectangular columns and concentrated loads, the critical area is taken as a
rectangular area with the sides parallel to the sides of the columns or the point
loads (CP 3.7.7.1). Figure 14-4 shows the auto punching perimeters considered
by SAFE for the various column shapes. The column location (i.e., interior,
edge, corner) and the punching perimeter may be overwritten using the Punch-
ing Check Overwrites.
1.5d
1.5d 1.5d
1.5d
1.5d 1.5d


The design ultimate shear resistance of the concrete alone Vc should be consid-
ered at sections that are as follows:
where,
Slab Design 14 - 31


Vco =0.67bv h (f t
2
)
+ 0.8 f cp f t , (CP 4.3.8.4)
where,
ft =0.24 f cu (CP 4.3.8.4)

Vc = Vco + P sin β (CP 4.3.8.4)

 f pe  V
 1 − 0.55
 f pu  M

Vcr ≥ 0.1bv d f cu (CP 4.3.8.5)

centricity of shear about the two axes, the nominal design shear stress, v, is cal-
culated as:
14 - 32 Slab Design
 1.5 M 
V = V f + x  (CP 3.7.6.2, 3.7.6.3)
eff , x  Vy 
 
 1.5 M 
y
V = V f +  (CP 3.7.6.2, 3.7.6.3)
eff , y  Vx 
 
Veff , x

 ud
vmax = max  (CP 3.7.7.3)
Veff , y
 u d
where,
x and y are the length of the side of the critical section parallel to the ax-
is of bending
umn at the connection
V is the total punching shear force

taken as:
1.00 for interior columns,


f = 1.25 for edge columns, and (CP 3.7.6.2, 3.7.6.3)
1.25 for corner columns.


lowing section.
Slab Design 14 - 33

3.7.7.5). If the slab thickness does not meet these requirements, the punching
shear reinforcement is not designed and the slab thickness should be increased
by the user.


vmax = 2 vc (CP 3.7.7.5)

(CP 3.7.7.5).
 If v ≤ 1.6vc ,
Av ( v − vc ) ud 0.4ud
= ≥ , (CP 3.7.7.5)
s 0.87 f yv 0.87 f yv
 If 1.6vc ≤ v < 2.0vc ,
Av 5 ( 0.7v − vc ) ud 0.4ud
= ≥ , (CP 3.7.7.5)
s 0.87 f yv 0.87 f yv
 If v > vmax, a failure condition is declared. (CP 3.7.7.5)
14 - 34 Slab Design

columns.
parallel to the column face (CP 11.12.3.3).

umns respectively.

edge
d 2 d 2 Iy
gy
gx
s0 s0 s0
Iy x x gx
Iy
Critical d 2
section
centroid Free
edge y x
y
centroid
Ix
Ix
Slab Design 14 - 35

not be less than the minimum cover specified in CP 3.3 plus half of the diame-
ter of the flexural reinforcement.

specified as:
so ≤ 0.5d (CP 3.7.7.6)
s ≤ 0.75d (CP 3.7.7.6)
g ≤ 1.5d (CP 3.7.7.6)
14 - 36 Slab Design
Chapter 15
Design for AS 3600-09
crete design procedure that is used by SAFE when the user selects the Australi-
an code AS 3600-2009 [AS 2009]. Various notations used in this chapter are
listed in Table 15-1. For referencing to the pertinent sections of the AS code in
this chapter, a prefix “AS” followed by the section number is used.

15.1 Notations

Notations 15 - 1

Ap Area of prestressing steel in flexural tension zone, sq-mm
Asc Area of compression reinforcement, mm2
Ast Area of tension reinforcement, mm2
As(required) Area of required tension reinforcement, mm2
Asv Area of shear reinforcement, mm2
Asv,min Minimum area of shear reinforcement, mm2
Asv /s Area of shear reinforcement per unit length, mm2 /mm
Asw/s Area of shear reinforcement per unit length consisting of
closed ties, mm2/mm
At Area of a polygon with vertices at the center of longitudinal
bars at the corners of a section, mm2
bef Effective width of flange (flanged section), mm
mm
d' Concrete cover to compression reinforcement, mm
do Distance from the extreme compression fiber to the centroid
of the outermost tension reinforcement, mm
dom Mean value of do, averaged around the critical shear perime-
ter, mm
Ds Thickness of slab (flanged section), mm
15 - 2 Notations

Es Modulus of elasticity of reinforcement, MPa
f 'c Specified compressive strength of concrete, MPa
f 'ci Specified compressive strength of concrete at time of initial
prestress, MPa
fp Stress in prestressing steel at nominal flexural strength, MPa
fct Characteristic principal tensile strength of concrete, MPa
f 'cf Characteristic flexural tensile strength of concrete, MPa
fcv Concrete shear strength, MPa
fsy Specified yield strength of flexural reinforcement, MPa
fsy,f Specified yield strength of shear reinforcement, MPa
f 's Stress in the compression reinforcement, MPa
Jt Torsional modulus, mm3
ku Ratio of the depth to the neutral axis from the compression
face, to the effective depth, d
mm
tion, N-mm
Mud Reduced ultimate strength in bending without axial force, N-
mm
M* Factored moment at section, N-mm
N* Factored axial load at section, N
Notations 15- 3

Tuc Torsional strength of section without torsional reinforcement,
N-mm
Tu.max Maximum permitted total factored torsion at a section, N-mm
Tus Torsion strength of section with torsion reinforcement, N-mm
T* Factored torsional moment at a section, N-mm
ut Perimeter of the polygon defined by At , mm
V* Factored shear force at a section, N
Vu.max Maximum permitted total factored shear force at a section, N
Vu.min Shear strength provided by minimum shear reinforcement, N
Vuc Shear force resisted by concrete, N
Vus Shear force resisted by reinforcement, N
γ1 Factor for obtaining depth of compression block in concrete
βh Ratio of the maximum to the minimum dimensions of the
εc, max Maximum usable compression strain allowed in extreme
concrete fiber, (0.003 mm/mm)
φ Strength reduction factor
θt Angle of compression strut for torsion, degrees
θv Angle of compression strut for shear, degrees

for which the structure needs to be designed. For AS 3600-09, if a structure is
earthquake (E) loads, and considering that wind and earthquake forces are re-
versible, the load combinations in the following sections may need to be con-
sidered (AS 2.4.2).


fer of prestress forces in accordance with AS 3600-09 clauses 2.4.2. The pre-
1.0D + 1.0PT (AS 2.4.2)

1.15D + 1.15PT (AS 2.4.2)
0.9D + 1.15PT (AS 2.4.2)

prestress for serviceability in accordance with AS 2.4.2. It is assumed that all
1.0D + 1.0PT
1.0D + 1.0L + 1.0PT

prestress in accordance with AS 2.4.2.
The ultimate limit state combinations required for shear design of beams and
1.35D + 1.0PT* (AS/NZS 1170.0-02, 4.2.2(a))
Design Load Combinations 15- 5

1.2D + 1.5L + 1.0PT* (AS/NZS 1170.0-02, 4.2.2(b))

1.2D + 1.5(0.75PL) + 1.0PT* (AS/NZS 1170.0-02, 4.2.2(b))
1.2D + 0.4L + 1.0S + 1.0PT* (AS/NZS 1170.0-02, 4.2.2(g))
0.9D ± 1.0W +1.0PT* (AS/NZS 1170.0-02, 4.2.2(e))
1.2D ± 1.0W + 1.0PT* (AS/NZS 1170.0-02, 4.2.2(d))
1.2D + 0.4L ± 1.0W + 1.0PT* (AS/NZS 1170.0-02, 4.2.2(d))
1.0D ± 1.0E + 1.0PT* (AS/NZS 1170.0-02, 4.2.2(f))

1.0D + 0.4L ± 1.0E + 1.0PT*
*
for live load representing storage areas. These are also the default design load
combinations in SAFE whenever the AS 3600-2009 code is used. If roof live
load is treated separately or other types of loads are present, other appropriate

The upper and lower limits of f' c are 100 MPa and 20 MPa, respectively, for
all framing types (AS 3.1.1.1(b)).
f 'c ≤ 100 MPa (AS 3.1.1.1)
f 'c ≥ 20 MPa (AS 3.1.1.1)
The upper limit of fsy is 500 MPa for all frames (AS 3.2.1, Table 3.2.1).
The code allows use of f' c and fsy beyond the given limits, provided special care
is taken regarding the detailing and ductility (AS 3.1.1, 3.2.1, 17.2.1.1).
are taken as the upper limits if they are defined in the material properties as be-
ing greater than the limits. The user is responsible for ensuring that the mini-
mum strength is satisfied.


The strength reduction factor, φ, is defined as given in the following table (AS
2.2.2, Table 2.2.2):
Type of action effect Strength reduction factor (φ)

(a) Axial force without bending —
(i) Tension 0.8
(ii) Compression 0.6
(b) Bending without axial tension or compression where:
(i) for members with Class N reinforcement only 0.6 ≤ (1.19-13 kuo /12) ≤ 0.8
(ii) for members with Class L reinforcement 0.6 ≤ (1.19-13 kuo /12) ≤ 0.64
(c) Bending with axial tension φ +[(0.8 − φ)(Nu/Nuot)]
(d) Bending with axial compression where:
(i) Nu ≥ Nub 0.6
(ii) Nu < Nub 0.6+ [(φ- 0.6)(1 − Nu/Nub)]
(e) Shear 0.7
(f) Torsion 0.7
The value Mud is the reduced ultimate strength of the cross-section in bending
where ku = 0.36 and tensile force has been reduced to balance the reduced
compressive forces (AS 8.1.5).

tures
Ultimate limit state of prestressed members for flexure and axial loads shall be
based on assumptions given in AS 8.1.

assumption that the plane section remains plane (AS 8.1.2.1(a)).
 Tensile strength of the concrete is ignored (AS 8.1.2.1 (b)).
Strength Reduction Factors 15- 7

 The design stresses in the concrete in compression are taken as α 2 f c′ . The

equal to 0.003 (AS 8.1.2.1 (c), 8.1.2.2).

ment (compression or tension) is derived from the assumption that plane sec-
tion remains plane (AS 8.1.2.1(a)).
Prestressed concrete members are investigated at the following three stages:
The prestressed flexural members are classified as uncracked and cracked

based on tensile strength ft, the computed extreme fiber stress in tension in the
precompressed tensile zone at service loads.

sile stress.

time dependent prestress losses) are checked against the following limits (AS
8.1.6.2):
 Extreme fiber stress in compression: 0.50 f cp

The extreme fiber stress in tension should not exceed the cracking stress; oth-
erwise the section should be designed as a cracked section.

Flexural cracking in a prestressed beam shall be deemed to be controlled if un-
der short-term service loads the resulting maximum tensile stress in concrete
does not exceed 0.25 f c′; in that case, no further checks are needed (AS
8.6.2). However, if this limit is exceeded, flexural cracking shall be deemed to
be controlled by providing reinforcement or bonded tendons, or both, near the
tensile face and achieving either of the following (AS 8.6.2, 9.4.2):
(b) limiting both of the following

dons, to 200 mm. (This sub clause is a detailing requirement not
at service loads and after all prestress losses against the following limit (AS
8.6.2):

Serviceability Requirements of Flexural Members 15- 9

15.7 Beam Design


 Determine factored moments and axial forces

15 - 10 Beam Design


the concrete.

shown in Figure 15-1 (AS 8.1.2.2).
(L- and T-beams) is summarized in the following subsections. It is assumed
that the design ultimate axial force does not exceed (Ascfsy > 0.15N*) (AS
10.7.1a); hence all beams are designed for major direction flexure, shear, and
torsion only.
Beam Design 15- 11


requirements (AS 8.1.6.1).
axis, which is based on stress-strain compatibility for bonded tendons. For un-
bonded tendons, the code equations are used to compute the stress, fps in the
post-tensioning steel. After the depth of the neutral axis has been found, the
stress in the post-tensioning reinforcement fpb is computed based on strain
compatibility.
The following assumptions are applied for the stress block used to compute the
flexural bending capacity of rectangular sections (AS 8.1.2).
 The maximum strain in the extreme compression fiber is taken as 0.003(AS

8.1.3(a)).
 A uniform compressive stress of α2f' c acts on an area bounded by (AS

8.1.3(b)):
 The edges of the cross-sections.
 A line parallel to the neutral axis at the strength limit under the loading
concerned, and located at a distance kud from the extreme compression
fiber.

given by
amax   ku d where, (AS 8.1.3(b))
 2  1.0  0.003 f 'c where, 0.67   2  0.85 (AS 8.1.3(1))
  1.05  0.007 f 'c where, 0.67    0.85 (AS 8.1.3(2))
ku = 0.36 (AS 8.1.5)
 If a  amax (AS 8.1.5), the moment capacity of the section, provided by post-
15 - 12 Beam Design
 a
=M u0 Ap f p  d p − 
 2
controlled case. In that case, it is assumed that the depth of neutral axis c is
on strain compatibility and the area of required tension reinforcement, As, is de-
termined by imposing force equilibrium, i.e., C = T.
C = α 2 f 'c bamax (AS 8.1.3)
α f'c - Ap f pbal
Asbal =2
f sbal
bal  a   a 
M=
u Ap f pbal  d p − max  + Asbal f sbal  d s − max 
 2   2 

Beam Design 15- 13


Asbal.


adequate
When M > M ubal , compression reinforcement is required (AS 8.1.5). In that
case, SAFE assumes that the depth of neutral axis, c, is equal to cmax . The
values of fp and fs reach their respective balanced condition values, f pbal and

reinforcement is:
= M − M ubal
M us
M us
Asc = , where
( f 's − α 2 f 'c )( d − d ′ )φ
 c − d′ 
=f ′s 0.003Es   ≤ fsy (AS 8.1.2.1, 3.2.2)
 c 
15 - 14 Beam Design

en by:
M us
Ascom =
φ f y ( d s − d ')


unbonded tendons, the code equations are used to compute the stress, fps, in the
the stress in the post-tensioning steel, fpb, is computed based on strain compati-
bility.

given by
amax = γk u d where, ku = 0.36 (AS 8.1.5)
Beam Design 15- 15

 a
=M u0 Ap f p  d p − 
 2
controlled case. In that case it is assumed that the depth of neutral axis c is
equal to cmax. The stress in the post-tensioning steel, fp, is then calculated based
 If a ≤ Ds, the subsequent calculations for As are exactly the same as previous-
of the beam is taken as bf. Compression reinforcement is required when
amax = γk u d where, ku = 0.36.
 If a > Ds, the calculation for As is given by
C = α 2 f c′amax Accom
b f Ds + bw ( amax − Ds )
Accom =
α f c′amax Accom - Ap f pbal

Asbal =2
f sbal
15 - 16 Beam Design


As .
Beam Design 15- 17



adequate
assumes that the depth of the neutral axis, c, is equal to cmax . The values of fp
and fs reach their respective balanced condition values, f pbal and f sbal . The ar-
ea of compression reinforcement, As' , is then determined as follows:

reinforcement is:
= M − M ubal
M us
M us
As′ = , where
φ ( f s′ − α 2 f c′ )( d − d ')
 c − d′ 
=f ′s 0.003Es  max  ≤ fsy (AS 8.1.2.1, 3.2.2)
 cmax 

en by:
M us
Ascom =
φ f y ( d s − d ')
compression reinforcement is A′s. As is to be placed at the bottom, and A′s is to

15 - 18 Beam Design
The ultimate strength in bending (Muo) at critical sections shall not be less than
( M uo )min given by:
( M uo )min= 1.2  Z ( f cf′ + P / Ag ) + Pe  (AS 8.1.6.1)
where
Z = the section modulus of the uncracked section, referred to the extreme

fiber at which flexural cracking occurs
f cf' = the characteristic flexural tensile strength of the concrete
e = the eccentricity of the prestressing force (P), measured from the

centroidal axis of the uncracked section

en by the following limit (AS 8.1.6.1):
2
 D  f ′ct , f
Ast .min = αb   bd , where (AS 8.1.6.1(2))
 d  f sy
α b = 20, for Rectangular Section (AS8.1.6.1(2))
for L- and T-Sections with the web in tension:

1/4
b  D  b 
α b = 0.20 +  f − 1  0.4 s − 0.18  ≥ 0.20  f  , (AS8.1.6.1(2))
 bw  D   bw 
for L- and T-Sections with the flange in tension:

2/3
b  D  b 
α b = 0.20 +  f − 1  0.25 s − 0.08  ≥ 0.20  f  , (AS8.1.6.1(2))
 bw  D   bw 
Beam Design 15- 19

f 'ct , f = 0.6 f 'c (AS 3.1.1.3(b))

Ast ≤ 
Asc ≤ 

beam for a particular load combination, the following steps are involved.
 Determine the factored shear force, V*
 Determine the shear force, Vuc, that can be resisted by the concrete

with these steps.

sponding shear forces for different load cases with the corresponding load

The ultimate shear strength (Vuc) of a prestressed beam, excluding the contribu-
tion of shear reinforcement, is the lesser of the values obtained from the fol-
lowing, unless the cross-section under consideration is cracked in flexure, in
which case only Flexural-Shear Cracking, Item (a), applies:
15 - 20 Beam Design
(a) Flexural-Shear Cracking
( ) 
13
 Ast + Apt
Vuc =β1 β2 β3bv d o f'cv  + Vo + Pv (AS 8.2.7.2(a))
 bw d o 
where,
( f 'c )
1/3
f 'cv
= ≤ 4 MPa (AS 8.2.7.1)
 do 
β1 = 1.11.6 −  ≥ 1.1 (AS 8.2.7.1)
 1000 
β2 = 1, or (AS 8.2.7.1)
 N* 
= 1−   ≥ 0 for members subject to significant axial tension, or
 3.5 A 
 g 
 N* 
= 1+   for members subject to significant axial compression.
 14 A 
 g 
β3 = 1
M
Vo = * o * = the shear force that would occur at the section when
M /V
the bending moment at that section was equal to the decompression
moment (Mo) given by:
M o =Zσ cp.f
where
σ cp.f = the compressive stress because of prestress, at the ex-

treme fiber where cracking occurs
b) Web-shear cracking
Beam Design 15- 21

Vuc= Vt + Pv (AS 8.2.7.2(b))
where
Vt = the shear force, which, in combination with the prestressing force

and other action effects at the section would produce a principal
tensile stress of 0.33 fc′ at either the centroidal axis or the inter-
section of flange and web, whichever is the more critical.
Where significant reversal of loads may occur, causing cracking in a zone

usually in compression, the value of Vuc obtained from Clause 8.2.7.1 may not
apply.

= Vuc + 0.6bv do
Vu,min (AS 8.2.9)
Vu,max = 0.2 f 'c bdo + Pv (AS 8.2.6)
Given V*, Vuc, and Vu.max, the required shear reinforcement is calculated as fol-
lows, where, φ, the strength reduction factor, is 0.75 by default (AS 2.2.2).
 If V * ≤ φVuc / 2,
Asv
= 0 , if D ≤ 750 mm, otherwise Asv.min shall be provided. (AS 8.2.5).
s
 If (φVuc / 2 ) < V * ≤ φVu.min ,
Asv
= 0, if D < bw /2 or 250 mm, whichever is greater (AS 8.2.5(c)(i)),
s
otherwise Asv.min shall be provided.
 If φVu.min < V * ≤ φVu.max ,
15 - 22 Beam Design
Asv
=
(
V * − φVuc ) , (AS 8.2.10)
s fsy. f do cot θ v
and greater than Asv.min, defined as:
Asv. min  b 

= 0.35 w (AS 8.2.8)
s  f sy . f 
 
θv = the angle between the axis of the concrete compression strut and the
longitudinal axis of the member, which varies linearly from 30 degrees
when V*=φVu.min to 45 degrees when V*=φ Vu,max.
 If V * > φVmax , a failure condition is declared. (AS 8.2.6)
 If V* exceeds its maximum permitted value φVmax, the concrete section size
should be increased (AS 8.2.6).
Note that if torsion design is considered and torsion reinforcement is required,

the calculated shear reinforcement is ignored. Closed stirrups are designed for
combined shear and torsion in accordance with AS 8.3.4(b).
The maximum of all of the calculated Asv /s values obtained from each load
load combination.


the beam torsion:
Beam Design 15- 23


tors.

design T* is permitted to be reduced in accordance with the code (AS 8.3.2).
However, the program does not automatically redistribute the internal forces
and reduce T*. If redistribution is desired, the user should release the torsional
degree of freedom (DOF) in the structural model.

For torsion design, special section properties such as At, Jt, and ut are calculat-
ed. These properties are described in the following (AS 8.3).
At = Area of a polygon with vertices at the center of longitudinal bars

at the corners of the cross-section
ut = Perimeter of the polygon defined by At
Jt = Torsional modulus
In calculating the section properties involving reinforcement, such as Asw/s and

Al, it is assumed that the distance between the centerline of the outermost
to 38-mm clear cover and a 12-mm-diameter stirrup. For torsion design of
reinforcement calculation. However, the flange is considered during Tuc calcu-
tion are given as:
15 - 24 Beam Design
At = ( b − 2c )( h − 2c ) , (AS 8.3.5)
ut = 2 ( b − 2c ) + 2 ( h − 2c ) , (AS 8.3.6)
Jt = 0.33x2y (AS 8.3.3)
where, the section dimensions b, h and, c are shown in Figure 15-3. Similarly,
At = ( bw − 2c )( h − 2c ) , (AS 8.3.5)
ut = 2 ( h − 2c ) + 2 ( bw − 2c ) , (AS 8.3.6)
Jt = 0.33Σx2y (AS 8.3.3)
where the section dimensions bw, h, and c for a flanged beam are shown in Fig-
ure 15-3. The values x and y refer to the smaller and larger dimensions of a
component rectangle, respectively.
c bb − 22c
c c bef
c c
D
dss
c c
b bw − 2c
bbww

Beam Design 15- 25


The torsional strength of the section without torsion reinforcement, Tuc, is cal-
culated as:
Tuc =0.3 J t f ′c (AS 8.3.5)
where Jt is the torsion modulus of the concrete cross-section as described in

detail in the previous section
Torsion reinforcement also can be ignored if any one of the following is satis-
fied:
T * ≤ 0.25φTuc (AS 8.3.4(a)(i))
T* V*
+ ≤ 0.5 (AS 8.3.4(a)(ii))
φTuc φVuc
T* V*
+ ≤ 1 and D ≤ max(250mm, b/2) (AS 8.3.4(a)(iii))
φTuc φVuc
If the factored torsion T* alone or in combination with V* does not satisfy any
of the preceding three conditions, torsion reinforcement is needed. It is as-
nal bars (AS 8.3).
 If T* > Tcr, the required closed stirrup area per unit spacing, Asw /s, is calcu-
lated as:
Asw T * tan θ t
= (AS 8.3.5(b))
s φ 2 f sy. f At
where, the minimum value of Asw /s is taken as follows:
Asw. min 0.35bw

= (AS 8.2.8)
s f sy. f
15 - 26 Beam Design
The value θt is the angle between the axis of the concrete compression strut and
the longitudinal axis of the member, which varies linearly from 30 degrees
when T* = φTuc to 45 degrees when T* = φTu,max.
The following equation shall also be satisfied for combined shear and torsion
by adding additional shear stirrups.
T* V*
+ ≤ 1.0 (AS 8.3.4(b))
φTus φVus
where,
A 
Tus = f sy . f  sw 2 At cot θ t (AS 8.3.5(b))
 s 
Vus = (Asv f sy . f d o / s )cot θ v (AS 8.2.10(a))
The required longitudinal rebar area is calculated as:
A 
0.5 f sy. f  sw ut cot 2 θ t
Al =  s  (AS 8.3.6(a))
f sy
T* V*
+ ≤ 1.0 (AS 8.3.3)
φTu . max φVu . max
where,
Vu . max = 0.2 f 'c bw d o (AS 8.2.6)
Tu . max = 0.2 f 'c J t (AS 8.3.5(a))

Beam Design 15- 27

When torsional reinforcement is required (T* > Tcr), the area of transverse
closed stirrups and the area of regular shear stirrups satisfy the following limit.
 Asv A  0.35b
 + 2 sw  ≥ (AS 8.3.7, 8.2.8)
 s s  f sy . f
If this equation is not satisfied with the originally calculated Asv/s and Asw/s,
Asv/s is increased to satisfy this condition. In that case, Asv/s does not need to
satisfy AS Section 8.2.8 independently.
The maximum of all of the calculated Al and Asv/s values obtained from each

and longitudinal rebar requirements to satisfy spacing considerations must be
15.8 Slab Design

design is carried out based on the ultimate strength design method (AS 3600-

15 - 28 Slab Design



earlier (or to the flanged beam if the slab is ribbed). Where the slab properties
(depth and so forth) vary over the width of the strip, the program automatically
designs slab widths of each property separately for the bending moment to
which they are subjected before summing up the reinforcement for the full
width. This method is used when drop panels are included. Where openings
occur, the slab width is adjusted accordingly.
Slab Design 15- 29


The minimum requirements for untensioned reinforcement in one-way bonded
slabs is the same as for beams (AS 9.1.1). Flexural cracking in prestressed
slabs shall be deemed controlled if under short-term service loads the resulting
stress is less than 0.25 f c′; in that case, no further checks are needed (AS
9.4.2). However, if that limit is exceeded, flexural cracking shall be deemed
under control by providing reinforcement or bonded tendons, or both, near the
tensile face and accomplishing either of the following (AS 9.4.2):
(b) limiting both of the following:

dons, to 300 mm. (This sub clause is a detailing requirement that is not
at service loads and after all prestress losses have occurred against the follow-
ing limit (AS 9.4.2):

loads:

15 - 30 Slab Design


The punching shear is checked on a critical section at a distance of dom /2 from
the face of the support (AS 9.2.1.1). For rectangular columns and concentrated
the sides of the columns or the point loads (AS 9.2.1.3). Figure 15-4 shows the
The column location (i.e., interior, edge, corner) and the punching perimeter
may be overwritten using the Punching Check Overwrites.
d 2
d 2 d 2
d 2
d 2 d 2
Slab Design 15- 31


(i) The ultimate shear strength of a slab where M v* is zero, Vuo , is given as
(AS 9.2.3(a)):
a. when no shear link/stud is present
= (
Vuo udom fcv + 0.3σ cp ) (AS 9.2.3(a))
b. when shear link/stud is present
( )
Vuo udom 0.5 fc′ + 0.3σ cp ≤ 0.2 fc′udom
= (AS 9.2.3(b))
where fcv is taken as the minimum of the following two limits:
  2 
0.17  1 +  f ′c
fcv = min   βh  (AS 9.2.3(a))

0.34 f ′c
where, βh is the ratio of the longest to the minimum dimensions of the crit-
ical section.
(ii) The ultimate shear strength of a slab where M v* is not zero and no shear re-
inforcement is provided, Vu , is given as (AS 9.2.4(a)):
=Vu Vuo 1.0 + ( uM v 8V * adom )  (AS 9.2.4(a))

 

by SAFE.
15 - 32 Slab Design

The design guidelines for shear links or shear studs are not available in AS
3600-2009. SAFE uses the NZS 3101-06 guidelines to design shear studs or
shear links.

that the effective depth of the slab is greater than or equal to 150 mm and not
ment is not designed, and the slab thickness should be increased by the user.


Vmax = 3 Vu,min = 3×Vu (AS 9.2.4(a), (d))
Where Vu is computed from AS 9.2.3 or 9.2.4. Given V*, Vu, and Vu,max, the re-
quired shear reinforcement is calculated as follows, where, φ, is the strength
reduction factor.
Asv
=
(
V * − φVu ), (AS 8.2.10)
s f sy dom
Slab Design 15- 33

1
Vs ≥ f 'c udom (NZS 12.7.4.3)
16
 If V* > φVmax, a failure condition is declared. (NZS 12.7.3.4)
 If V* exceeds the maximum permitted value of φVmax, the concrete section


column.

edge
d 2 d 2 Iy
gy
gx
s0 s0 s0
Iy x x gx
Iy
Critical d 2
section
centroid Free
edge y x
y
centroid
Ix
Ix


15 - 34 Slab Design
umns respectively.

so ≤ 0.5d (NZS 12.7.4.4)

s ≤ 0.5d (NZS 12.7.4.4)
g ≤ 2d (NZS 12.7.4.4)
Slab Design 15- 35

Chapter 16
Design for ACI 318-11
crete design procedure that is used by SAFE when the user selects the Ameri-
can code ACI 318-11 [ACI 2011]. Various notations used in this chapter are
listed in Table 6-1. For referencing to the pertinent sections of the ACI code in
this chapter, a prefix “ACI” followed by the section number is used.

based on inch-pound-second units. For simplicity, all equations and descrip-
tions presented in this chapter correspond to inch-pound-second units unless
otherwise noted.
16.1 Notations
Notations 16 - 1

Acp Area enclosed by the outside perimeter of the section, in2
Ag Gross area of concrete, in2
Al Total area of longitudinal reinforcement to resist torsion, in2
Ao Area enclosed by the shear flow path, sq-in
Aoh Area enclosed by the centerline of the outermost closed
transverse torsional reinforcement, sq-in
Aps Area of prestressing steel in flexural tension zone, in2
As Area of tension reinforcement, in2
A's Area of compression reinforcement, in2
As(required Area of steel required for tension reinforcement, in2
)
At /s Area of closed shear reinforcement per unit length of member

for torsion, sq-in/in
Av Area of shear reinforcement, in2
Av /s Area of shear reinforcement per unit length of member, in2/in
a Depth of compression block, in
ab Depth of compression block at balanced condition, in
amax Maximum allowed depth of compression block, in
b Width of member, in
bf Effective width of flange (T-beam section), in
bw Width of web (T-beam section), in
b0 Perimeter of the punching critical section, in
b1 Width of the punching critical section in the direction of
bending, in
direction of bending, in
c Depth to neutral axis, in
16 - 2 Notations

cb Depth to neutral axis at balanced conditions, in
d Distance from compression face to tension reinforcement, in
d' Concrete cover to center of reinforcing, in
de Effective depth from compression face to centroid of tension
reinforcement, in
ds Thickness of slab (T-beam section), in
dp Distance from extreme compression fiber to centroid of pre-
stressing steel, in
Ec Modulus of elasticity of concrete, psi
Es Modulus of elasticity of reinforcement, assumed as
29,000,000 psi (ACI 8.5.2)
f'c Specified compressive strength of concrete, psi
prestress, psi
forces only (after allowance of all prestress losses), psi
fps Stress in prestressing steel at nominal flexural strength, psi
fpu Specified tensile strength of prestressing steel, psi
fpy Specified yield strength of prestressing steel, psi
ft Extreme fiber stress in tension in the precompressed tensile
zone using gross section properties, psi
fy Specified yield strength of flexural reinforcement, psi
fys Specified yield strength of shear reinforcement, psi
h Overall depth of a section, in
hf Height of the flange, in
φMn0 Design moment resistance of a section with tendons only, N-
mm
Notations 16 - 3

φMnbal Design moment resistance of a section with tendons and the
N-mm
Mu Factored moment at section, lb-in
Nc Tension force in concrete due to unfactored dead load plus
live load, lb
Pu Factored axial load at section, lb
s Spacing of the shear reinforcement along the length of the
beam, in
Tu Factored torsional moment at section, lb-in
Vc Shear force resisted by concrete, lb
Vmax Maximum permitted total factored shear force at a section, lb
Vu Factored shear force at a section, lb
Vs Shear force resisted by steel, lb
εc, max Maximum usable compression strain allowed in extreme con-
crete fiber (0.003 in/in)
εs,min Minimum tensile strain allowed in steel reinforcement at
nominal strength for tension controlled behavior (0.005 in/in)
ϕ Strength reduction factor
shear
16 - 4 Notations

λ Shear strength reduction factor for light-weight concrete
θ Angle of compression diagonals, degrees

for which the structure needs to be designed. For ACI 318-11, if a structure is
reversible, the load combinations in the following sections may need to be con-
sidered (ACI 9.2.1).

fer of prestress forces, in accordance with ACI 318-11 clause 18.4.1. The pre-
1.0D + 1.0PT (ACI 18.4.1)

prestress for serviceability in accordance with ACI 318-11 clauses 18.3.3,
18.4.2(b), and 18.9.3.2. It is assumed that all long-term losses have already oc-
curred at the service stage.
1.0D + 1.0PT
(ACI 18.4.2(b))
1.0D + 1.0L + 1.0PT


prestress in accordance with ACI 318-11 clause 18.4.2(a). The permanent load
for this load combination is taken as 50 percent of the live load. It is assumed
that all long-term losses have already occurred at the service stage.
1.0D + 1.0PT
(ACI 18.4.2(a))
1.0D + 0.5L + 1.0PT

prestress for strength in accordance with ACI 318-11, Chapters 9 and 18.
1.4D + 1.0PT* (ACI 9.2.1)

1.2D + 1.6L + 1.0PT* (ACI 9.2.1)
1.2D + 1.6(0.75 PL) + 1.0PT* (ACI 9.2.1, 13.7.6.3)
0.9D ± 1.0W +1.0PT* (ACI 9.2.1)
1.2D + 1.0L ± 1.0W + 1.0PT*
0.9D ± 1.0E + 1.0PT* (ACI 9.2.1)
1.2D + 1.0L ± 1.0E + 1.0PT*
1.2D + 1.6L + 0.5S + 1.0PT* (ACI 9.2.1)
1.2D + 1.0L + 1.6S + 1.0PT*
1.2D + 1.6S ± 0.5W + 1.0PT* (ACI 9.2.1)
1.2D + 1.0L + 0.5S ± 1.0W + 1.0PT*
1.2D + 1.0L + 0.2S ± 1.0E + 1.0PT* (ACI 9.2.1)
*

The IBC 2012 basic load combinations (Section 1605.2.1) are the same. These
also are the default design load combinations in SAFE whenever the ACI 318-
11 code is used. The user should use other appropriate load combinations if
roof live load is treated separately, or if other types of loads are present.

The concrete compressive strength, f'c, should not be less than 2500 psi (ACI
5.1.1). The upper limit of the reinforcement yield strength, fy, is taken as 80 ksi
(ACI 9.4) and the upper limit of the reinforcement shear strength, fyt, is taken as
60 ksi (ACI 11.5.2).

The strength reduction factors, φ, are applied on the specified strength to obtain
the design strength provided by a member. The φ factors for flexure, shear, and
torsion are as follows:
φt = 0.90 for flexure (tension controlled) (ACI 9.3.2.1)
φc = 0.65 for flexure (compression controlled) (ACI 9.3.2.2(b))
φ = 0.75 for shear and torsion. (ACI 9.3.2.3)
The value of φ varies from compression-controlled to tension-controlled based

on the maximum tensile strain in the reinforcement at the extreme edge, εt
(ACI 9.3.2.2).
Sections are considered compression-controlled when the tensile strain in the

extreme tension reinforcement is equal to or less than the compression-
controlled strain limit at the time the concrete in compression reaches its as-
sumed strain limit of εc.max, which is 0.003. The compression-controlled strain

limit is the tensile strain in the reinforcement at the balanced strain condition,
which is taken as the yield strain of the reinforcement, (fy/E) (ACI 10.3.3).
Sections are tension-controlled when the tensile strain in the extreme tension
reinforcement is equal to or greater than 0.005, just as the concrete in compres-
sion reaches its assumed strain limit of 0.003 (ACI 10.3.4).
Sections with εt between the two limits are considered to be in a transition re-
gion between compression-controlled and tension-controlled sections (ACI
10.3.4).
When the section is tension-controlled, φt is used. When the section is com-

pression-controlled, φc is used. When the section is in the transition region, φ is
linearly interpolated between the two values (ACI 9.3.2).
The user is allowed to overwrite these values. However, caution is advised.

based on assumptions given in ACI 10.2.
portional to the distance from the neutral axis (ACI 10.2.2).
be assumed equal to 0.003 (ACI 10.2.3).
 The tensile strength of the concrete shall be neglected in axial and flexural
calculations (ACI 10.2.5).
lar concrete stress distribution (ACI 10.2.7).
 The concrete stress of 0.85f'c shall be assumed uniformly distributed over an

fiber of maximum compressive strain (ACI 10.2.7.1).
16 - 8 Design Assumptions for Prestressed Concrete

 The distance from the fiber of maximum strain to the neutral axis, c shall be
measured in a direction perpendicular to the neutral axis (ACI 10.2.7.2).
Elastic theory shall be used with the following two assumptions:
 The strains shall vary linearly with depth through the entire load range (ACI
18.3.2.1).
 At cracked sections, the concrete resists no tension (ACI 18.3.2.2).

(ACI 18.3.2):

stress in tension in the precompressed tensile zone at service loads (ACI
18.3.3).

sile stress.
stresses at service load are calculated based on the cracked section (ACI
18.3.4).
A prestressed two-way slab system is designed as Class U only with

f t ≤ 6 f 'c (ACI R18.3.3); otherwise, an over-stressed (O/S) condition is re-
ported.
Design Assumptions for Prestressed Concrete 16 - 9

Prestressed
Transition between
Assumed behavior Uncracked Cracked Cracked
No requirement
calculation at service loads 18.3.4 18.3.4 18.3.4
Allowable stress at transfer 18.4.1 18.4.1 18.4.1 No requirement

18.4.2 18.4.2 No requirement No requirement
Tensile stress at service loads 7.5 f c′ < ft ≤ 12 f c′

≤ 7.5 f c′ No requirement No requirement
18.3.3

time dependent prestress losses) are checked against the following limits:
 Extreme fiber stress in compression: 0.60 f ci' (ACI 18.4.1(a))
 Extreme fiber stress in tension: 3 f ci' (ACI 18.4.1(c))

simply supported members: 6 f ci' (ACI 18.4.1(c))
16.6.2 Serviceability Checks at Service Load



to prestress plus total load: 0.60 f c' (ACI 18.4.2(b))

loads:
– Class U beams and one-way slabs: f t ≤ 7.5 f 'c (ACI 18.3.3)
– Class U two-way slabs: f t ≤ 6 f 'c (ACI 18.3.3)
– Class T beams: 7.5 f 'c < f t ≤ 12 f 'c (ACI 18.3.3)
– Class C beams: f t ≥ 12 f 'c (ACI 18.3.3)
For Class C prestressed flexural members, checks at service loads are not re-
quired by the code. However, for Class C prestressed flexural members not
ment nearest the extreme tension face shall not exceed that given by ACI
10.6.4 (ACI 18.4.4). It is assumed that the user has checked the requirements of
ACI 10.6.4 and ACI 18.4.4.1 to 18.4.4 independently, as these sections are not
checked by the program.

bers at long-term service loads, and after all prestress losses occur, are checked
0.45 f c' (ACI 18.4.2(a))

steel (ACI 18.5.1). The permissible tensile stress checks, in all types of pre-

stressing steel, in terms of the specified minimum tensile stress fpu, and the min-
imum yield stress, fy, are summarized as follows:
 Due to tendon jacking force: min(0.94fpy, 0.80fpu) (ACI 18.5.1(a))
 At anchors and couplers after force

transfer: 0.70fpu (ACI 18.5.1(b))
16.7 Beam Design


16 - 12 Beam Design

In the design of flexural reinforcement of prestressed concrete beams, the fac-
tored moments for each load combination at a particular beam station are ob-
tained by factoring the corresponding moments for different load cases, with

the concrete.

shown in Figure 16-1 (ACI 10.2). Furthermore, it is assumed that the net ten-
sile strain in the reinforcement shall not be less than 0.005 (tension controlled)
(ACI 10.3.4). When the applied moment exceeds the moment capacity at this
design condition, the area of compression reinforcement is calculated on the
assumption that the additional moment will be carried by compression rein-
forcement and additional tension reinforcement.
that the design ultimate axial force does not exceed φ (0.1f'cAg) (ACI 10.3.5);
ly.
Beam Design 16 - 13

ε =0.003 0.85 f ′c
b
A′s Cs
d′ c a = β1c
dp
ds
Aps
ε ps
Tcps
Ts Tcs
εs
As
BEAM STRAIN STRESS

 ε c max 
cmax =  d (ACI 10.2.2)
where,
εcmax = 0.003 (ACI 10.2.3)
εsmin = 0.005 (ACI 10.3.4)
16 - 14 Beam Design

given by:
amax = β1cmax (ACI 10.2.7.1)
 f ' − 4000 
β1 = 0.85 − 0.05  c  , 0.65 ≤ β1 ≤ 0.85 (ACI 10.2.7.3)
 1000 
Based on the calculated fps, the depth of the neutral axis is recalculated, and fps
a = β1c

 a
 2

the balanced condition. The balanced condition is taken as the marginal tension
equal to cmax. The stress in the post-tensioning steel, fps is then calculated and
the area of required tension reinforcement, As, is determined by imposing force
C = 0.85 f c' amax b
Beam Design 16 - 15
bal
0.85 f c′amax b − Aps f psbal
A s =
f sbal

φ=
M nbal φ Aps f psbal  d p −  + φ As f s  d s − 2 
 2   

When M u < φ M n0 , the amount of post-tensioning steel is adequate to resist the

er end and φ M nbal at the upper end, and φ M n0 is associated with As = 0 and
φ M nbal is associated with As = Asbal , the required area will fall within the range
of 0 to Asbal.
16 - 16 Beam Design

equate
this case SAFE assumes that the depth of the neutral axis, c, is equal to cmax.
The values of fps and fs reach their respective balanced condition values, f psbal
follows:

reinforcement is:
M=
M us
A' s = , where
( f 's − 0.85 f 'c )(d e − d ')φ
c − d '
f ' s = Es ε c max  max  ≤ fy (ACI 10.2.2, 10.2.3, 10.2.4)
 cmax 

en by:
M us
Ascom =
f y ( d s − d ') φ
Beam Design 16 - 17

In designing for a factored negative moment, Mu (i.e., designing top reinforce-
ment), the calculation of the reinforcement area is exactly the same as above,
i.e., no flanged beam data is used.

 ε c max 
cmax =  d (ACI 10.2.2)
where,
εcmax = 0.003 (ACI 10.2.3)
εsmin = 0.005 (ACI 10.3.4)
Therefore, the limit c ≤ cmax is set for tension-controlled section:

given by:
amax =β1cmax (ACI 10.2.7.1)
 f 'c − 4000 
β1 =0.85 − 0.05  , 0.65 ≤ β1 ≤ 0.85 (ACI 10.2.7.3)
 1000 
16 - 18 Beam Design
hf ε =0.003 0.85 f ′c 0.85 f ′c

bf
d′ f ′s Cs Cf
A′s
c
dp ds
Cw
Aps
ε ps
Tw Tf
As εs Ts
bw
BEAM STRAIN STRESS
stress in the post-tensioning steel, fps is computed based on strain compatibility
a = β1c

 a
 2

sion-controlled case. In that case, it is assumed that the depth of the neutral ax-
Beam Design 16 - 19
is c is equal to cmax. The stress in the post-tensioning steel, fps, is then calculated
C = 0.85 f 'c Accomp
Accom = )
bal
0.85 f 'c Accom − Aps f psbal
A s =
f sbal
Case 1: Post-tensioning steel is adequate

When M u < φ M n0 the amount of post-tensioning steel is adequate to resist the
Case 2: Post-tensioning steel plus tension reinforcement

16 - 20 Beam Design

er end and φ M nbal at the upper end, and φ M n0 is associated with As = 0
and φ M nbal is associated with As = Asbal , the required area will fall within the
range of 0 to As.

Case 3: Post-tensioning steel and tension reinforcement are not adequate

that case, SAFE assumes that the depth of the neutral axis, c, is equal to cmax.
The value of fps and fs reach their respective balanced condition values, f psbal
follows:

reinforcement is:
M=
M us
A 's = , where
( f 's − 0.85 f 'c )( d s − d ') φ
c − d '
f ' s = Es ε c max  max  ≤ fy (ACI 10.2.2, 10.2.3, and 10.2.4)
c
 max 

en by:
Beam Design 16 - 21
M us
Ascom =
f y ( d s − d ') φ

φ M n ≥ 1.2M cr (ACI 18.8.2)
quired by ACI 9.2.

As ≥ 0.004 Act (ACI 18.9.2)
where, Act is the area of the cross-section between the flexural tension face and
16 - 22 Beam Design

As ≤ 
A′s ≤ 

ular beam, for a particular loading combination, at a particular station due to
the beam major shear, the following steps are involved:
 Determine the factored shear force, Vu.
 Determine the shear force, Vc that can be resisted by the concrete.
these steps.
16.7.2.1 Determine Factored Shear Force


Vc = min(Vci , Vcw) (ACI 11.3.3)
where,
Vi M cre
Vci = 0.6λ f ' c bw d p + Vd + ≥ 1.7 λ f ' c b w d (ACI 11.3.3.1)
M max
Beam Design 16 - 23
( )
Vcw = 3.5λ f ' c + 0.3 f pc bw d p + V p (ACI 11.3.3.2)
d p ≥ 0.80h (ACI 11.3.3.1)
 I 
(
M cre =   6λ f ' c + f pe − f d ) (ACI 11.3.3.1)
 yt 
where,
fd = stress due to unfactored dead load, at the extreme fiber of the sec-
tion where tensile stress is caused by externally applied loads, psi
fpe = compress stress in concrete due to effective prestress forces only

(after allowance for all prestress losses) at the extreme fiber of the
section where tensile stress is caused by externally applied loads,
psi
Vd = shear force at the section due to unfactored dead load, lbs
Vp = vertical component of effective prestress force at the section, lbs
Vci = nominal shear strength provided by the concrete when diagonal

cracking results from combined shear and moment

nally applied loads
Mmax = maximum factored moment at section because of externally ap-

plied loads
Vi = factored shear force at the section because of externally applied

loads occurring simultaneously with Mmax
Vcw = nominal shear strength provided by the concrete when diagonal

cracking results from high principal tensile stress in the web
For light-weight concrete, the f 'c term is multiplied by the shear strength
reduction factor λ.
16 - 24 Beam Design

( )
Vmax = Vc + 8 f ' c bw d (ACI 11.4.7.9)
lows where, φ, the strength reduction factor, is 0.75 (ACI 9.3.2.3).
 If Vu ≤ 0.5φVc
Av
=0 (ACI 11.4.6.1)
s
 If 0.5φVc < Vu ≤ φVmax
Av (Vu − φ Vc )
= (ACI 11.4.7.1, 11.4.7.2)
s φ f yt d
Av  0.75λ f ' c 50bw 

≥ max bw , (ACI 11.4.6.3)
s 
 f yt f yt 
 If Vu > φVmax, a failure condition is declared (ACI 11.4.7.9).
For members with an effective prestress force not less than 40 percent of the
tensile strength of the flexural reinforcement, the required shear reinforcement
is computed as follows (ACI 11.4.6.3, 11.4.6.4):
  0.75λ f 'c 50 
max bw , bw 
Av   fy f y 
≥ min  
s  Aps f pu d
 80 f yt d bw


should be increased in size (ACI 11.4.7.9).
Beam Design 16 - 25
Note that if torsion design is considered and torsion reinforcement is needed,

the equation given in ACI 11.5.6.3 does not need to be satisfied independently.
See the next section Design of Beam Torsion Reinforcement for details.
If the beam depth h is less than the minimum of 10 in, 2.5hf, and 0.5bw, the
minimum shear reinforcement given by ACI 11.5.6.3 is not enforced (ACI
11.5.6.1(c)).
load combination.


signing the shear reinforcement for a particular station due to the beam torsion:
 Determine the factored torsion, Tu.

tors (ACI 11.6.2).

16 - 26 Beam Design
design Tu is permitted to be reduced in accordance with the code

(ACI 11.6.2.2). However, the program does not automatically redistribute the
internal forces and reduce Tu. If redistribution is desired, the user should re-
lease the torsional degree of freedom (DOF) in the structural model.

For torsion design, special section properties, such as Acp, Aoh, Ao, pcp, and ph
are calculated. These properties are described in the following (ACI 2.1).
Acp = Area enclosed by outside perimeter of concrete cross-section

pcp = Outside perimeter of concrete cross-section

al reinforcement

closed stirrup and the outermost concrete surface is 1.75 inches. This is equiva-
lent to 1.5 inches clear cover and a #4 stirrup. For torsion design of flanged
tion are given as:
Acp = bh (ACI 11.5.1, 2.1)
Aoh = (b − 2c)(h − 2c) (ACI 11.5.3.1, 2.1, R11.5.3.6(b))
Ao = 0.85 Aoh (ACI 11.5.3.6, 2.1)
pcp = 2b + 2h (ACI 11.5.1, 2.1)
ph = 2(b − 2c) + 2(h − 2c) (ACI 11.5.3.1, 2.1)
Beam Design 16 - 27
Acp = bwh + (bf − bw)hf (ACI 11.5.1, 2.1)
Aoh = (bw – 2c)(h – 2c) (ACI 11.5.3.1, 2.1, R11.5.3.6(b))
Ao = 0.85 Aoh (ACI 11.5.3.6, 2.1)
pcp = 2bf + 2h (ACI11.5.1, 2.1)
ph = 2(h – 2c) + 2(bw – 2c) (ACI 11.5.3.1, 2.1)
in Figure 16-3. Note that the flange width on either side of the beam web is
limited to the smaller of 4hf or (h – hf) (ACI 13.2.4).

The critical torsion capacity, Tcr, for which the torsion in the section can be ig-
nored is calculated as:
 Acp2  f pc
=Tcr ϕλ f 'c   1+ (ACI 11.5.1(b))
p  4λ f 'c
 cp 
where Acp and pcp are the area and perimeter of the concrete cross-section as
described in detail in the previous section; fpc is the concrete compressive stress
at the centroid of the section; φ is the strength reduction factor for torsion,
which is equal to 0.75 by default (ACI 9.3.2.3); and f′c is the specified concrete
compressive strength.

If the factored torsion Tu is less than the threshold limit, Tcr, torsion can be
safely ignored (ACI 11.5.1). In that case, the program reports that no torsion
reinforcement is required. However, if Tu exceeds the threshold limit, Tcr, it is
assumed that the torsional resistance is provided by closed stirrups, longitudi-
nal bars, and compression diagonal (ACI R11.5.3.6).
16 - 28 Beam Design
If Tu > Tcr the required closed stirrup area per unit spacing, At /s, is calculated
as:
At Tu tan θ
= (ACI 11.5.3.6)
s φ 2 Ao f yt
Tu p h
Al = (ACI 11.5.3.7, 11.5.3.6)
φ 2 Ao f y tan θ
c b − 2c c bf
c c
h
dfs
h − 2c h h h − 2c
c c
b bw − 2c
bw

where, the minimum value of At /s is taken as:
At 25
= bw (ACI 11.5.5.3)
s f yt
and the minimum value of Al is taken as follows:
Beam Design 16 - 29
5 f c′ Acp A   f yt 
=Al − t  ph   (ACI 11.5.5.3)
fy  s   f y 
In the preceding expressions, θ is taken as 45 degrees for prestressed members

with an effective prestress force less than 40 percent of the tensile strength of
the longitudinal reinforcement; otherwise θ is taken as 37.5 degrees.
2 2
 Vu   Tu p h   Vc 
  +  2
 ≤ φ  + 8 f c′  (ACI 11.5.3.1)
 bw d   1.7 Aoh   bw d 
For rectangular sections, bw is replaced with b. If the combination of Vu and Tu

When torsional reinforcement is required (Tu > Tcr), the area of transverse
limit.
 Av A   f c′ 50bw 
 + 2 t  ≥ max 0.75λ bw ,  (ACI 11.5.5.2)
 s s   f yt f y 
is increased to satisfy this condition. In that case, Av /s does not need to satisfy
the ACI Section 11.5.6.3 independently.

and longitudinal reinforcement requirements to satisfy spacing considerations
must be investigated independently of the program by the user.
16 - 30 Beam Design
16.8 Slab Design

design is completed using the ultimate strength design method (ACI 318-11)
for prestressed reinforced concrete as described in the following sections. To
learn more about the design strips, refer to the section entitled "SAFE
Design Features" in the Key Features and Terminology manual.

The design of the slab reinforcement for a particular strip is completed at spe-
 Determine the capacity of post-tensioned sections.
These three steps are described in the subsection that follow and are repeated
Slab Design 16 - 31


Calculation of the post-tensioned section capacity is identical to that described
earlier for rectangular beam sections.

cordingly.

slab is given by the following limits (ACI 7.12.2, 13.3.1):
As,min = 0.0020 bh for fy = 40 ksi or 50 ksi (ACI 7.12.2.1(a))
As,min = 0.0018 bh for fy = 60 ksi (ACI 7.12.2.1(b))
0.0018 × 60000
As,min = bh for fy > 60 ksi (ACI 7.12.2.1(c))
fy
16 - 32 Slab Design
Reinforcement is not required in positive moment areas where ft, the extreme
fiber stress in tension in the precompressed tensile zone at service loads (after
all prestress losses occurs) does not exceed 2 f c' (ACI 18.9.3.1).
In positive moment areas where the computed tensile stress in the concrete at
service loads exceeds 2 f c' , the minimum area of bonded reinforcement is
computed as:
Nc
As ,min = , where fy ≤ 60 ksi (ACI 18.9.3.2)
0.5 f y
In negative moment areas at column supports, the minimum area of bonded

reinforcement in the top of slab in each direction is computed as:
As ,min = 0.00075 Acf (ACI 18.9.3.3)
where Acf is the larger gross cross-sectional area of the slab-beam strip in the
two orthogonal equivalent frames intersecting a column in a two-way slab
system.
When spacing of tendons exceed 54 inches, additional bonded shrinkage and

temperature reinforcement (as computed above, ACI 7.12.2.1) is required be-
tween the tendons at slab edges, extending from the slab edge for a distance
equal to the tendon spacing (ACI 7.12.3.3)

Note that the requirements when fy > 60 ksi currently are not handled.

Slab Design 16 - 33

face of the support (ACI 11.11.1.2). For rectangular columns and concentrated
the sides of the columns or the point loads (ACI 11.11.1.3). Figure 16-4 shows
the auto punching perimeters considered by SAFE for the various column
shapes. The column location (i.e., interior, edge, corner) and the punching
d 2
d 2 d 2
d 2
d 2 d 2

The fraction of unbalanced moment transferred by flexure is taken to be γ f Mu
taken to be γ v Mu.
1
γf = (ACI 13.5.3.2)
1 + (2 3) b1 b2
16 - 34 Slab Design
γv = 1 − γf (ACI 13.5.3.1)
For flat plates, γv is determined from the following equations taken from ACI
421.2R-07 [ACI 2007] Seismic Design of Punching Shear Reinforcement in
Flat Plates.
For interior columns,
1
γ vx = 1 − (ACI 421.2 C-11)
1 + ( 2 3) l y lx
1
γ vy = 1 − (ACI 421.2 C-12)
1 + ( 2 3) lx l y
For edge columns,
γvx = same as for interior columns (ACI 421.2 C-13)
1
γ vy = 1 − (ACI 421.2 C-14)
1 + (2 3) l x l y − 0.2
γvy = 0 when lx/ly ≤ 0.2
For corner columns,
γvx = 0.4 (ACI 421.2 C-15)
γvy = same as for edge columns (ACI 421.2 C-16)
span and b2 is the width of the critical section measured in the direction per-
pendicular to the span. The values lx and ly are the projections of the shear-
critical section onto its principal axes, x and y, respectively.

The concrete punching shear stress capacity of a two-way prestressed section is
taken as:
Slab Design 16 - 35
v=
c (β λ
p )
f 'c + 0.3 f pc + v p (ACI 11.11.2.2)
  αsd 
β p = min 3.5,  + 1.5   (ACI 11.11.2.2)
  bo 
where, βp is the factor used to compute vc in prestressed slab; bo is the perimeter

of the critical section; fpc is the average value of fpc in the two directions; vp is
the vertical component of all effective prestress stresses crossing the critical
section; and αs is a scale factor based on the location of the critical section.


α s =30 for edge columns, and (ACI 11.11.2.1)

The concrete capacity vc computed from ACI 11.12.2.2 is permitted only when
the following conditions are satisfied:
 The column is farther than four times the slab thickness away from any dis-
continuous slab edges.
 The value of f ' c is taken no greater than 70 psi.

 In each direction, the value of fpc is within the range:
125 ≤ fpc ≤ 500 psi
In thin slabs, the slope of the tendon profile is hard to control and special care
should be exercised in computing vp. In case of uncertainty between the design
and as-built profile, a reduced or zero value for vp should be used.
If the preceding three conditions are not satisfied, the concrete punching shear
stress capacity of a two-way prestressed section is taken as the minimum of the
16 - 36 Slab Design
 4 
 2 +  λ f 'c
 βc 

 αd
=ν c min  2 + s  λ f 'c (ACI 11.11.2.1)
 bc 

4λ f 'c

where, βc is the ratio of the maximum to the minimum dimensions of the criti-
based on the location of the critical section (ACI 11.12.2.1).
A limit is imposed on the value of f ' c as:
f ' c ≤ 100 (ACI 11.1.2)

as the punching shear capacity ratio by SAFE.

that the effective depth of the slab is greater than or equal to 6 inches, and not
less than 16 times the shear reinforcement bar diameter (ACI 11.11.3). If the
Slab Design 16 - 37

with punching shear reinforcement is as previously determined, but limited to:
vc ≤ 2λ f 'c for shear links (ACI 11.11.3.1)
vc ≤ 3λ f 'c for shear studs (ACI 11.11.5.1)

Vmax = 6 f 'c bod for shear links (ACI 11.11.3.2)
Vmax = 8 f 'c bod for shear studs (ACI 11.11.5.1)
lows, where, φ, the strength reduction factor, is 0.75 (ACI 9.3.2.3).
Av (Vu − φVc )
= (ACI 11.4.7.1, 11.4.7.2)
s φ f ys d
'
Av f
≥ 2 c bo for shear studs
s fy
 If Vu > φVmax, a failure condition is declared. (ACI 11.11.3.2)


column.
16 - 38 Slab Design
shall not exceed d/2 (ACI R11.3.3, 11.11.5.2). The spacing between adjacent
shear reinforcement in the first line of shear reinforcement shall not exceed 2d
measured in a direction parallel to the column face (ACI 11.11.3.3).

umns respectively.

edge
d 2 d 2 Iy
gy
gx
s0 s0 s0
Iy x x gx
Iy
Critical d 2
section
centroid Free
edge y x
y
centroid
Ix
Ix

not be less than the minimum cover specified in ACI 7.7 plus half of the di-

in 3/8-, 1/2-, 5/8-, and 3/4-inch diameters.
first peripheral line of shear studs should not be smaller than 0.35d. The limits
of so and the spacing, s, between the peripheral lines are specified as:
Slab Design 16 - 39
so ≤ 0.5d (ACI 11.11.5.2)

 0.75d for ν u ≤ 6φλ f 'c
s≤ (ACI 11.11.5.2)
0.50 d for ν u > 6φλ f 'c
g ≤ 2d (ACI 11.11.5.3)
The limits of so and the spacing, s, between the links are specified as:
so ≤ 0.5d (ACI 11.11.3)
s ≤ 0.50d (ACI 11.11.3)
16 - 40 Slab Design
Chapter 17
Design for TS 3233-1979
crete design procedure that is used by SAFE when the user selects the TS
3233-1979 [TS 3233]. Various notations used in this chapter are listed in Table
17-1. For referencing to the pertinent sections or equations of the TS code in
this chapter, a prefix “TS” followed by the section or equation number is used
herein.

17.1 Notations
Notations 17 - 1
Table 17-1 List of Symbols Used in the TS 3233-1979 Code

Acp Area enclosed by the outside perimeter of the section, mm2
Ao Area enclosed by the shear flow path, mm2
Aoh Area enclosed by the centerline of the outermost closed
transverse torsional reinforcement, mm2
Aot /s Area of transverse torsion reinforcement (closed stirrups) per
unit length of the member, mm2/mm
Aov /s Area of transverse shear reinforcement per unit length of the
member, mm2/mm
Asw Area of shear reinforcement, mm2
Asw/s Area of shear reinforcement per unit length of the member,
mm2/mm
b Width of section, mm
bf Effective width of flange (flanged section), mm
bo Perimeter of the punching shear critical section, mm
b1 Width of the punching shear critical section in the direction
of bending, mm
b2 Width of the punching shear critical section perpendicular to
the direction of bending, mm
17 - 2 Notations
Chapter 17 - Design for TS 3233-1979

mm
d' Distance from compression face to compression reinforce-
ment, in
Ec Modulus of elasticity of concrete, N/mm2
Es Modulus of elasticity of reinforcement, N/mm2
fcd Designed compressive strength of concrete, N/mm2
fck Characteristic compressive strength of concrete, N/mm2
fctk Characteristic tensile strength of concrete, N/mm2
fyd Designed yield stress of flexural reinforcement, N/mm2.
fyk Characteristic yield stress of flexural reinforcement, N/mm2.
fywd Designed yield stress of transverse reinforcement, N/mm2.
h Overall depth of a section, mm
hf Height of the flange, mm
Md Design moment at a section, N/mm
Vd Design axial load at a section, N
pcp Outside perimeter of concrete cross-section, mm
ph Perimeter of centerline of outermost closed transverse tor-
sional
reinforcement, mm
Tcr Critical torsion capacity, N/mm
Td Design torsional moment at a section, N/mm
Vc Shear force resisted by concrete, N
Vmax Maximum permitted total factored shear force at a section, N
Vs Shear force resisted by transverse reinforcement, N
Vd Design shear force at a section, N
Notations 17 - 3

αs Punching shear scale factor based on column location
punching shear critical section
k1 Factor for obtaining depth of the concrete compression block
εc Strain in the concrete
εc max Maximum usable compression strain allowed in the extreme
concrete fiber, (0.003 mm / mm)
εs Strain in the reinforcement
εcu, Maximum usable compression strain allowed in extreme

concrete fiber (0.003 mm/mm)
γm Material factor
γmc Material factor for concrete
λ Shear strength reduction factor for light-weight concrete

for which the structure needs to be designed. For TS 3233-1979, if a structure
is subjected to dead (G), live (Q), wind (W), and earthquake (E) loads, and
considering that wind and earthquake forces are reversible, the following load
combinations may need to be considered (TS 8.4.3).
These are the default design load combinations in SAFE whenever the TS
3233-1979 code is used. The user should use other appropriate load combina-
tions if roof live load is treated separately, or if other types of loads are present.


fer of prestress force in accordance with TS 3233 Section 9.1.1. The prestress-
ing forces are considered without any long-term loses for the initial service
load combination check.
1.0D + 1.0PT

requirements of prestress for serviceability in accordance with TS 3233 Section
9.1.1. It is assumed that all long-term losses have occurred already at the ser-
vice stage.
1.0D + 1.0PT
1.0D + 1.0L + 1.0PT

prestress for strength in accordance with TS 3233-1979.
1.4G + 1.6Q + 1.0PT* (TS 8.4.3)
0.9G ± 1.3W + 1.0PT* (TS 8.4.3)

1.0G + 1.3Q ± 1.3W + 1.0PT* (TS 8.4.3)
0.9G ± 1.0E + 1.0PT* (TS 8.4.3)
1.0G + 1.0Q ± 1.0E + 1.0PT* (TS 8.4.3)
*
— Replace PT by hyperstatic (H) for flexural design only

These are also the default design load combinations in SAFE whenever the
Turkish TS 3233-1979 code is used. If roof live load is treated separately or
other types of loads are present, other appropriate load combinations should be
used.

The concrete compressive strength, f'c, should not be less than 25 N/mm2 (TS
2.3.1).
25 N/mm 2 ≤ f ck ≤ 55 N/mm 2 (TS 2.3.2)
The specified characteristic strength of reinforcement is given as follows:
f yk ≤ 420 N/mm2
The program enforces the upper material strength limits for flexure and shear
design of beams and columns or for torsion design of beams. The input materi-
al strengths are taken as the upper limits if they are defined in the material
properties as being greater than the limits. The user is responsible for ensuring
that the minimum strength is satisfied.

the characteristic strength, fck , f pk and f yk of the material by a partial factor of
safety, γs and γc, as follows (TS 8.4.3):
f cd f ck / γ mc
= (TS 8.4.3)
f yd f yk / γ ms
= (TS 8.4.3)

f pd f pk / γ ms
= (TS 8.4.3)
The values of partial safety factors, γms and γmc, for the materials and the design
following table (TS 8.4.3):
Values of γm for the Strength Design

These values are recommended by the code to give an acceptable level of safe-
ty for normal structures under typical design situations.
advised.

tures
based on assumptions given in TS 8.3.

assumption that plane sections remain plane.
 The design stresses in the concrete in compression are taken as 0.85 fcd.
Maximum strain at the extreme concrete compression fiber shall be assumed
equal to εcu.
 The strains in bonded post-tensioning tendons and in any additional

reinforcement (compression or tension) are the same as that in the
surrounding concrete.


assumptions given in 9.1, 9.2.
entire load range.
TS 8.3


time dependent prestress losses) are checked against the following limits (TS
9.1.1 and 9.1.2):
0.60 f cjk in N/mm2 (TS 9.1.1)
 Extreme fiber stresses in tension (TS 9.1.2)

0.5 f cjk in N/mm2 (TS 9.1.2)
 Extreme fiber stresses in tension should not exceed 0.5 f cjk ; otherwise, the
section should be designed as a cracked section.

following limits (TS 9.2)
0.45 f ck (TS 9.2.1)
 Extreme fiber stresses in tension in the precompressed tensile zone at

characteristic service loads are defined as follows (TS 9.2.2):
0.5 f ck (TS 9.2.2)
0.70 f pk (TS 9.3)
17.7 Beam Design

Beam Design 17 - 9



the concrete.
17 - 10 Beam Design
in Figure 17-1 (TS 8.3).
The maximum depth of the compression zone, cb, is calculated based on the
compressive strength of the concrete and the tensile steel tension using the fol-
lowing equation (TS 8.3):
ε cu Es
cb = d
ε cu Es + f yd
(TS 8.3)

given by
amax = 0.85k1cb (TS 8.3)
where k1 is calculated as follows:
k1 = 0.85 for f ck ≤ 30 N/mm2, (TS 8.3)
k1 = 0.85 − 0.0075 ( f ck − 30 ) , for f ck > 30 N/mm2. (TS 8.3)
Beam Design 17 - 11
neutral axis depth, to safeguard against non-ductile failures. When the applied
moment exceeds the limiting moment capacity as a singly reinforced beam, the
area of compression reinforcement is calculated on the
ue.

0
In that case, the moment capacity M res is determined as follows:
 ε cu 
cmax =  dp
 ε cu + ε s min 
where,
εcu = 0.003

given by
amax = 0.85k1cb (TS 8.3)
k1 = 0.85 for f ck ≤ 30 N/mm2, (TS 8.3)
k1 = 0.85 − 0.0075 ( f ck − 30 ) , for f ck > 30 N/mm2. (TS 8.3)
17 - 12 Beam Design
a = 0.85k1c
 If c ≤ cmax , the moment capacity of the section, provided by post-tensioning

steel only, is computed as:
0  a
M res
= Aps f ps  d p − 
 2
 If c > cmax , a failure condition is declared.
0
 If M > M res , SAFE calculates the moment capacity and the As required at
the balanced condition. The balanced condition is taken as the marginal
tension-controlled case. In that case, it is assumed that the depth of the
neutral axis c is equal to cmax. The stress in the post-tensioning steel, fpk, is
then calculated based on strain compatibility and the area of required tension
reinforcement, As, is determined by imposing force equilibrium, i.e., C = T.
C = 0.85 f cd amax b,
0.85 f cd amax b − Ap f psbal

Asbal =
f sbal
Beam Design 17 - 13
bal  a  bal bal  amax 

M=
res Ap f psbal  d p − max  + As f s  d s − 2 
 2   

0
When M d < M res , the amount of post-tensioning steel is adequate to resist the
cracking requirements (TS 10.1.1, 10.2.1).

(
0
When M res bal
< M d < M res )
, SAFE determines the required area of tension re-
inforcement, As, iteratively to satisfy the design moment Md and reports this
0
required area of tension reinforcement. Since Md is bound by M res at the lower
bal 0 bal
end and M res at the upper end, and M res is associated with As = 0 and M res is
associated with As = Asbal , the required area will fall within the range of 0 to
Asbal.

17 - 14 Beam Design

adequate
When (M d
bal
> M res )
, compression reinforcement is required. In that case,
SAFE assumes that the depth of the neutral axis, c, is equal to cmax . The values
of fpk and fs reach their respective balanced condition values, f pkbal and f sbal .
Then the area of compression reinforcement, A′s , is determined as follows:
 The moment required to be resisted by compression reinforcement and

tension reinforcement is:
bal
M=
d ,s M d − M res
M d,s
A′s = , where
( f s′ - 0.85fcd )( de - d' )
c − d '
f ′s = εc3Es  max  ≤ fyd.
 cmax 

en by:
M d ,s
Ascom =
f yd ( d s − d ')

In designing for a factored negative moment, Md (i.e., designing top reinforce-
Beam Design 17 - 15

In that case, the moment capacity is determined as follows:

given by
(TS 8.3)
k1 = 0.85 for N/mm2, (TS 8.3)
k1 = 0.85 − 0.0075 , for N/mm2. (TS 8.3)
17 - 16 Beam Design
a = 0.85k1c
 If c ≤ cmax , the moment capacity of the section, provided by post-tensioning

steel only, is computed as:
0  a
M res
= Aps f ps  d p − 
 2
 If c > cmax , a failure condition is declared.
0
 If M > M res , SAFE calculates the moment capacity and the As required at
the balanced condition. The balanced condition is taken as the marginal
tension- controlled case. In that case it is assumed that the depth of the
neutral axis c is equal to cmax. The stress in the post-tensioning steel, fpk, is
then calculated based on strain compatibility, and the area of required tension
reinforcement, As, is determined by imposing force equilibrium, i.e., C = T.
amax.

C = 0.85 f cd amax Accom
0.85 f cd Accom − Ap f pkbal

Asbal =
f sbal
Beam Design 17 - 17
bal  a  bal bal  amax 

M=
res Ap f pkbal  d p − max  + As f s  d s − 2 
 2   

0
When M < M res , the amount of post-tensioning steel is adequate to resist the
cracking requirements (TS 10.1.1, 10.2.1).

steel and tension reinforcement should result in c < cmax.
0
(
When M res bal
< M d < M res )
, SAFE determines the required area of tension re-
inforcement, As, iteratively to satisfy the design moment M and reports the
0
required area of tension reinforcement. Since M is bounded by M res at the
bal 0
lower end and M res at the upper end, and M res is associated with As = 0 and
bal
M res is associated with As = Asbal , the required area will be within the range of
0 to As .
The tension reinforcement is to be placed at the bottom if Md is positive, or at

the top if Md is negative.

When (M d )
bal
> M res , compression reinforcement is required. In that case
SAFE assumes that the depth of the neutral axis, c, is equal to cmax . The values
17 - 18 Beam Design
of fpk and fs reach their respective balanced condition values, f pkbal and fsbal .
Then the area of compression reinforcement, A′s , is determined as follows:
 The moment required to be resisted by compression reinforcement and

tension reinforcement is:
bal
M res=
,s M d − M res

M res , s
A′s = , where
( f 's γ ms − 0.85 f cd ) ( d − d ')
c − d '
f ′s = εc3Es  max  ≤ f yk γ ms .
 cmax 
en by:
M res , s
Ascom =
f yd ( d s − d ')
be placed at the top if Md is positive, and vice versa if Md is negative.
17.7.1.2.3 Minimum and Maximum Tensile Reinforcement


ments.

tangular or flanged beam section is given as:
As,min ≥ 0.004 Act (TS 8.6.2)
Beam Design 17 - 19



to the beam major shear, the following steps are involved (TS 11.1 ):
 Determine the factored shear force, Vd
 Determine the shear force, Vc, that can be resisted by the concrete
these steps.


Vc = min(Vcw, Vcr) (TS 11.1.1, 11.1.2)
where,
Vcw 0.67bw h (σ ct2 + 0.8σ cpσ ct )

0.5
= (TS 11.1.1)
17 - 20 Beam Design
σ ct = 0.25 f ck0.25
σ cp = compress stress in concrete due to effective prestress forces only

(after allowance for all prestress losses) at the extreme fiber of the sec-
tion where tensile stress is caused by externally applied loads, N/mm2
 σ pef  V
1 − 0.55
Vcr = τ c bw d + M o d ≥ 0.12λ f ck bw d (TS 11.1.2)
 f pk  Md
d ≥ 0.80h (TS 11.1.2)
I
M o = 0.8σ cpd   (TS 11.1.2)
 y
where,
σ pef = compress stress in concrete due to effective prestress forces only

(after allowance for all prestress losses) at the extreme fiber of the sec-
tion where tensile stress is caused by externally applied loads,
σ pef ≤ 0.6 f pk N/mm2
σ cpd = compress stress in concrete due to gravity loading, N/mm2
fpk = characteristic strength of tendon, N/mm2
Vd = designed factored shear force at the section, N
Md = design factored moment at the section, N-mm

nally applied loads
Vcw = shear resistance provided by the concrete when diagonal cracking

results from high principal tensile stress in the web
Vcr = shear resistance provided by the concrete when diagonal cracking

results from combined shear and moment
Beam Design 17 - 21
For light-weight concrete, the f ck term is multiplied by the shear strength re-
duction factor λ.

Vmax = τ max bw d (TS 11.1)
τ max = 0.79 f ck0.5
Given Vd, Vc, and Vmax, the required shear reinforcement is calculated as fol-
lows:
 If Vd ≤ 0.5Vc
Asw
=0 (TS 11.2.1)
s
 If 0.5Vc < Vd ≤ Vmax
Asw (Vd − Vc )
= (TS 11.2.3)
s f ywd d
Asw f
≥ 0.25bw ctd (TS 11.2.1)
s f ywd
 If Vd > Vmax, a failure condition is declared (TS 11.1).
 If Vd exceeds the maximum permitted value of Vmax, the concrete section

 Note that if torsion design is performed and torsion rebar is

needed, the equation given in TS 500-2000 8.1.5 does not need
to be satisfied independently. See the next section Design of
Beam Torsion Reinforcement for details.
 The maximum of all of the calculated Asw/s values, obtained

from each design load combination, is reported along with the
17 - 22 Beam Design
controlling shear force and associated design load combination

name.
 The beam shear reinforcement requirements considered by the

program are based purely on shear strength considerations. Any
minimum stirrup requirements to satisfy spacing and volumetric
considerations must be investigated

the beam torsion:
 Determine the factored torsion, Td.

In the design of torsion reinforcement of any beam, the factored torsions for
each design load combination at a particular design station are obtained by fac-
toring the corresponding torsion for different analysis cases with the corre-
sponding design load combination factors (TS 8.2).
NOTE: All section listed in torsion design refers to TS 500-2000.
In a statistically indeterminate structure where redistribution of the torsional

moment in a member can occur due to redistribution of internal forces upon
cracking, the design Td is permitted to be reduced in accordance with code (TS
8.2.3). However, the program does not try to redistribute the internal forces and
to reduce Td. If redistribution is desired, the user should release the torsional
DOF in the structural model.
Beam Design 17 - 23

For torsion design, special section properties such as Ae, S and ue are calculat-
ed. These properties are described as follows (TS 8.2.4).
Ae = Area enclosed by centerline of the outermost closed transverse

S = Shape factor for torsion
ue = Perimeter of area Ae
In calculating the section properties involving reinforcement, such as Aov/s,

Aot/s, and ue, it is assumed that the distance between the centerline of the
outermost closed stirrup and the outermost concrete surface is 30 mm. This is
equivalent to 25-mm clear cover and a 10-mm-diameter stirrup placement. For
torsion design of T beam sections, it is assumed that placing torsion reinforce-
ment in the flange area is inefficient. With this assumption, the flange is ig-
nored for torsion reinforcement calculation. However, the flange is considered
during Tcr calculation. With this assumption, the special properties for a Rec-
tangular beam section are given as follows:
c bb − 22c
c c bf
c c
hdfs
c c
b bw − 2c
bbww

17 - 24 Beam Design
Ae = ( b − 2c )( h − 2c ) , (TS 8.2.4)
ut = 2 ( b − 2c ) + 2 ( h − 2c ) , (TS
8.2.4)
S = x2y/3 (TS 8.2.4 )
where, the section dimensions b, h and c are shown in Figure 3-9. Similarly,
the special section properties for a T beam section are given as follows:
Ae = ( bw − 2c )( h − 2c ) , (TS 8.2.4)
ut = 2 ( h − 2c ) + 2 ( bw − 2c ) , (TS 8.2.4)
S = Σx2y/3 (TS 8.2.4)

where the section dimensions bw, h and c for a T-beam are shown in
Figure 13-3.

Design for torsion may be ignored if either of the following is satisfied:
(i) The critical torsion limits, Tcr, for which the torsion in the section can be ig-
nored, is calculated as follows:
0.65 f ctd S
Td ≤ Tcr = (TS 8.2.3, Eqn 8.12 )
In that case, the program reports shear reinforcement based on TS 8.1.5, Eqn.
8.6. i.e.,
Asw f
≥ 0.3 ctd bw (TS 8.1.5, Eqn. 8.6)
s f ywd
(ii) When design shear force and torsional moment satisfy the following equa-
tion, there is no need to compute torsional stirrups. However, the minimum
stirrups and longitudinal reinforcement shown below must be provided:
2 2
 Vd   Td 
  +  ≤1 (TS 8.2.2, Eqn 8.10)
 Vcr   Tcr 
where Tcr is computed as follows:
Beam Design 17 - 25
Tcr = 1.35 f ctd S (TS 8.2.2, Eqn 8.11)
The required minimum closed stirrup area per unit spacing, Ao /s, is calculated
as:
Ao f  1.3Td 
= 0.15 ctd 1 +  bw (TS 8.2.4, Eqn. 8.17)
s f ywd  Vd bw 
Td
In Eqn. 8.17, ≤ 1.0 and for the case of statistically indeterminate struc-
Vd bw
ture where redistribution of the torsional moment in a member can occur due to
redistribution of internal forces upon cracking, minimum reinforcement will
obtained by taking Td equal to Tcr .
and the required minimum longitudinal rebar area, Asl, is calculated as:
Td ue
Asl = (TS 8.2.5, Eqn. 8.18 ).
2 Ae f yd

If the factored torsion Td is less than the threshold limit, Tcr, torsion can be
safely ignored (TS 8.2.3), when the torsion is not required for equilibrium. In
that case, the program reports that no torsion is required. However, if Td ex-
ceeds the threshold limit, Tcr, it is assumed that the torsional resistance is pro-
vided by closed stirrups, longitudinal bars, and compression diagonals (TS
8.2.4 and 8.2.5).
If Td > Tcr, the required longitudinal rebar area, Asl, is calculated as:
Td ue
Asl = (TS 8.2.4, Eqn. 8.16 )
2 Ae f yd
and the required closed stirrup area per unit spacing, Aot /s, is calculated as:
Ao Aov Aot
= + (TS 8.2.4, Eqn. 8.13)
s s s
17 - 26 Beam Design
Aov (Vd − Vc )
= (TS 8.2.4, Eqn. 8.14)
s df ywd
Aot Td
= (TS 8.2.4, Eqn. 8.15)
s 2 Ae f ywd
where, the minimum value of Ao /s is taken as:
Ao f  1.3Td 
= 0.15 ctd 1 +  bw (TS 8.2.4, Eqn. 8.17)
s f ywd  Vd bw 
1.3Td
where, ≤ 1.0
Vd bw
An upper limit of the combination of Vd and Td that can be carried by the sec-
tion also is checked using the following equation.
Td Vd
+ ≤ 0.22 f cd (TS 8.2.5b, Eqn. 8.19)
S bw d
The maximum of all the calculated Asl and Ao s values obtained from each de-
sign load combination is reported along with the controlling combination
names.

longitudinal reinforcement requirements to satisfy spacing considerations must
be investigated independently of the program by the user.
17.8 Slab Design

stressed reinforced concrete (TS 3233-1979) as described in the following sec-
Slab Design 17 - 27



17 - 28 Slab Design
cordingly.

slab is given by the following limits:

As,min ≥ 0.004 Act (TS 8.6.2)


has been imposed to be 0.04 times the gross cross-sectional area.

Only the code-specific items are described in the following sections.

the face of the support (TS 8.3.1). For rectangular columns and concentrated
the sides of the columns or the point loads (TS 8.3.1). Figure 13-4 shows the
The column location (i.e., interior, edge, corner) and the punching
Slab Design 17 - 29
d 2
d 2 d 2
d 2
d 2 d 2

The concrete punching shear stress capacity is taken as the following limit:
v=
pr f=
ctd 0.35 f ck γ c (TS 8.3.1)
17.8.2.3 Computation of Maximum Shear Stress

V pd  0.4 M pd ,2u p d 0.4 M pd ,3u p d 

v pd = 1 + η +η  , where (TS 8.3.1)
u p d  V pdWm ,2 V pdWm ,3 
η factor to be used in punching shear check
17 - 30 Slab Design
1
η= where b2 ≥ 0.7b1
1 + b2 / b1
When the aspect ratio of loaded area is greater than 3, the critical perime-
ter is limited assuming h = 3b
up is the effective perimeter of the critical section
Mpd is the design moment transmitted from the slab to the column at the
Vpd is the total punching shear force
Wm section modulus of area within critical punching perimeter (up)


as the punching shear capacity ratio by SAFE. If this ratio exceeds 1.0, punch-
ing shear reinforcement is designed as described in the following section.

that the slab thickness is greater than or equal to 250 mm, a (TS 8.3.2). If the
described in the subsections that follow.
Slab Design 17 - 31

reinforcement is limited to:
v=
pr f=
ctd 0.35 f ck γ c (TS 8.3.1)

v=
pr ,max 1.5
= f ctd 0.525 f ck γ c for shear links/shear studs (TS 8.3.1)
Given Vpd, Vpr, and Vpr,max, the required shear reinforcement is calculated as fol-
lows,
Av (V pd − V pr )
= (TS8.1.4 )
s f yd d
 If Vpd > Vpr,max, a failure condition is declared. (TS 8.3.1)
 If Vpd exceeds the maximum permitted value of Vpr,max, the concrete section

column.
17 - 32 Slab Design

edge
d 2 d 2 Iy
gy
gx
s0 s0 s0
Iy x x gx
Iy
Critical d 2
section
centroid Free
edge y x
y
centroid
Ix
Ix

NOTE: Shear Stud and shear links requirements are computed based on ACI
318-08 code as Turkish TS 500-2000 refers to special literature on this topic.
shall not exceed d / 2(ACI R11.3.3, 11.11.5.2. The spacing between adjacent
shear reinforcement in the first line (perimeter) of shear reinforcement shall not
exceed 2d measured in a direction parallel to the column face (ACI 11.11.3.3).

umns respectively.

not be less than the minimum cover specified in ACI 7.7 plus half of the

Slab Design 17 - 33
exceed 2d, and in the case of studs in a radial pattern, the angle between adja-
cent stud rails shall not exceed 60 degrees. The limits of so and the spacing, s,
between the peripheral lines are specified as:
so ≤ 0.5d (ACI 11.11.5.2)
0.75d for vu ≤ 6φλ f ′c

s≤ (ACI 11.11.5.2)
0.50d for vu > 6φλ f ′c
g ≤ 2d (ACI 11.11.5.3)
The limits of so and the spacing, s, between for the links are specified as:
so ≤ 0.5d (ACI 11.11.3)
s ≤ 0.50d (ACI 11.11.3)
17 - 34 Slab Design
Chapter 18
Design for Italian NTC 2008
crete design procedure that is used by SAFE when the user selects the Italian
code NTC2008 [D.M. 14/01/2008]. For the load combinations reference also is
made to NTC2008. Various notations used in this chapter are listed in Table
18-1.

18.1 Notations
Table 18-1 List of Symbols Used in the Italian NTC 2008 Code
Ac Area of concrete section, mm2
Notations 18 - 1
Asw Total cross-sectional area of links at the neutral axis, mm2
Asw /sv Area of shear reinforcement per unit length of the member,
mm2

zone, mm
d Effective depth of tension reinforcement, mm
d' Effective depth of compression reinforcement, mm

MPa
fcd Design concrete strength = αcc fck / γc , MPa
fck Characteristic compressive concrete cylinder strength at 28

days, MPa
fcwd Design concrete compressive strength for shear design = αcc

f cwk
, MPa
γc
18 - 2 Notations
Chapter 18 - Design for Italian NTC 2008
fcwk Characteristic compressive cylinder strength for shear design,
MPa
fyd Design yield strength of reinforcing steel = fyk /γs, MPa
fyk Characteristic strength of shear reinforcement, MPa
f ′s Compressive stress in beam compression steel, MPa
fywd Design strength of shear reinforcement = fywk /γs, MPa
fywk Characteristic strength of shear reinforcement, MPa
h Overall thickness of slab, mm
m Normalized design moment, M/bd2η fcd
mlim Limiting normalized moment capacity as a singly reinforced

beam
MED0 Design moment resistance of a section with tendons only,

N-mm
MEDbal Design moment resistance of a section with tendons and the

tion, N-mm
sv Spacing of the shear reinforcement along the length of the

beam, mm
u Perimeter of the punch critical section, mm
VRdc Design shear resistance from concrete alone, N
VRd,max Design limiting shear resistance of a cross-section, N
Notations 18 - 3
VEd Shear force at ultimate design load, N
x Depth of neutral axis, mm
xlim Limiting depth of neutral axis, mm
η Concrete strength reduction factor for sustained loading and

stress-block
β Enhancement factor of shear resistance for concentrated load;

also the coefficient that takes account of the eccentricity of
loading in determining punching shear stress; factor for the
depth of compressive stress block
γc Partial safety factor for concrete strength
γs Partial safety factor for steel strength
δ Redistribution factor
εc Concrete strain
ε's Strain in compression steel.
ν Effectiveness factor for shear resistance without concrete

crushing
ρ Tension reinforcement ratio
ω Normalized tensile steel ratio, As fyd /η fcd bd
ω' Normalized compression steel ratio, A's fyd γs /α f's bd
ωlim Normalized limiting tensile steel ratio
18 - 4 Notations

prestress in accordance with NTC2008.
The combinations required for shear design of beams and punching shear re-
quire the full PT forces (primary and secondary). Flexural design requires only
the hyperstatic (secondary) forces. The hyperstatic (secondary) forces are
determined automatically by SAFE by subtracting out the primary PT moments
when the flexural design is carried out.
for which the structure needs to be checked. NTC2008 allows load combina-
tions to be defined based on NTC2008 Equation 2.5.1.
∑
≥1
j
γG 1, j
G 1k , j + ∑ γ G 2k ,l G 2k ,l + PT + γ Q ,1Q k ,1 + ∑ γ Q ,iψ 0,iQ k ,i
l ≥1 i >1
(Eq. 2.5.1)
Load combinations considering seismic loading are automatically generated

based on NTC2008 Equation 2.5.5.
∑
j
G k j + ∑G k l + P + E + ∑ψ
≥1
1 ,
l ≥1 i
2 ,
>1
2,i
Q k ,i (Eq. 2.5.5)
For both sets of load combinations, the variable values are defined in the list
that follows.
γG1,sup = 1.30 (NTC2008 Table 2.6.I)
γG1,inf = 1.00 (NTC2008 Table 2.6.I)
γG2,sup = 1.50 (NTC2008 Table 2.6.I)
γG2,inf = 0.00 (NTC2008 Table 2.6.I)
γQ,1,sup = 1.5 (NTC2008 Table 2.6.I)
γQ,1,inf = 0.0 (NTC2008 Table 2.6.I)

γQ,I,sup = 1.5 (NTC2008 Table 2.6.I)
γQ,I,inf = 0.0 (NTC2008 Table 2.6.I)
ψ0,i = 0.7 (live load, assumed not to be storage) (Table 2.5.I)
ψ0,i = 0.6 (wind load) (Table 2.5.I)
ψ0,i = 0.5 (snow load, assumed H ≤ 1,000 m) (Table 2.5.I)
ψ2,i = 0.3 (live, assumed office/residential space) (Table 2.5.I)
ψ2,i = 0 (snow, assumed H ≤ 1,000 m) (Table 2.5.I)
If roof live load is treated separately or other types of loads are present, other
appropriate load combinations should be used.

fer of prestress force in accordance with NTC2008 § 4.1.8.1.4. The prestressing
forces are considered without any long-term loses for the initial service load
combination check.
∑
j
G k j + PT
≥1
1 ,

requirements of prestress for serviceability in accordance with NTC2008 §
4.1.8.1.3. It is assumed that all long-term losses have occurred already at the
service stage.
∑
j
G k j + ∑G k l + PT + Q k
≥1
1 ,
l ≥1
2 , ,1
+ ∑ψ 0,iQ k ,i
i >1


The concrete compressive strength, fck, should not be greater than 90 MPa
(NTC2008 Tab. 4.1.I). The reinforcement material should be B450C or B450A
(NTC2008 §11.3.2).
NTC Table 11.3.Ia:

fy,nom 450 N/mm2
ft,nom 540 N/mm2
NTC Table 11.3.Ib: Material TYPE B450C Properties

Properties Prerequisite Fracture %
Characteristic yield stress, fyk ≥ fy,nom 5.0

Characteristic rupture stress, ftk ≥ fy,nom 5.0
(ft/ fy)k ≥ 1.15
< 1.35 10.0
Elongation at rupture
(fy/ fy,nom)k < 1.25 10.0
(Agt)k ≥ 7.5 % 10.0
NTC Table 11.3.Ic: Material TYPE B450A Properties
Properties Prerequisite Fracture %
Characteristic yield stress, fyk ≥ fy,nom 5.0

Characteristic rupture stress, ftk ≥ fy,nom 5.0
(ft/ fy)k ≥ 1.05
< 1.25 10.0
Elongation at rupture
(fy/ fy,nom)k < 1.25 10.0
(Agt)k ≥ 2.5 % 10.0

The specified characteristic strength of prestressed steel should conform to

NTC2008 §11.3.3.
The program also checks the following tensile strength in prestressing steel
(EC2 5.10.2.1). The maximum stresses applied to the tendon, σp,max, in all types
of prestressing steel, in terms of the specified minimum tensile strength fpk, are
summarized as follows:
σ p,max = min {k1 f pk , k2 f p 0.1k } (EC2 5.10.2.1)
The recommended value for k1 and k2 are 0.8 and 0.9 where, f p 0.1k( ) is defined
as the characteristic value of 0.1% proof load and ( f ) is the characteristic
pk
maximum load in axial tension (EC2 3.3.3, Figure 3.9).
The stress in tendons immediately after tensioning or after prestress transfer is

also limited to the following:
σ pm 0 = min {k7 f pk , k8 f p 0.1k } (EC2 5.10.3)
The recommended values for k7 and k8 are 0.75 and 0.85.

the characteristic strength, fck , f pk and f p 0.1k of the material by a partial factor
of safety, γs and γc, as follows (EC2 3.1.6, 3.2.7, 3.3.6(6)).
α cc fck / γ c
fcd = (NTC Eq. 4.1.4)
α cc fcwk / γ c
fcwd = (EC2 3.1.6 (1))
f yd f yk / γ s
= (NTC Eq. 4.1.6)
f ywd f ywk / γ s
= (NTC Eq. 4.1.6)
f pd f p 0.1k / γ p
= (EC2 3.3.6 (6))

The value αcc is the coefficient that accounts for long-term effects on the com-
pressive strength; αcc is taken as 0.85 by default and can be overwritten by the
user.
The values of partial safety factors, γs and γc, for the materials and the design
following table:

Reinforcement, γs 1.15
Prestressing steel, γp 1.15
Concrete in flexure and axial load, γc 1.50
advised.

tures
For Post-Tensioned elements NTC2008 (§ 4.1.8) refers completely to EC2-
2004. So all the particular prescriptions regarding Post-Tensioned elements are
checked according to EC2.
Ultimate limit state design of prestressed members for flexure and axial loads
shall be based on assumptions given in EC2 6.1(2).
 The strain distribution in the concrete in compression is derived from the as-
sumption that plane sections remain plane.
 The design stresses in the concrete in compression are taken as η fcd. Maxi-
mum strain at the extreme concrete compression fiber shall be assumed equal
to εcu3.

 The strains in bonded post-tensioning tendons and in any additional rein-

forcement (compression or tension) are the same as that in the surrounding
concrete.

assumptions given in EC2 7.2.
entire load range.
EC2 7.2(3).


time dependent prestress losses) are checked against the following limits (EC2
5.10.2.2 and 7.1):
0.60 f ck (t) (EC2 5.10.2.2(5))

 Extreme fiber stresses in tension (EC2 7.1)
≤ fctm(t) where, (EC2 7.1(2))
fctm = 0.30 fck( )

2/3
for fck ≤ C50/C60 (EC2 Table 3.1)
=fctm 2.12ln (1 + fcm / 10 ) for fck > C50/C60 (EC2 Table 3.1)
= fck + 8MPa
fcm (EC2 Table 3.1)
 Extreme fiber stresses in tension should not exceed fctm; otherwise, the sec-
tion should be designed as a cracked section (EC2 7.1).

following limits (EC2 7.2(2)):
0.6 f ck (EC2 7.2(2))
 Extreme fiber stresses in tension in the precompressed tensile zone at charac-

teristic service loads are defined as follows (EC2 7.2(5)):
0.8 f yk (EC2 7.2(5))
0.75 f pk (EC2 7.2(5))
Although cracking is permitted for Exposure Classes X0, XC1, XC2, XC3, and
XC4, it may be assumed that the design hypothetical tensile stresses exist at the

limiting crack widths given in Eurocode 2, Table 7.1N. Limits to the design
hypothetical tensile stresses under Frequent Load combinations are given in the
following table (TR43, Second Edition):
Group Limiting crack width(mm) Design stress

Bonded Tendons 0.1 1.35 fctm
0.2 1.65 fctm
Unbonded tendons - 1.35 fctm
18.7 Beam Design


18 - 12 Beam Design


the concrete.
in Figure 18-1 (EC2 3.1.7(3)).
Beam Design 18 - 13
ε cu 3 η f cd
b
A′s f ′s Cs
x a = λx
d′
dp
ds h
Ap
εp Tcps
Ts Tcs
As εs
STRAIN STRESS
BEAM
DIAGRAM DIAGRAM
SECTION
The area of the stress block and the depth of the center of the compressive
force from the most compressed fiber are taken as:
Fc = η fcd a b
a=λx
where x is the depth of the neutral axis; the factor λ defines the effective height
of the compression zone; and the factor η defines the effective strength, as fol-
lows:
λ = 0.8 for fck ≤50 MPa (EC2 3.1.7(3))
 fck − 50 
λ = 0.8   for 50 ≤ fck ≤ 90 MPa (EC2 3.1.7(3))
 400 
η = 1.0 for fck ≤ 50 MPa and (EC2 3.1.7(3))
 f − 50 
η 1.0 −  CK
=  for 50 ≤ f ck ≥ 90 MPa (EC2 3.1.7(3))
 200 
18 - 14 Beam Design
neutral axis depth, to safeguard against non-ductile failures (EC2 5.5(4)).
When the applied moment exceeds the limiting moment capacity as a singly re-
inforced beam, the area of compression reinforcement is calculated on the
ue.

0
 ε cu 3 
cmax =   dp
 ε cu 3 + ε s min 
where,
εcu3 = 0.0035
Therefore, the limit x ≤ xmax is set for tension-controlled sections.
The maximum allowable depth of the compression block is given by:
amax = λ xmax (EC2 3.1.7(3))
where,
λ = 0.8 if fck < 50 MPa (EC2 3.1.7)
 f − 50 
λ 0.8 −  ck
=  if fck > 50 MPa (EC2 3.1.7)
 400 
Beam Design 18 - 15
a = λx

0  a
M ED
= f pk Ap  d p − 
 2
0
controlled case. In that case, it is assumed that the depth of the neutral axis x
C = η fcd amax b
η fcd amax b − Ap f pkbal

Asbal =
fsbal
bal  a   a 
M=
 2   2 
18 - 16 Beam Design

0

(
0
When M ED bal
< M < M ED )
forcement, As, iteratively to satisfy the design moment M and reports this
0
required area of tension reinforcement. Since M is bound by M ED at the low-
bal 0
er end and M ED at the upper end, and M ED is associated with As = 0 and
bal
M ED is associated with As = Asbal , the required area will fall within the range
of 0 to Asbal.


adequate
( bal
When M > M ED )
that case, SAFE assumes that the depth of the neutral axis, x, is equal to xmax .
Beam Design 18 - 17
and f sbal . Then the area of compression reinforcement, A′s , is determined as

follows:

bal
M ED=
,s M − M ED
M ED,s
A′s = , where
( 0.87f ′s - ηfcd )( d - d' )
a − d'
f ′s = εcu3Es  max  ≤ 0.87fy.
 amax 

en by:
M ED , s
Ascom =
0.87 f y ( d s − d ')

18 - 18 Beam Design

0
ε cu 3 η f cd η f cd
bf hf
d′ f ′s Cs Cf
A′s a = λx
x
dp
ds
Cw
Aps
ε ps
Tw Tf
εs Ts
bw
BEAM STRAIN STRESS
 ε cu3 
cmax =   dp
 ε cu3 + ε s min 
where,
εcu3 = 0.0035
Therefore, the program limit for the depth of the neutral axis is x ≤ xmax for ten-
sion-controlled sections.

amax = λ xmax (EC2 3.1.7(3))
where,
λ = 0.8 if fck < 50 MPa (EC2 3.1.7)
Beam Design 18 - 19
 f − 50 
λ 0.8 −  ck
=  if f ck > 50 MPa (EC2 3.1.7)
 400 
a = λx
0  a
M ED
= f pk Ap  d p − 
 2

0
controlled case. In that case it is assumed that the depth of the neutral axis x
amax.

C = η fcd amax Accom
18 - 20 Beam Design
η fcd amax Accom − Ap f pkbal

Asbal =
fsbal
bal  a   a 
M=
 2   2 

0
When M < the amount of post-tensioning steel is adequate to resist the
M ED ,

0
(
When M ED bal
< M < M ED )
0
required area of tension reinforcement. Since M is bounded by M ED at the
bal 0
lower end and M ED at the upper end, and M ED is associated with As = 0 and
bal
M ED is associated with As = Asbal , the required area will be within the range of
0 to As .

Beam Design 18 - 21
( bal
When M > M ED )
that case SAFE assumes that the depth of the neutral axis, x, is equal to xmax .
follows:

bal
M ED=
,s M − M ED

M ED,s
A′s = , where
( 0.87 f 's − η fcd )( d − d ' )
a − d'
f ′s = εcu3Es  max  ≤ 0.87fy.
 amax 
en by:
M ED,s
Ascom =
0.87 f y ( ds − d ' )

18 - 22 Beam Design

ments.

fctm
As ,min 0.26
= bd ≥ 0.0013bd (EC2 9.2.1.1)
f yk
computed as:
(2 3)
f ctm = 0.30 f ck for fck ≤ 50 MPa (EC2 3.12, Table 3.1)
=fctm 2.12ln (1 + fcm 10 ) for fck > 50 MPa (EC2 3.12, Table 3.1)
= fck + 8 MPa
fcm (EC2 3.12, Table 3.1)


(EC2 9.2.1.1(3)).

to the beam major shear, the following steps are involved (EC2 6.2):
 Determine the factored shear force, V
 Determine the shear force, VRd,c, that can be resisted by the concrete
these steps.
Beam Design 18 - 23


The design shear resistance of the beam without shear reinforcement, VRd,c is
calculated as:
VRd,c = [CRd,c k(100 ρ1fck)1/3 + k1 σcp ] (bwd) (EC2 6.2.2(1))
VRd,c ≥ [vmin + k1 σcp ] (bwd), (EC2 6.2.2(1))
where fck is in MPa
200
1+
k= ≤ 2.0 with d in mm (EC2 6.2.2(1))
d
ρ1 = tension reinforcement ratio =

(A s1 + Aps )
≤ 0.02 (EC2 6.2.2(1))
bw d
As1 = area of mild-tension reinforcement (EC2 6.2.2(1))
Aps = area of prestress-tension reinforcement (EC2 6.2.2(1))
σcp = average stress in concrete due to axial

force N Ed Ac (EC2 6.2.2(1))
σcp N Ed Ac < 0.2 fcd z MPa

= (EC2 6.2.2(1))
Ac = the total gross area of concrete section
The value of CRd,c, vmin, and k1 for use in a country may be found in its National
Annex. The program default values for CRd,c, vmin and k1 are given as follows
(EC2 6.2.2(1)):
CRd,c = 0.18/γc,
18 - 24 Beam Design
vmin = 0.035 k3/2 fck1/2
k1 = 0.15.
If light-weight concrete:
CRd,c= 0.15/γc (EC2 11.6.1(1))
vmin = 0.03 k3/2 fck1/2 (EC2 11.6.1(1))
k1 = 0.15. (EC2 11.6.1(1))

along the length of the beam. The assumptions in designing the shear rein-
forcement are as follows:
 The beam sections are assumed to be prismatic. The effect of any variation of
width in the beam section on the concrete shear capacity is neglected.
 The effect on the concrete shear capacity of any concentrated or distributed

load in the span of the beam between two columns is ignored. Also, the
effect of the direct support on the beams provided by the columns is ignored.
 All shear reinforcement is assumed to be perpendicular to the longitudinal

reinforcement.
In designing the shear reinforcement for a particular beam, for a particular load
combination, the following steps of the standard method are involved (EC2
6.2).
 Obtain the design value of the applied shear force V from the SAFE analysis
results (EC2 6.2.3(3)).
α cw bw zν 1 fcd
VRd ,max = , where (EC2 6.2.3(3))
cot θ + tan θ
αcw is conservatively taken as 1 (EC2 6.2.3(3))
Beam Design 18 - 25
The strength reduction factor for concrete cracked in shear, v1 is defined as:
 f ck 
ν 1 = 0.61 −  (EC2 6.2.2(6))
 250 
z = 0.9d (EC2 6.2.3(1))
θ is optimized by program and is set to 45° for combinations including

seismic loading (EC2 6.2.3(2)).
 Given VEd, VRdc, VRd,max, the required shear reinforcement in area/unit length
is calculated as follows:
 If VEd ≤ VRdc,
Asw Asw,min
=
sv s
 If VR,dc < VEd ≤ VRd,max
Asw VEd A
= ≥ sw,min (EC2 6.2.3(3))
s zf ywd cot θ s
 If VEd > VRd,max
a failure condition is declared. (EC2 6.2.3(3))
The maximum of all the calculated Asw /sv values, obtained from each load
load combination number.
The minimum shear reinforcement is defined as:
Asw,min 0.08 fck

= bw (EC2 9.2.2(5))
s f yk

18 - 26 Beam Design

 Determine the factored torsion, TEd

tors.

design TEd is permitted to be reduced in accordance with the code (EC2
6.3.1(2)). However, the program does not automatically redistribute the inter-
nal forces and reduce TEd. If redistribution is desired, the user should release
the torsional degree of freedom (DOF) in the structural model.

For torsion design, special section properties, such as Ak, tef, u, uk, and zi are
calculated. These properties are described in the following (EC2 6.3.2).
A = Area enclosed by the outside perimeter of the cross-section
Ak = Area enclosed by centerlines of the connecting walls, where the

centerline is located a distance of tef /2 from the outer surface
tef = Effective wall thickness, A/u. It is taken as at least twice the
Beam Design 18 - 27
distance between the edge and center of the longitudinal rebar.
u = Outer perimeter of the cross-section
uk = Perimeter of the area Ak
zi = Side length of wall i, defined as the distance between the inter-

section points of the wall centerlines
In calculating the section properties involving reinforcement, such as Ak, and

uk, it is assumed that the distance between the centerline of the outermost
to 38-mm clear cover and a 12-mm stirrup. For torsion design of flanged beam
sections, it is assumed that placing torsion reinforcement in the flange area is
inefficient. With this assumption, the flange is ignored for torsion reinforce-
ment calculation. However, the flange is considered during calculation of tor-
sion section properties. With this assumption, the special properties for a rec-
tangular beam section are given as:
A = bh (EC2 6.3.2(1))
Ak = (b − tef)(h − tef) (EC2 6.3.2(1))
u = 2b + 2h (EC2 6.3.2(1))
uk = 2(b − tef) + 2(h − tef) (EC2 6.3.2(3))
A = bwh (EC2 6.3.2(1))
Ak = (bw – tef)(h – tef) (EC2 6.3.2(1))
u = 2bw + 2h (EC2 6.3.2(1))
uk = 2(h – tef) + 2(bw – tef) (EC2 6.3.2(3))
in Figure 18-3.
18 - 28 Beam Design
c bb − 22c
c c bef
c c
hdfs
c c
b bw − 2c
bbww


The torsion in the section can be ignored with only minimum shear reinforce-
ment (EC2 9.2.1.1) required if the following condition is satisfied:
TEd V
+ Ed ≤ 1.0 (EC2 6.3.2(5))
TRd ,c VRd ,c
where VRd,c is as defined in the previous section and TRd,c is the torsional crack-
ing moment, calculated as:
TRd ,c = f ctd t ef 2 Ak (EC2 6.3.2(1), 6.3.2(5))
where tef, and fctd, the design tensile strength, are defined as:
tef = A u (EC2 6.3.2(1))
fctd = α ct fctk 0.05 γ c (EC2 Eq. 3.16)
Beam Design 18 - 29
where A is the gross cross-section area, u is the outer circumference of the

cross-section, αct is a coefficient, taken as 1.0, taking account of long- term ef-
fects on the tensile strength, and fctk0.05 is defined as:
fctk0.05 = 0.7fctm (EC2 Table 3.1)

If the expression in the previous subsection is satisfied, torsion can be safely
ignored (EC2 6.3.2(5)) with only minimum shear reinforcement required. In
that case, the program reports that no torsion reinforcement is required. How-
ever, if the equation is not satisfied, it is assumed that the torsional resistance is
provided by closed stirrups, longitudinal bars, and compression diagonals.
If torsion reinforcement in the form of closed stirrups is required, the shear due
to this torsion, Vt, is first calculated, followed by the required stirrup area, as:
At Vt
= (EC2 6.2.3(3))
s zf ywd cot θ
V=
t (h − t ) T
ef
Ed− Tcon
2 Ak
(EC2 6.3.2(1))
The required longitudinal reinforcement for torsion is defined as:
 V 
Tcon= 1 − Ed  TRd ,c (EC2 6.3.2(5))
 V
 Rd ,c 
TEd u
Asl = cot θ k (EC2 6.3.2(3))
2 Ak f yd
where θ is the angle of the compression struts, as previously defined for beam
shear. In the preceding expressions, θ is taken as 45 degrees. The code allows
any value between 21.8 and 45 degrees (EC2 6.2.3(2)), while the program
assumes the conservative value of 45 degrees.
18 - 30 Beam Design
When torsional reinforcement is required, an upper limit on the combination of

VEd and TEd that can be carried by the section without exceeding the capacity of
the concrete struts also is checked using:
TEd VEd
+ ≤ 1.0 (EC2 6.3.2(4))
TRd ,max VRd ,max
where TRd,max, the design torsional resistance moment is defined as:
TRd ,max = 2να cw fcd Ak tef sin θ cosθ (EC2 6.3.2(4))
If this equation is not satisfied, a failure condition is declared. In that case, the
concrete section should be increased in size.
The maximum of all of the calculated Asl and At /s values obtained from each
load combination is reported, along with the controlling combination.

18.8 Slab Design

stressed reinforced concrete (EC2-2004) as described in the following sections.

Slab Design 18 - 31


cordingly.
18 - 32 Slab Design

slab is given by the following limits (EC2 9.3.1.1, 9.2.1.1, UK, NA Table
NA.1):
f ctm
As ,min = 0.26 bd (EC2 9.2.1.1(1))
f yk
As ,min = 0.0013bd (EC2 9.2.1.1(1))
computed as:
(2 3)
f ctm = 0.30 f ck for fck ≤ 50 MPa (EC2 Table 3.1)
=fctm 2.12ln (1 + fcm 10 ) for fck > 50 MPa (EC2 Table 3.1)
= fck + 8 MPa
fcm (EC2 Table 3.1)


has been imposed to be 0.04 times the gross cross-sectional area (EC2
9.2.1.1(3)).

Only the code specific items are described in the following.

The punching shear is checked at the face of the column (EC2 6.4.1(4)) and at
a critical section at a distance of 2.0d from the face of the support (EC2
6.4.2(1)). The perimeter of the critical section should be constructed such that
its length is minimized. Figure 18-4 shows the auto punching perimeters con-
Slab Design 18 - 33
sidered by SAFE for the various column shapes. The column location (i.e., in-
terior, edge, corner) and the punching perimeter may be overwritten using the
Punching Check Overwrites.
2d
2d 2d
2d 2d 2d

The concrete punching shear stress capacity is taken as:
VRd ,c C Rd ,c k (100 ρ1 fck ) + k1σ cp 

13
= (EC2 6.4.4(1))
with a minimum of:
VRd ,c = (vmin + k1σ cp ) (EC2 6.4.4(1))
where fck is in MPa and
200
1+
k= ≤ 2.0 with d in mm (EC2 6.4.4(1))
d
ρ1 = ρ1 x ρ1 y ≤ 0.02 (EC2 6.4.4(1))
18 - 34 Slab Design
where ρ1x and ρ1y are the reinforcement ratios in the x and y directions respec-
tively, conservatively taken as zeros, and
σcp = (σcx + σcy)/2 (EC2 6.4.4(1))
where σcx and σcy are the normal concrete stresses in the critical section in the x
and y directions respectively, conservatively taken as zeros.
C Rd ,c = 0.18 γ c (EC2 6.4.4(1))
ν min = 0.035k 3 2 f ck 1 2 (EC2 6.4.4(1))
k1 = 0.15 (EC2 6.4.4(1))

VEd  M Ed ,2u1 M u 
vEd = 1 + k + k Ed ,3 1  , where (EC2 6.4.4(2))
ud  VEdW1,2 VEdW1,3 
k is the function of the aspect ratio of the loaded area in Table 6.1 of EN
1992-1-1
u1 is the effective perimeter of the critical section
MEd is the design moment transmitted from the slab to the column at the
VEd is the total punching shear force
W1 accounts for the distribution of shear based on the control perimeter

Slab Design 18 - 35

lowing section.

The use of shear studs as shear reinforcement in slabs is permitted provided
that the effective depth of the slab is greater than or equal to 200 mm.
Punching Shear as described in the earlier section remain unchanged. The de-
sign of punching shear reinforcement is as described in the following subsec-
tions.

α cw v1 fcd
VRd,max = b z where (EC2 6.2.3(3))
( cot θ + tan θ ) w
αcw is conservatively taken as 1
 f 
v1 = 0.6  1 − ck 
 250 
z = 0.9d (EC2 6.2.3(1))
1 ≤ cot θ ≤ 2.5, program default value is 1, which can

be overwritten by the user (EC2 6.2.3(2))
Given νEd, vRd,c and vRd,max, the required shear reinforcement is calculated as fol-
lows (EC2 6.4.5):
 If νEd < vRd,max,
18 - 36 Slab Design
Aw =
( vEd − 0.75vRd ,c ) u
sr (EC2 6.4.5)
1.5 f ywd
 If νEd > vRd,max, a failure condition is declared. (EC2 6.4.3)
 If νEd exceeds the maximum permitted value of vRD,max, the concrete section

Punching shear reinforcement in the vicinity of a rectangular columns should
be arranged on peripheral lines, i.e., a line running parallel to and at constant
distances from the sides of the column. Figure 18-5 shows a typical arrange-
ment of shear reinforcement in the vicinity of a rectangular interior, edge, and
corner column.
shall not exceed 2d. The spacing between adjacent shear reinforcement in the
parallel to the column face (EC2 6.4.5(4)).

umns respectively.

edge
d 2 d 2 Iy
gy
gx
s0 s0 s0
Iy x x gx
Iy
Critical d 2
section
centroid Free
edge y x
y
centroid
Ix
Ix
Slab Design 18 - 37


not be less than the minimum cover specified in EC2 4.4.1 plus half of the di-

ceed 1.5d and should not exceed 2d at additional perimeters. The limits of so
and the spacing, s, between the peripheral lines are specified as:
0.3d ≤ so ≤ 2d (EC2 9.4.3(1))
s ≤ 0.75d (EC2 9.4.3(1))
g ≤ 1.5d (first perimeter) (EC2 9.4.3(1))
g ≤ 2d (additional perimeters) (EC2 9.4.3(1))
18 - 38
Chapter 19
Design for Hong Kong CP 2013
crete design procedure that is used by SAFE when the user selects the Hong
Kong limit state code CP-2013 [CP 2013]. Various notations used in this chap-
ter are listed in Table 19-1. For referencing to the pertinent sections of the
Hong Kong CP code in this chapter, a prefix “CP” followed by the section
number is used.

19.1 Notations
Notations 19 - 1
mm2/mm
zone, mm
MPa
f ′s Compressive stress in a beam compression steel, MPa
fyv Characteristic strength of link reinforcement, MPa
19 - 2 Notations
1

3
k2

mm
tion, N-mm
T Tension force, N
ical section, MPa
MPa
section, MPa
MPa
z Lever arm, mm
Notations 19 - 3
εc Maximum concrete strain
'

of safety, γf (CP 2.3.2.1, Table 2.1). For Hong Kong CP 2013, if a structure is
subjected to dead (G), live (Q), pattern live (PQ), and wind (W) loads, and con-
sidering that wind forces are reversible, the load combinations in the following
sections may need to be considered (CP 2.3.2.1, 12.3.4.2, 12.3.4.3 and
12.3.5.1).

fer of prestress forces in accordance with Hong Kong CP 2013 sections 12.3.5.
1.0G + 1.0PT


1.0G + 1.0PT
1.0G + 1.0Q + 1.0PT

prestress in accordance with CP 2.3.2.1, Table 2.1.
The combinations required for shear design of beams and punching shear
require the full PT forces (primary and secondary). Flexural design requires on-
ly the hyperstatic (secondary) forces. The hyperstatic (secondary) forces are de-
termined automatically by SAFE by subtracting the primary PT moments when
the flexural design is completed.
1.4G + 1.0PT*
1.4G + 1.6Q + 1.0PT*
1.4G + 1.6(0.75PQ) + 1.0PT*
1.0G ± 1.4W +1.0PT*
1.4G ± 1.4W + 1.0PT*
1.2G + 1.2Q ± 1.2W + 1.0PT*
*


The specified characteristic strength of un-tensioned reinforcement is given as

follows (CP 3.2.3, Table 3.3):
Hot rolled mild reinforcement - 250 MPa (CP 3.2.3, Table 3.3)
High yield reinforcement - 500 MPa (CP 3.2.3, Table 3.3)
The specified characteristic strength of prestressing steel should conform to CP

2013 section 3.3.

CP Table 2.2 (CP 2.4.3.2):
the equations.


tures

assumption that a plane section remains plane (CP 12.3.7.1).
equal to 0.0035 (CP 12.3.7.1).
 Tensile strength of the concrete is ignored (CP 12.3.7.1).

ment (compression or tension) is derived from the assumption that plane
section remains plane (CP 12.3.7.1).
entire load range (CP 12.3.4.1).
CP 12.3.4.2, 12.3.4.3 and 12.3.5 (CP 12.3.4.1).

loads on the strain and force in the tendons may be ignored (CP 12.3.4.1).

(CP 12.3.4.2 and 12.3.4.3):



compression into this zone, thus effectively reducing the magnitude of the
tensile stress (CP 12.1.3).
Class 2: Flexural tensile stresses with no visible cracking
Class 3: Flexural tensile stresses with surface crack widths as follows:
 ≤ 0.1 mm for members in exposure conditions 3 and 4 (Table 4.1

of CP 2013)
 ≤ 0.2 mm for all other members

12.3.5.1 and 12.3.5.2):
 Extreme fiber stress in tension for Calss 2:

cracked section.

bers at service loads, and after all prestress losses have occurred, are checked
against the following limits (CP 12.3.4.2 an 12.3.4.3):




section is uncracked and the user is limiting the tensile stress at the service
stage as presented in Table 12.2, modified by the coefficients in Table 12.3 of
CP 2013. The user needs to provide the tension limits for Class 3 elements at
service loads in the design preferences (CP 12.3.4.3).

19.7 Beam Design



19 - 10 Beam Design


the concrete.
in Figure 12-1 (CP 6.1.2.4(a)), where εc,max is defined as:
0.0035 if fcu ≤ 60 MPA

ε c,max =  1
0.0035 − 0.00006 ( fcu − 60 ) 2 if fcu > 60 MPA

exceed 10% (i.e., βb ≥ 0.9) (CP 6.1.2.4(b)). The code also places a limitation on
the neutral axis depth,
0.5 for fcu ≤ 45 N mm 2

x 
≤ 0.4 for 45 < fcu ≤ 70 N mm 2
d 
0.33 for 70 < fcu ≤ 100 N mm 2
to safeguard against non-ductile failures (CP 6.1.2.4(b)). In addition, the area

of compression reinforcement is calculated assuming that the neutral axis depth
that the design ultimate axial force does not exceed 0.1 fcu Ag (CP 6.1.2.4(a));
ly.
Beam Design 19 - 11
ε 0.67 f cu γ m
b
A′s f ′s Cs
a
d′ x
ds dp
Aps
ε ps Tcps
Ts Tcs
As εs
BEAM STRAIN STRESS

0.5, for f cu ≤ 45 N mm 2
x 
= 0.4, for 45 < f cu ≤ 70 N mm 2 (CP 6.1.2.4(b))
d  2
0.33, for 70 < f cu ≤ 100 N mm
19 - 12 Beam Design
0.9x for f cu ≤ 45 N/mm 2


=a 0.8x for 45 < f cu ≤ 70 N/mm 2 (CP 6.1.2.4(a))

0.72x for 70 < f cu ≤ 100 N/mm 2
depth (CP 6.1.2.4(c)).
 K 
z = d 0.5 + 0.25 −  ≤ 0.95d, (CP 6.1.2.4(c))
 0.9 

 a
 2
0.67 f cu
C= amax b
γm
0.67 f cu
γm
Asbal =
f sbal
Beam Design 19 - 13

M=
u Aps f pb  d p − 2  + As fs  ds − 2 
   


Asbal.

19 - 14 Beam Design
equate
bal

reinforcement is:
= M − M ubal
M us
Mus
A' s = , where (CP 6.1.2.4(c))
 0.67 fcu 
 f 's −  ( d − d' )
 γc 
 d′ 
′s Es ε c  1 −  ≤ 0.87 f y ,
f= (CP 6.1.2.4(c), 3.2.6, Fig. 3.9)
 x

en by:
M us
Ascom =
0.87 f y ( d s − d ')

Beam Design 19 - 15

0.5, for f cu ≤ 45 N mm 2
x 
= 0.4, for 45 < f cu ≤ 70 N mm 2 (CP 6.1.2.4(b))
d 
0.33, for 70 < f cu ≤ 100 N mm 2
0.9x for f cu ≤ 45 N/mm 2


=a 0.8x for 45 < f cu ≤ 70 N/mm 2 (CP 6.1.2.4(a))
 2
0.72x for 70 < f cu ≤ 100 N/mm
depth (CP 6.1.2.4(c)).
 K 
z = d 0.5 + 0.25 −  ≤ 0.95d, (CP 6.1.2.4(c))
 0.9 

 a
 2
19 - 16 Beam Design
 If a ≤ hf, the subsequent calculations for As are exactly the same as previous-
of the beam is taken as bf. Compression reinforcement is required when K >
K'.
0.67 f cu
C= amax Accom
γc
Accom = (
bal
0.67 f cu
γm
Asbal =
f sbal
Beam Design 19 - 17
ε 0.67 f cu γ m 0.67 f cu γ m
bf hf
d′ f ′s Cs
A′s Cf
x
d
Cw
Aps
ε ps
Tw Tf
As εs Ts
bw

requirements.

Asbal.
19 - 18 Beam Design

equate
bal
lows:

reinforcement is:
= M − M ubal
M us
Mus
A 's = , where (CP 6.1.2.4(c))
 0.67 fcu 
 f 's −
γ c 
( d − d ')

 d'
′s Esε c  1 −  ≤ 0.87 f y
f= (CP 6.1.2.4(c))
 x

en by:
Mus
Ascom =
0.87 f y ( ds − d ' )
compression reinforcement is A's. As is to be placed at the bottom, and A's is
to be placed at the top if M is positive and vice versa if M is negative.
Beam Design 19 - 19


from CP Table 9.1(CP 9.2.1.1) with interpolation for reinforcement of interme-
diate strength:
Minimum percentage
As
bh
bw A
< 0.4 100 s 0.32 0.18
≥ 0.4 100 0.24 0.13
bf bw h
 100 0.48 0.26
compression bw h
 100 0.36 0.20
compression bw h

given by the following table, which is taken from CP Table 9.1(CP 9.2.1.1)
19 - 20 Beam Design
A′
bh
A′s
bf hf
T- or L-Beam
A′s
bw h

3.12.6.1).

6.1.2.5):

with these steps.

V
v= (CP 6.1.2.5(a))
bw d
Beam Design 19 - 21
vmax = min(0.8 fcu , 7 MPa) (CP 6.1.2.5(a), 12.3.8.2)
vmax = min(0.63 fcu , 5.6 MPa) (BS 8110-2:1985 5.4)

where,


Vco =0.67bv h (f t
2
)
+ 0.8 f cp f t , (CP 12.3.8.4)
where,
ft =0.24 f cu (CP 12.3.8.4)

19 - 22 Beam Design
Vc = Vco + P sin β (CP 12.3.8.4)

 f pe  V
 1 − 0.55
 
f pu  M

Vcr ≥ 0.1bv d f cu (CP 12.3.8.5)

Given v, vc, and vmax, the required shear reinforcement is calculated as follows
(CP 12.3.8.6):

 2
 f
vr 0.4  cu 
3
= if 40 < fcu ≤ 80 N mm2 (CP 12.3.8.7)

40 
 

( )
2
 0.4 80 3
if fcu > 80 N mm2
40
fcu ≤ 80 N 2 (for calculation purpose only) (CP 6.1.2.5(c))

mm
As vr b
= , (CP 12.3.8.7)
sv 0.87 f yv
 If v > vc + vr ,
Beam Design 19 - 23
Asv ( v − vc ) b
= (CP 12.3.8.8)
sv 0.87 f yv
fyv ≤ 460 MPa.
load combination.



tors.
19 - 24 Beam Design

eration should be given using the following algorithms (CP 6.3.1).
2T
vt = (CP 6.3.3(a))
2
h
 hmin
3
hmax 
Tseg = T   (CP 6.3.3(b))
 ∑ h3 h
 (
min max ) 

hmax = Larger dimension of a rectangular section
fy:
y1
vt ≤ min(0.8 f cu , 7 N/mm 2 ) × (CP 6.3.4, Table 17)
550

(
vt ,min = min 0.067 fcu ,0.6 N/mm 2 ) (CP 6.3.4, Table 17)
Beam Design 19 - 25
(

If the factored torsional shear stress, vt is less than the threshold limit, vt,min, tor-
sion can be safely ignored (CP 6.3.5). In that case, the program reports that no
torsion reinforcement is required. However, if vt exceeds the threshold limit,
vt,min, it is assumed that the torsional resistance is provided by closed stirrups
and longitudinal bars (CP 6.3.5).
 If vt > vt,min, the required closed stirrup area per unit spacing, Asv,t /sv, is cal-
culated as:
Asv ,t T
= (CP 6.3.6)
sv 0.8 x1 y1 (0.87 f yv )
Asv ,t f yv ( x1 + y1 )
Al = (CP 6.3.6)
sv f y

the closed link, and y1 is the larger center-to-center dimension of the closed
link.
v + vt ≤ vmax (CP 6.3.4)
(
vmax ≤ min 0.8 fcu , 7 N/mm 2 ) (CP 6.3.4)
19 - 26 Beam Design
increased in size.

c b − 2c c bf
c c
ds
h − 2c h h h − 2c
c c
b bw − 2c
bw

19.8 Slab Design

design is carried out based on the ultimate strength design method (Hong Kong
Slab Design 19 - 27
CP 2013) for prestressed reinforced concrete as described in the following sub-




19 - 28 Slab Design

cordingly.

3.12.5.3)

(Concrete Society, Technical Report 43):
0.36 f ci
exceeds 0.15 f cu .
Slab Design 19 - 29
Ft
As =
( 5/8 ) f y
where
fct (h − x )b
Ft =−
2

(CP 9.2.1.3).


The punching shear is checked at a critical section at a distance of 1.5d from
the face of the support (CP 6.1.5.7(f)). For rectangular columns and concentrat-
ed loads, the critical area is taken as a rectangular area with the sides parallel to
the sides of the columns or the point loads. Figure 11-4 shows the auto punch-
ing perimeters considered by SAFE for the various column shapes. The column
location (i.e., interior, edge, corner) and the punching perimeter may be over-
written using the Punching Check Overwrites.
19 - 30 Slab Design
1.5d
1.5d 1.5d
1.5d
1.5d 1.5d

where,


Slab Design 19 - 31
Vco =0.67bv h (f t
2
)
+ 0.8 f cp f t , (CP 12.3.8.4)
where,
ft =0.24 f cu (CP 12.3.8.4)

Vc = Vco + P sin β (CP 12.3.8.4)

 f pe  V
 1 − 0.55
 f pu  M

Vcr ≥ 0.1bv d f cu (CP 12.3.8.5)

centricity of shear about the bending axis, the nominal design shear stress, vmax,
is calculated as:
 1.5 M 
V = V f + x  (CP 6.1.5.6(b), 6.1.5.6(c))
eff , x  Vy 
 
 1.5 M 
y
V = V f +  (CP 6.1.5.6(b), 6.1.5.6(c))
eff , y  Vx 
 
19 - 32 Slab Design
Veff , x

 ud
vmax = max  (CP 6.1.5.7)
Veff , y
 u d
where,
x and y are the lengths of the sides of the critical section parallel to the
axis of bending,
umn at the connection,
V is the total punching shear force, and

taken as


f = 1.25 for edge columns (CP 6.1.5.6(b), 6.1.5.6(c))


lowing section.

6.1.5.7(e)). If the slab thickness does not meet these requirements, the punch-
ing shear reinforcement is not designed and the slab thickness should be in-
creased by the user.
Slab Design 19 - 33


vmax = min(0.8 fcu , 7 MPa) (CP 6.1.2.5(a))

 2
 f
vr 0.4  cu 
3
= if 40 < fcu ≤ 80 N mm2 (CP 12.3.8.7)

40 
 

( )
2
 0.4 80 3
if fcu > 80 N mm2
40
f cu ≤ 80 N 2 (for calculation purpose only) (CP 6.1.2.5(c))

mm
As vr b
= , (CP 12.3.8.7)
sv 0.87 f yv
 If v > vc + vr ,
Asv ( v − vc ) b
= (CP 12.3.8.8)
sv 0.87 f yv
19 - 34 Slab Design

columns.

edge
d 2 d 2 Iy
gy
gx
s0 s0 s0
Iy x x gx
Iy
Critical d 2
section
centroid Free
edge y x
y
centroid
Ix
Ix

critical sections outside the shear-reinforced zone
parallel to the column face (CP12.3.8.10). When V > 1.8Vc, the maximum
spacing is reduced to 0.5 d.

umns respectively.
Slab Design 19 - 35

Spacing
not be less than the minimum cover specified in CP 4.2.4 plus half of the diam-
eter of the flexural reinforcement.

The following information is taken from the BS 8110-1997 code. When speci-
fying shear studs, the distance, so, between the column face and the first pe-
ripheral line of shear studs should not be smaller than 0.5d. The spacing be-
tween adjacent shear studs, g, at the first peripheral line of studs shall not
specified as:
so ≤ 0.5d (CP 6.1.5.7(f))
s ≤ 0.75d (CP 6.1.5.7(f))
g ≤ 1.5d (CP 6.1.5.7(f))
Stirrups are permitted only when slab thickness is greater than 200 mm (CP
6.1.5.7(e)).
19 - 36 Slab Design
References
ACI, 2007. Seismic Design of Punching Shear Reinforcement in Flat

Plates (ACI 421.2R-07), American Concrete Institute, 38800
Country Club Drive, Farmington Hills, Michigan.
ACI, 2008. Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete (ACI

318-08) and Commentary (ACI 318R-08), American Concrete
Institute, P.O. Box 9094, Farmington Hills, Michigan.
ACI, 2011. Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete (ACI

318-11) and Commentary (ACI 318R-11), American Concrete
Institute, P.O. Box 9094, Farmington Hills, Michigan.
AS, 2001. Australian Standard TM for Concrete Structure (AS 3600-2001)

incorporating Amendment No.1 and Amendment No. 2, Stand-
ards Australia International Ltd, GPO Box 5420, Sydney, NSW
2001, Australia.
AS, 2009. Australian Standard ® for Concrete Structure (AS 3600-2009),

Standards Australia International Ltd, GPO Box 476, Sydney,
NSW 2001, Australia.
BC, 2008. BC 2:2008, Design Guide of High Strength Concrete to Sin-

gapore Standard CP65, February 2008, Building and Construc-
tion Authority, Singapore.
R-1
BSI, 1997. BS 8110-1:1997 Incorporating Amendments Nos. 1, 2, and 3,

Structural Use of Concrete, Part 1, Code of Practice for Design
and Construction, British Standards Institution, London, UK,
2005.
BSI, 1985. BS 8110-2:1985 Reprinted, incorporating Amendments Nos.

1, 2, and 3, Structural Use of Concrete, Part 2, Code of Practice
for Special Circumstances, British Standards Institution, London,
UK, 2005.
CP, 1999. CP 65:Part 1:1999, Code of Practice for Structural Use of

Concrete Part 1: Design and Construction Incorporating Erratum
No. 1, September 2000, Singapore Productivity and Standards
Board, Singapore.
EN 1992-1-1, 2004. Eurocode 2: Design of Concrete Structures, Part 1-1,

General Rules and Rules for Buildings, European Committee for
Standardization, Brussels, Belgium.
EN 1990:2002. Eurocode: Basis of Structural Design (includes Amend-

ment A1:2005), European Committee for Standardization, Brus-
sels, Belgium.
CSA, 2004. A23.3-04, Design of Concrete Structures, Canadian Stand-

ards Association, Rexdale, Ontario, Canada.
HK CP, 2013.
HK CP, 2004. Code of Practice for Structural Use of Concrete 2004,

Buildings Department, 12/F-18/F Pioneer Centre, 750 Nathan
Road, Mongkok, Kowloon, Hong Kong.
Italian NTC, 2008
IS, 1980. Code of Practice for Prestressed Concrete, First Revision, In-
corporating Amendment No. 1, 1999. Bureau of Indian Stand-
ards, Manak Bhavan, 9 Bahadur Shah Zafar Marg, New Delhi
110002, India.
IS, 2000. Code of Practice for Plain and Reinforced Concrete, Third Edi-
tion, Twentieth Reprint, March 2000, Bureau of Indian Stand-
R-2
References
ards, Manak Bhavan, 9 Bahadur Shah Zafar Marg, New Delhi

110002, India.
NZS, 2006. Concrete Structures Standard, Part 1 – Design of Concrete

Structures, Standards New Zealand, Private Bag 2439, Welling-
ton, New Zealand.
TS 500-2000/TS 3233-1979
R- 3

Manual Safe

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Manual Safe

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Manual Safe

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Diseño de Concreto Postensado

Ing Jorge Cabanillas , MSc

Barcelona Noviembre 2014

Copyright  Computers & Structures, Inc., 1978-2014

No part of this publication may be reproduced or distributed in any form or by any

Further information and copies of this documentation may be obtained from:

Computers & Structures, Inc.

[email protected] (for general information)

CONSIDERABLE TIME, EFFORT AND EXPENSE HAVE GONE INTO THE

Part I Post-Tensioning Concrete Design Theory and

1.2 Post Tensioning System in SAFE 1-1

1.3 Definition of Terms 1-2

1.4 Analysis and Design Procedure 1-3

Chapter 2 The Tendon Object in SAFE

2.2 Tendon Geometry 2-1

2.3 Tendon Discretization 2-2

2.4 Tendon Material Property 2-3

2.5 Tendon Property 2-3

Chapter 3 Computing Prestress Losses

3.3 Computation of Long-Term Losses 3-6

Chapter 4 Loads Due to Post-Tensioning

4.2 Dead Load-Balancing 4-2

4.3 Primary Moments 4-3

4.4 Secondary (Hyperstatic) Moments 4-4

Chapter 5 Automated Tendon Layout

5.2 Adding Tendons to a SAFE Model 5-2

5.3 Procedures Used in Automated Tendon Layout 5-4

Part II Post-Tensioning Concrete Design Codes

Chapter 6 Design for ACI 318-08

6.2 Design Load Combinations 6-5

6.3 Limits on Material Strength 6-7

6.4 Strength Reduction Factors 6-7

6.5 Design Assumptions for Prestressed Concrete 6-8

6.6 Serviceability Requirements of Flexural

6.7 Beam Design 6-12

6.8 Slab Design 6-31

Chapter 7 Design for AS 3600-01

7.2 Design Load Combinations 7-4

7.3 Limits on Material Strength 7-6

7.4 Strength Reduction Factors 7-7

7.6 Serviceability Requirements of Flexural

7.7 Beam Design 7-10

7.8 Slab Design 7-28

Chapter 8 Design for BS 8110-97

8.2 Design Load Combinations 8-4

8.3 Limits on Material Strength 8-6

8.4 Partial Safety Factors 8-6

8.5 Design Assumptions for Prestressed

8.6 Serviceability Requirements of Flexural

8.7 Beam Design 8-10

8.8 Slab Design 8-27

Chapter 9 Design for CSA A23.3-04

9.3 Limits on Material Strength 9-7

9.5 Design Assumptions for Prestressed Concrete 9-8

9.6 Serviceability Requirements of Flexural

9.8 Slab Design 9-33

Chapter 10 Design for Eurocode 2-2004

10.2 Design Load Combinations 10-5

10.3 Limits on Material Strength 10-9